HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrion Construction Corporation; 2005-11-18; 38901 Part 2 of 2MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT REPORT
@ Employee Source
Apprennceship A
Emplovment E
Training Program T
, Union Hiring Hall U
Other 0
Contractor: Employer I.D. Number:
Project Title: Work Order Number:
Black, African American
Mexican American, Hispanic,
Native American, American
Asian, Pacific Islander
Filipino
Caucasian
Other ethnicity (not defined
Reporting Period: From: To : Bid Number:
15
16
17
18
19
20
BL
MA
N.4
AP
FL
CA
OTH
I c EthnicSvmbol I
Prepared by (Signature)
SEPTEMBER 2004
Citywide Pump Station Upgrades Project:
Group I - North County SPS
Title Date Prepared
Equal Opportunity Contracting Program (EOCP)
Construction Requirements
EOCP-BB
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART l--GENEW
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies all rough carpentry.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
Section 04200 Unit Masonry
Section 07322 Concrete Roof Tile
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of
this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall
prevail.
Reference - Title
ANSI B18.2.1-81
ANSI B18.2.2-87
ANSI B 18.5-78
ANSI B18.6.1-81
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series Including
Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws
Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
Round Head Bolts (Inch Series)
Wood Screws (Inch Series)
ASTM A687-89 High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs
AWPA C1-88
AWPA C2-88
All Timber Products--Preservative Treatment by
Pressure Process
Standard for the Preservative Treatment of Lumber,
Timber, Bridge Ties, and Mine Ties by Pressure
Treatment
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100- 1
Reference
AWPA C9-85
AWPA M6-84
AWPB LP-22-88
FEDSPEC
FF-B-5 88C-7 1
FEDSPEC
FF-N- 105B-7 1
FEDSPEC
FF-S-325-57
FEDSPEC
FF-T- 1 8 13 -73
FEDSPEC
MM-T-3 7 1 E-75
FEDSPEC
UU-B-790A-68
MIL-L- 1 9 140E-84
"FP-ND S - 8 6
PS 1-83
PS 20-70 (1986)
TPI 78-85
TPI BWT-76
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
Plywood--Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process
Brands Used on Forest Products
Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber, and Plywood
Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for
Ground Contact Use
Bolt, Toggle, and Expansion Sleeve,
Screw
Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes:
Wire, Cut and Wrought
Shield, Expansion, Nail Expansion, and
Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry)
Tack
Ties, Railroad, Wood (Cross and
Switch)
Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber:
(KraR, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire
Resistant)
Lumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treated
National Design Specification for Wood Construction
and Supplement 1986, Design Values for Wood
Construction
U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard,
Constructionhndustrial Plywood
U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard,
American Sohood Lumber Standards
Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood
Trusses
Bracing Wood Trusses--Commentary and
Recommendations
Rough Carpentry
06 1 00-2
Reference - Title
TPI HET-80
TPI QST-88
UBC-88
Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses--Commentary and
Recommendations
Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected 'Wood
Trusses
Uniform Building Code
B. GRADINGANDMARKING:
1. LUMBER: Each piece of fkming and board lumber and each bundle of small
pieces of lumber shall be marked with the grade mark of a recognized ahsociation
or independent inspection agency. Such association or agency shall be certified
by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the
species used.
2. PLYWOOD: Each sheet shall be marked with the mark of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control
over the quality of the plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species
group or span rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance
withps 1.
3. PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD: The Contractor
shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood products. Each treated piece
shall be permanently marked or branded by the producer in accordance with
AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager with the
inspection report of an independent inspection agency showing that offered
products comply with applicable AWPA treatment standards. The AWPB
Quality Mark "LP-22" on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of inspection
reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.
4. FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD: Each piece
shall be marked in accordance with MILL-19140, except pieces that are to be
natural or transparent finished. In addition, exterior fire-retardant lumber and
plywood shall be distinguished by a permanent penetrating blue stain. Labels of
a nationally recognized independent testing agency will be accepted as evidence
of conformance to the fire-retardant requirements of MILL-19140.
C. SIZES AND SURFACING:
Dressed sizes of yard and structural lumber shall comply with PS 20. Unless otherwise
specified, lumber shall be surfaced four sides. Size references, unless otherwise
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-3
1.03
1.04 0
1.05
1.06
specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances
allowed by the standard under which the product is produced.
D. MOISTURE CONTENT:
Lumber shall be air-dried or kiln-dried.
treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as fbllows:
1.
2.
Treated lumber shall be kiln-dried after
Framing lumber and boards-1 9 percent maximum.
Timbers 5 inches and thicker-25 percent maximum.
SUBMITTALS
The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
1.
2.
Detailed list of equipment, joist hangers, and type of fasteners to be used.
A copy of this specification section with addenda updates, and all referenced
sections with addenda updates, with each paragraph check marked to show
specification compliance or marked to show deviations.
STORAGE
Materials shall be stored in an area protected fiom weather, elevated a minimum of 6 inches
above the ground on framework and covered with waterproof covering. Materials shall not
be stored in wet or damp areas.
PRESERVATIVE TREATME"
Lumber and timber, where specified, shall be treated in accordance with AWPA C1 and C2
and plywood in accordance with AWPA C1 and C9. All wood shall be air- or kiln-dried after
treatment. Specific treatments shall be verified by the report of an approved independent
inspection agency or the AWPB Quality Mark on each piece. Surfaces of lumber that will be
exposed shall not be incised. Areas that are cut or drilled after treatment shall be brush
coated with either the same preservative used in the treatment or with a 2 percent copper
napthenate solution. Preservatives used shall be acceptable for specific treatment under local
codes and regulations pertaining to toxic and hazardous materials. Unless otherwise
specified, the following items shall be preservative treated:
FIRE-RETARDAhT TREATMENT
The following items shall be treated in accordance with MLL19140. Such items which
will not be inside a building shall receive exterior fire-retardant treatment.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry 06 100-4
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER
A.. STRUCTURALLUMBER
Unless otherwise specified, structual lumber shall be any of the species and grades
listed in NFPA-NDS that have allowable unit stresses in psi not less than allowable
unit stresses specified. Structural lumber shall be used for joists, rafters, .headers,
trusses, beams, columns, posts, stair stringers, girders, and all other members specified
to be stress rated.
2.02 PLYWOOD PANELS
A. COMBINATION SUBFLOOR UNDERLAYMENT:
Unless otherwise specified, panel subflooring shall be Exterior Type, C-C Plugged
Grade. Minimum thickness shall be as listed below except where specified to have
greater thickness:
Su~port spacing Minimum thickness
16 inches 1/2 inch for Group 1 species, 19/32 inch for Group 2 and 3 species, 23/32
inch for Group 4 species
24 inches 23/32 inch for Group 1 species, 7/8 inch for Group 2 and 3 species, 1
inch for Group 4 species
B. WALL SHEATHING:
Unless otherwise specified, panel wall sheathing shall be C-D Grade, Exposure 1, and a
minimum thickness of 314 inch.
C. ROOF SHEATHING:
Unless otherwise specified, panel roof sheathing shall be C-D Grade, Exposure 1, with
an identification index of not less than 24/0.
2.03 OTHERMATERIALS
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-5
A. BULDINGPAPER
Building paper shall conform to FEDSPEC UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 1.
B. TRUSSED RAFTERS:
Trussed rafters, where specified, shall be metal plate connected wood trusses designed
in accordance with TPI 78 and fabricated in accordance with TPI QST.
C. TRUSSED JOISTS:
Trussed joists, where specified, shall be metal plate connected parallel chord wood
trusses designed in accordance with TPI 78 and fabricated in accordance with TPI
QST.
D. WOOD BUMPERS:
Wood bumpers shall conform to FEDSPEC MM-T-371, Type I, Form A or B, and
shall be oak.
2.04 ROUGHHARDWARE
Unless otherwise specified, rough hardware shall be of the type and size necessary for the
project requirements. Sizes, types, and spacing of fastenings of manufactured building
materials shall be as recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
Rough hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in contact with preservative
treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete walls or slabs shall be hot-dip galvanized. Nails
and fastenings for fire-retardant treated lumber and woodwork exposed to the weather shall
be copper alloy.
Bolts, nuts, studs, and rivets shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.5, ANSI B18.2.2,
and ASTM A687.
Expansion shields shall conform to FEDSPEC FF-$325.
maximum size of devices in Groups IV, V, VI, and VII shall be 3/8 inch.
Unless otherwise specified,
Lag screws and lag bolts shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1.
Toggle bolts shall conform to FEDSPEC FF-B-588.
Wood screws shall conform to ANSI B 1 8.6.1.
Wire nails shall conform to FEDSPEC FF-N-105.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-6
Joist hangers shall be steel or iron, zinc coated, sized to fit the supported member, of
sufficient strength to develop the full strength of the supported member in accordance with
the UBC and furnished complete with any special nails required.
Unless otherwise specified, joist anchors for joists supported by masonry walls shall be
3/16-inch by 1 1/2-inch steel tee or strap, bent and of length to provide 4 inches of
embedment into wall and 12 inches along joist. Unless otherwise specified, anchors for joists
parallel to masonry or concrete walls shall be 1/4-inch by 1 1/4-inch minimum cross-sectional
area, steel strap, length as necessary to extend over top of first three joists and into wall 8
inches.
Door buck anchors, where specified, shall be metal anchors, 1/8-inch by 1 1/4-inch steel, 12
inches long, with ends bent 2 inches. Anchors shall be screwed to the backs of bucks and
built into masonry or concrete, and shall be located 8 inches above sills and below heads and
not more than 24 inches intermediately between.
2.05 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings for fabricated wood trusses and other fabricated structural
members indicating materials, details of construction, methods of fastening, and
erection details.
2. Inspection report specified in paragraph 06100-1.02 B.3.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
Framing lumber and other rough carpentry shall be fit and set accurately to the required
lines and levels and secured in place in a rigid manner. Framing members between
bearing points shall not be spliced Joists, rafters, and purlins shall be set with their
crown edge up. Members shall be hed for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts;
however, cutting or boring of structural members for the passage of ducts or pipes is
not permitted. Unless otherwise specified, all members damaged by such cutting or
boring shall be reinforced by means of specially formed and approved sheet metal or
bar steel shapes, and spiking and nailing shall be in accordance with the Nailing
Schedule contained in UBC. Spikes, nails, and bolts shall be drawn up tight. Timber
connections and fastenings shall conform to NFPA-NDS. Slate or steel shims shall be
used when leveling joists, beams, and girders on masonry or concrete.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-7
B. SILLS:
1. GENERAL: Sills shall be set level and square, wedged with steel or slate shims,
and grouted with nonshrinking cement mortar to provide continuous and solid
bearing. Sills shall be anchored to the foundations as specified. Unless
otherwise specified, minimum 5/8-inch diameter bolts shall be provided at all
comers and splices and spaced at a maximum of 6 feet O.C. between corner bolts.
At least two bolts shall be provided for each sill member. Bolts shall be
provided with plate washers and nuts. Bolts in exterior walls shall be zinc-
coated.
2. ANCHORS IN MASONRY: Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be
embedded not less than 15 inches in masonry unit walls and each provided with a
nut and a 2-inch diameter washer at bottom end. Bolts shall be fully grouted
with mortar.
3. ANCHORS IN CONCRETE: Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be
embedded not less than 8 inches in poured concrete walls and each provided with
a nut and a 2-inch diameter washer at bottom end. A bent end may be substituted
for the nut and washer; bend shall be not less than 90 degrees.
C. BEAMS AND GIRDERS:
Unless otherwise specified, beams and girders shall be set to elevations and alignment
specified, and anchored to bearing walls, piers, or supports with U-shaped steel strap
anchors. Anchors shall be embedded in concrete or masonry at each bearing and
through-bolted to the beams or girders with not less than two bolts. Bolts shall be not
less than 1/2 inch in diameter and with plate washers under heads and nuts. Beams and
girders, unless otherwise specified, shall be installed with 8-inch minimum end bearing
on walls or supports. Joints and splices shall be made over bearings only.
D. JOISTS
1. GENERAL: Joists shall be of the sizes and spacing specified, in alignment, and
of uniform width. Joists shall have full bearing on sills, plates, beams, girders,
and trusses and shall provide laps over bearing only. Where joists are of
insufficient length to produce a 12-inch lap, joists shall be butted together over
bearing and provided with sheet metal connectors installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Metal hangers shall be provided for joists
framing into the side of headers, beams, or girders. The minimum joist end
bearing shall be 4 inches, and joists built into concrete or masonry shall have a
1/2-inch minimum clearance at the top, end, and sides. For joists approved to be
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-8
E.
bored for the passage of pipes or conduits, passage shall be through the neutral
axis of the joist. Steel joist hangers of proper size and type shall be provided to
receive the ends of all fiamed joists.
Unless otherwise specified, doubled joists shall be provided under bearing walls
and partitions running parallel with the floor joists, around stairways, and at other
openings where joists are cut and bed. Joists under partitions that are to
receive ducts, pipes, and conduits shall be doubled, spaced for clearance, blocked
apart 4 feet on center, rigidly flamed, and spiked together.
2. JOIST ANCHORS: Anchors shall be provided for each fourth joist supported by
a masonry wall. Wall end of anchors shall be built into the wall and nailed to the
joist. The first three joists parallel to concrete or masonry walls shall be
anchored at bridging points, but not less than 8 feet O.C. fiom end walls. Anchors
shall extend into the wall as specified.
BRIDGING:
Bridging shall be provided for floor and ceiling joists and for roof rafters having slopes
of less than 4 inches in 12 inches. Bridging shall be located as specified. Bridging
shall be provided for spans greater than 6 feet, but maximum spacing between rows of
bridging shall not exceed 8 feet. Rows of bridging shall be installed uniformly. Metal
or wood cross-bridging shall be provided except where solid bridging is specified.
Unless otherwise specified, wood cross-bridging shall be not less than 2 by 3 inches.
Metal cross-bridging shall be the manufacturer's standard product, not less than 16 gage
before forming and coating. Metal bridging shall be the compression type, lodged into
or nailed to the wide faces of opposite joists at points diagonally across fiom each other
near the bottoms and tops of joists.
F. WALLFRAMING:
1. STUDS: Studs shall be straight and set plumb, true, and in alignment. In walls
and partitions more than 8 feet tall, horizontal bridging shall be provided at not
more than 8 feet O.C. using nominal 2-inch material of the same width as the
studs. Sizes and spacing of studs shall be as specified. Double studs shall be
provided at jambs and heads of openings and triple at comers to form comer
posts. Comer posts shall be fkxned to receive sheathing, lath, and interior finish.
Openings exceeding 4 feet in width shall be trussed over or provided with a
header of sufficient depth. Studs abutting concrete or masonry walls shall be
anchored thereto near the top and bottom and at midheight of each story using
expansion bolts or powder-actuated drive studs.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-9
G.
H.
2. PLATES: Plates for walls and partitions shall be the same width as the studs to
form continuous horizontal ties. Single plates shall be spliced; ends of double
plates shall be staggered. Top plates in walls and bearing partitions shall be
double, built up of two nominal 2-inch thick members. Top plates for
nonbearing partitions shall be single or double plates of the same size as the
studs. Lower members of double top plates and single top plates shall be nailed
to each stud and corner post with two 16-penny nails (three nails for 2 x 6 studs).
Upper members of double plates shall be nailed to the lower members with
10-penny nails, two near each end, and staggered 16 inches O.C. intermediately
between. Sole plates on wood construction shall be nailed through the subfloor
to each joist and header. Sole plates on concrete or masonry shall be anchored
with expansion bolts, one near each end and at no more than 6 feet o.c., or in
accordance with paragraph 061 00-3.01 B. Powder-actuated fasteners, one near
each end and at not more than 3 feet O.C. may be used only where specified.
Plates cut for the passage of pipes or ducts shall be provided with a steel angle as
a tie for the plate and bearing for joist.
3. FIRESTOPS: Firestops shall be provided for wood bed walls and partitions
and for furred spaces of concrete or masomy walls at each floor level and at the
ceiling line in the top story. Where firestops are not automatically provided by
the framing system used, they shall be formed of closely fitted wood blocks of
nominal 2-inch thick material of the same width as the studs and joists.
4. DIAGONAL BRACING: Except where plywood wall sheeting is specified, and
unless otherwise specified, diagonal bracing shall be provided at all external
comers and internal angles and at maximum 40-foot centers in stud walls.
Bracing shall be of 1 by 6 inch material, let into the exterior face of studs.
Bracing shall extend from top plates to sill at an angle of approximately 45
degrees. When openings occur near comers, diagonal knee braces shall be
provided extending from the corner post above headers to top plates and hm
below window sills to the main sill.
WALL SHEATHING:
Plywood panel wall sheathing shall be provided where specified and shall be applied
horizontally or vertically. Sheathing shall be extended over and nailed to sill and top
plate. Sheathing edges shall abut over centerlines of supports. A 1/8-inch spacing shall
be provided at panel ends and 114 inch at panel edges. If sheathing is applied
horizontally, vertical end joints shall be staggered. Blocking shall be provided for
horizontal edges not otherwise supported.
BUILDING PAPER
Unless otherwise specified, building paper shall be provided on wood board sheathing
behind all types of exterior siding. Paper shall be applied shingle fashion, horizontally,
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06 100-1 0
beginning at the bottom of the wall. Edges shall be lapped 4 inches and nailed with
1 -inch, zinc-coated roofing nails, spaced 12 inches O.C. and driven through tin discs.
I. CEILING JOISTS:
Ceiling joists shall be sized as specified and set accurately and in alignment. Joists
shall be nailed to all plates with not less than three 10-penny nails.
J. RAFTERS:
Rafters shall be sized as specified, set accurately, and form a true plane. Unless
otherwise specified, members shall be 2 inches thick. Rafters shall have full and solid
bearing on plates. Headers and trimmers carrying or supporting two or more rafters
shall be doubled unless otherwise specified.
K. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS:
Framing anchors shall be provided at every other rafter to fasten rafter to plates and
studs against uplift and movement of any kind. Anchors shall be punched and formed
for nailing so that nails will be stressed in shear only.
L. TRUSSES:
Metal plate connected wood trusses shall be handled and erected in accordance with
PI HET and braced in accordance with TPI BWT.
M. PLYWOOD PANEL ROOF SHEATHING:
Roof panels shall be installed with the grain of the outer plies or long dimension of full
panels at right angles to supports. End joints shall be staggered and located over the
centerlines of supports. A 1/8-inch spacing shall be provided at panel ends and 114
inch at panel edges. Unless otherwise specified, panels shall be nailed with common
nails or annular rings or screw-type nails spaced 6 inches O.C. at supported edges and 12
inches O.C. at intermediate bearings. Nail size shall be in conformance with APA
recommendations for panel type and thickness to be fastened.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Rough Carpentry
06100-1 1
SECTION 06 150
CARPENTRY
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies all rough and finish carpentry and millwork.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of
this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall
prevail.
Reference - Title
ANSI A1 56.9-88
ANSI A208.1-79
ANSIB18.2.1-81
ANSI B 18.2.2-87
ANSI B18.5-78
ANSIB18.6.1-81
ASTM A687-90
AWPA C 1-88
AWPA C2-88
Cabinet Hardware
Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series Including
Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws
Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
Round Head Bolts (Inch Series)
Wood Screws (Inch Series)
High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs
All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Process
Standard for the Preservative Treatment of Lumber,
Timber, Bridge Ties, and Mine Ties by Pressure Treatment
AWPA C9-85 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06150-1
AWPA M6-84
AWPB LP-22-88
Brands Used on Forest Products
Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber, and Plywood
Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Ground
Contact Use
FEDSPEC'
FF-B-588C-71 Screw
Bolt, Toggle, and Expansion Sleeve,
FEDSPEC
FF-N-105B-71 Wire, Cut and Wrought
Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes:
FEDSPEC
FF-S-325-57
Shield, Expansion, Nail Expansion, and
Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry)
HPMA HP-83 Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
NEMA LD3-85 High-pressure Decorative Laminates
NFP-NDS-86 National Design Specification for Wood Construction and
Supplement 1986, Design Values for Wood Construction
PS 1-83 U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard,
Constructionhndustal Plywood
PS 20-70 (1 986) U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard,
American Softwood Lumber Standards
WWPA GRWL-83 Western Woods Use Book, Chapter III - WWPA Grading
Rules for Western Lumber
B. GRADE AND QUALITY MARKZNG:
1. LUMBER: Each piece or each bundle of lumber, millwork, and trim shall
be identified by the grade mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency that is certified by the Board of Review, American
Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species.
2. PLYWOOD: Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing
control over the quality of the plywood. The mark shall identify the
plywood by species group or span rating, and shall show exposure durability
classification, grade, and compliance with PS 1.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06 150-2
3. PRESSURE TREATED WOOD: Each treated piece shall be permanently
marked or branded by the producer in accordance with AWPA M6, except
that lumber which is smaller than 2 by 4 inches or shorter than 36 inches and
bundled may be marked on outer faces only.
C. SIZES AND PATTERNS OF WOOD PRODUCTS:
Yard and board lumber sizes shall conform to PS 20. Shaped lumber and millwork
shall be provided in the patterns specified and standard patterns of the association
covering the species. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are norninal sizes,
and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the applicable
standard.
D. MOISTURE CONTENT:
Lumber shall be air-dried or kiln-dried. Treated lumber shall be kiln-dried after
treatment: The maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows:
1. Interior paneling: 12 percent
2. Interior finish lumber, trim, and millwork 1 1/4-inch or less in nominal
thickness: 12 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 15 percent on
remainder.
3. Exterior treated or untreated finish lumber and trim 4-inch or less in nominal
thickness: 15 percent.
4. Other materials: 19 percent
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Lumber, plywood, trim, and millwork shall be delivered to the job site in an undamaged
condition. Materials shall be stacked to ensure ventilation and drainage and protected
against dampness before and after delivery. Materials shall be stored under cover in a well-
ventilated enclosure and protected against extreme changes in temperature and humidity.
1.04 PRESSURE TREATMENT
Lumber treated in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C2 and plywood treated in
accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C9 shall be used where exposed to weather or
humidity and for wood members in contact with masonry or concrete. Treatment shall be
verified by an approved inspection agency report, or the AWPB LP-22 mark on each piece.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06 150-3
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD
A. LUMBER
Provide lumber of the grades and species listed below for the various purposes,
graded in accordance with WCLlB "Standard Grading Rules No. 16", 1988 Edition,
or WWPA "Western Lumber Grading Rules 88".
B. TRIM, FINISH, AND FRAMES:
Trim, finish, and fiames shall be Southern Pine, Ponderosa Pine, White Pine, or
Douglas Fir, first grade of the species for natural finish and second grade of the
species for paint finish. Trim, except window stools and aprons, shall be provided
with hollow backs. Exposed edges of boards shall be eased. Trim to receive
opaque finish may be finger jointed.
C. SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD:
Softwood plywood shall be PS 1, thicknesses as specified. Plywood for shelving
shall be interior type, A-B Grade, any species group. Plywood for counter tops shall
be exterior type, A-C Grade.
D. PARTICLEBOARD:
Particleboard shall be ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-2 or 2-M-2 or better.
E. SHELVING:
'Shelving shall be suitable species of grade equal to or exceed Boards, 3 common
Hem-Fir under WWPA GRWL.
2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC
Laminated plastic for counter tops shall be NEMA LD 3, Grade GP 50 or PF 42, satin
finish. Color and pattern shall be as specified. Backing sheet shall be NEMA LD 3, Type
BK 20.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06 150-4
2.03 HARDWARE
Size, types, and spacings of manufactured building materials shall be as recommended by
the product manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Hot-dipped galvanized steel or
aluminum nails and fastenings shall be provided where used on the exterior or exposed to
weather or humidity.
1. Expansion shields shalljconform to Fed. Spec. FF-S-325. Unless otherwise
specified, maximum size of devices in Groups IV, V, VI, and VIII shall be
3/8-inch.
2.
3.
Toggle bolts shall conform to Fed. Spec. FF-B-588.
Wood screws shall codorm to ANSI B 1 8.6.1.
4. Wire nails and staples shall conform to Fed. Spec. FF-N-105.
5. Bolts, nuts, lag screws, and studs shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI
B18.5, ANSI B18.2.2, and ASTM A687.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. COUNTER TOPS:
Counter tops shall be fabricated with lumber and a core of exterior plywood or
particleboard, glued and screwed to form an integral unit. Laminated plastic shall
be bonded under pressure to exposed surfaces, using type of glue recommended by
the plastic manufacturer. The counter top unit shall be either the self-edged type
covered with NEMA LD 3, Grade GP 50 plastic, or the post-formed type covered
with NEMA LD 3, Grade PF 42 plastic.
B. CABINETS:
1. GENERAL: Cabinets shall be fabricated with solid ends and frame fronts,
or with frsunes all around. Frames shall be solid hardwood and, where
exposed, of the same species as the plywood veneer. Ends, bottom, back,
partitions, and doors shall be hardwood plywood. Joints shall be mortised
and tenoned, glued and screwed to produce a rigid unit, and exposed edges
of plywood shall be covered with hardwood strips. Doors, frames, and solid
exposed ends shall be 3/4-inch thick; bottom, partitions, and framed ends,
1/2-inch minimum; back, 1/4-inch minimum.
2. CABINET HARDWARE: Cabinet hardware shall conform to ANSI
A156.9. Hardware provided for each door shall include two self-closing
hinges. Two side-mounted metal drawer slides shall be provided for each
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06150-5
drawer. Hardware exposed to view shall be bright chromium plated unless
otherwise specified
3. FINISH: A natural factory finish shall be provided on all wood surfaces
after fabrication. The finish shall be the fabricator's standard natural finish,
except that it shall be equivalent to one coat of sealer and one coat of spar
varnish on all surfaces and a second coat of spar varnish on all surfaces
exposed to view. Surface shall be sanded lightly and wiped clean between
coats.
c. WORKBENCHES:
Workbenches shall be fabricated as specified. Drawer comers shall be dovetailed
and glued and kames fastened with suitable wood screws or bolts. Exposed
surfaces shall be sanded smooth. Two side-mounted, metal, ball-bearing drawer
slides shall be provided for each drawer and at least two surface-mounted hinges
and a magnetic catch provided for each door.
2.05 PRODUCT DATA '
Shop drawings of all prefabricated millwork including details and erection data associated
with the work of other trades, materials and species, arrangements, profiles of moldmgs,
thicknesses, sizes of parts, construction, fastenings, and clearances shall be provided in
accordance with Section 01300.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Framing lumber and other rough carpentry shall be fit and set accurately to the required
lines and levels and secured in place in a rigid manner using the proper size fasteners so as
not to split the members.
3.02 GENERAL FINISH WORK
Sizes, materials, and designs shall be provided as specified. Where practicable, items of
built-up millwork shall be shop assembled and finished. Joints shall be tight and
constructed in a manner that will conceal shrinkage. Trim and moldings shall be mitered at
exterior angles and at returns. Material shall show no warp after installation. Millwork and
trim shall be installed in the maximum practical lengths and finish work fastened with finish
nails. Blind nailing shall be provided where practicable.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Carpentry
06 1 50-6
3.03 DOORFRAMES
Door fiames shall be set plumb and square and provided with solid blocking at not more
than 16 inches on centers for each jamb. Blocking shall be positioned to occur behind
hinges and lock strikes. Frames shall be double wedged and fastened with finishing nails.
Split-fiame systems are not acceptable.
3.04 THRESHOLDS
Thresholds, unless otherwise specified, shall be 5/8-inch thick by 2 518 inches wide with
beveled sides, cut to fit at jambs and fastened with casing nails.
3.05 SHELVING
Nominally 1-inch thick wood shelf material or 3/4-inch or 23/32-inch thick plywood shelf
material shall be supported substantially with end and intermediate supports and arranged to
prevent buckling and sagging.
3.06 COUNTERS
Counters shall be constructed as specified with concealed fastenings where practicable,
installed in a rigid and substantial manner, and scribed to adjoining surfaces. Counter
sections shall be provided in the longest lengths practicable, keeping joints in tops to a
minimum, and where joints are necessary, providing tight hairline joints drawn up with
concealed-type heavy pull-up bolts. Joints shall be glued with water-resistant glue and, in
addition, made rigid and substantial with screws, bolts, or other approved fastenings.
3.07 CABINETS
Cabinets shall be installed level, plumb, and tight against adjacent walls. Cabinets shall be
secured to walls with concealed toggle bolts, and top secured to cabinet with concealed
screws. Cut-outs shall be carefully located for pipes so that edges of holes will be covered
by escutcheons.
3.08 WORKBENCHES
Workbenches shall be constructed as specified. They shall be installed level, plumb, and
tight against adjacent construction, fastened to walls with screws or toggle bolts and to
floors with expansion bolts.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
**END OF SECTION**
Carpentry
061 50-7
SECTION 07133
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes specifications for modified bituminous sheet
waterproofing of roof.
B. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing shall be a single-ply, self-adhering,
rubberized asphaltic sheet membrane waterproofing system for horizontal
surfaces as herein specified.
1. Membrane waterproofing under control building roof shall be the
modified bituminous sheet waterproofing specified herein only.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B. Section 07900 - Sealants
Section 07322 - Concrete Roof Tile
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): ASTM C208
Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board ASTM D4 1 Specification
for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D4586 Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
General: Refer to Section 01300, Submittals for submittal requirements and
procedures.
Product Data: Submit .product data and detailed installation instructions for
both vertical and horizontal applications.
Manufacturer's Certification: At completion of the installation, submit written
certification, signed by the manufacturer or its authorized representative, that
the materials used in the work were in accordance with these Specifications,
and that they were installed in accordance with the material manufacturer's
installation instructions and recommendations.
D. Certified Test Report: Submit evidence of compliance with electrical
resistance requirements for applications providing dielectric insulation.
Include a certified copy of test results.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
07133-1
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Membrane waterproofing system shall be installed by an applicator/installer
skilled and experienced in the type of work involved. Applicator shall be
licensed and approved by the manufacturer who furnishes the materials.
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements with the manufacturer of
the materials to be installed to provide on-site consultation and inspection
service at no additional cost to the District, to assure the correct installation of
the membrane waterproofing.
The manufacturer's representative shall be present at the time any phase of the
work is performed. Membrane waterproofing shall be applied only over
substrate surfaces previously approved by the manufacturer's representative.
B.
C.
1.06 GUARANTY
A. In addition to the guaranty requirements specified in General Conditions
Article GC4.9, membrane waterproofing work shall be pantied against
leakage, defective materials, and defective installation of the completed
waterproofing work. Any such defects or leakage occurring during the period
of the guaranty shall be promptly and completely corrected, including all
affected work, at no additional cost to the District.
Said guaranty shall be in effect for a period of five years from the date of the
Certificate of Substantial Completion issued by the District. The guaranty
shall be signed by the waterproofing applicator or installer and countersigned
by the Contractor, and shall be submitted to the District.
B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Pliable, self-adhesive membrane composed of
high-strength polyethylene, factory-coated on one side with a layer of
rubberized asphalt in minimum uniform thickness of 0.060 inch. 1. Dielectric
Insulation: The electrical resistance of a 6 by 6 inch sample of membrane
waterproofing material shall be a minimum of 500 @when tested with a 1 kV
dc tester. Test shall be performed by pIacing the sample between two 3 by 3
inch copper electrodes. The sample shall be soaked in water 24 hours
immediately prior to the test and surface dried prior to testing. Sample
thickness shall be as specified for the waterproofing membrane.
Concrete and Masonry Primer: Asphaltic primer as recommended by the
membrane waterproofmg materials' manufacturer and conforming generally to
ASTM D41.
B.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
07133-2
C. Flashing Cement: ' Asphaltic adhesive or mastic as MODIFIED
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 133-2 recommended by the
membrane Waterproofing materials' manufacturer and conforming generally to
ASTM D4586 as appropriate.
D. Temporary Protection Board for Horizontal Surfaces: Rigid asphalt-
composition, trafic-bearing board, nominal 1 /4-inch thick, installed with
adhesive recommended by the membrane waterproofing materials'
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND CLEANING OF SUBSTRATE
A.
B.
C.
Verify that substrate surfaces are clean and dry, and that concrete is properly
aged.
Verify that substrate and backing surfaces are smooth and rigid where
membrane turns up.
Vacuum-clean substrate surfaces as required to remove dirt and dust.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Membrane waterproofing for vertical and horizontal surfaces shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturer's latest specifications and installation
instructions for membrane waterproofmg.
Install temporary protection board with adhesive on horizontal surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations for protection from subsequent construction operations and
traffic. Protection board damaged during subsequent construction operations
and activities shall be immediately repaired or replaced.
B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
D.
Verify that installed membrane is free from wrinkles, blisters, and exposed
surfaces. Damaged or defective membrane shall be corrected.
Verify that waterproof membrane is free from defects or damage before
covering or concealing the membrane with subsequent construction and
finishes.
If water test of horizontal surfaces is required by the Contract Specifications,
conduct such test by applying a flood coat of water along the high areas so
that water at least 114 inch deep flows over the areas. Perform test under the
observance of the Engineer. Should a leak or low spot appear, repair the area
and retest as specified above until all work is watertight and acceptable.
Clean adjacent surfaces of spillage and spattering of bituminous materials.
'
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
07133-3
SECTION 07322
CONCRETE ROOF TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete tile roofing.
2. Felt underlayment
3. Accessories
4. All related flashings
B. Related Sections:
Section 06 100
Section 061 50
Section 07133
Section 07600
Section 07700
Rough Carpentry
Carpentary
Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing.
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Roof Accessories
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Materials:
a. ASTM C 1492-03 - Concrete Roof Tile.
b. ASTM D226-97a - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
C.
Roofing and Waterproofing.
1997 UBC Standard 15-5 - Roof Tile.
1) Comply with all requirements including tile strength and
water absorption performance.
2) Installation: Comply with Roof Tile Institute (RTI) /
Western States Roofing Contractors Association (WSRCA) - ICBO ER-6034P 1/2002, Revised 9/2002 - Concrete and
Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual for Moderate Climate
Regions
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-1
B. Guide References and Standard Practices: Perform work in accordance with
best practices recommended in the following publication:
1. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Steep Roofing
Manual, latest edition.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUlREMENTS
A.
B.
Provide watertight, leak free roofing system capable of withstanding thermally
induced movement and exposure to weather without failure,
Wind Uplift Resistance Capacity: Provide complete concrete tile roofing
system sufficient to resist wind uplift pressures calculated in accordance with
the 1997 edition of the Uniform Building Code for indicated building height
using 85 mph basic wind speed and Exposure C.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for Review and Acceptance: Submit the following in accordance
with Section 01 300.
1. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and standard
installation details for materials proposed to be installed under this
Section.
2. Samples: Submit roof tile samples illustrating full color range, surface
finish, texture and configuration for verification.
B. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Current ICBO Acceptance Report.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
a. Submit one copy for Architect's information.
b. Maintain one copy on site until concrete tile roofing installation
is complete.
3. Design and Specification Approval: Prior to starting roofing, submit
signed statement that roofing design and specifications are proper for this
particular project.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Concrete tile roofing shall have current published ICC Evaluation Service
Evaluation Report (ER) indicating ICC approval as acceptable method of
construction under the 1997 UBC. Comply with all limitations stipulated
in Evaluation Report.
2. Fire Resistance Requirements
a. Fire Resistance: Class A.
B. Labels: Labels on pallets of tiles shall bear the installed tile weight; the tile
manufacturer's name; the tile profile; and the Evaluation Report number. In
addition, the company name shall be imprinted on the underside of each tile.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.. Delivery:
1. Transport and deliver tile on manufacturer's original pallets and in
manner to avoid physical damage.
2. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact. .
B. Handling:
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions in their technical guide.
2. To avoid the occurrence of color patterning on the root, tiles shall be
loaded to ensure that shades are either segregated or blended uniformly
over the entire roof elevation.
C. Storage:
1. Store tile off ground and cover to prevent exposure to weather. Adequately
protect against damage while stored at the site and protect form mud, dust,
dirt or other materials likely to stain or render tile unsatisfactory for
installation.
2. Do not stack pallets on one another.
3. Do not stack tiles on roof in a manner which would endanger structure.
Distribute stacks of tile uniformly in accordance with manufacturer's
loading examples in their technical guide.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-3
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. UnderIayment: Do not install underlapent on wet or frozen sheathing.
1.08 SCHEDULING
Do not begin installation until related work in areas to receive tiles is completed.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty for workmanship and fifty year
transferable limited material warranty for concrete tile roofing.
1.
2.
Cover damage to building resulting from failure to resist penetration of
water.
Cover damage to building resulting from failure to resist specified
wind uplift forces.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: At completion of the Project turn over to the Owner one
square (1 00 sq. ft. after installation) of concrete roofing tiles for replacement
stock. Store in a location directed by the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE TILE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Certain Teed or approved equal.
B. Type:
1. Style: Shake type.
2. Color: Dove
3.
4.
5.
6. Two nail holes
Interlocking, with anchor lugs located on the underside.
Interlocking ridges shall be provided on the longitudinal edges to
restrict lateral movement and provide water stop.
Transverse bars on underside to serve as weather checks.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-4
C. Tile Size:
1. Width: 13-inch.
2. Effective Width: 12-1/8-inches.
3. Length: 16S-inch. sand colored by integral coloring agents.
D. Accessory Tiles: Furnish special shapes to suit valley, hip, rake, eave and
other conditions.
2.02 UNDERLAYMENT
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226. Asphalt saturated and coated organic felt
base sheet, minimum 30 lb. per square, unperforated. Two layers required at
slopes of 3.5: 12 and greater.
Underlayment for Slopes less Than 3.5: 12: Waterproofing underlayment
required in accordance with Section 07133.
Waterproofing Underlayment: See Section 071 33.
B.
C.
2.03 FLASHING MATERIAL
A. Sheet Flashing-Galvanized: ASTM A361. Comply with Section 07600.
1. All flashings except valley, must be a minimum 24 gage G-90 galvanized
metal. Valley flashing may be 28 gage G-90 galvanized metal.
B. Exposed Flashing and Flashing Accessories: Prefinished with Kynar coating
in accordance'with Section 07600.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
B. Fasteners:
General: Provide closures, non-corrosive fasteners and nailers as indicated and
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Tile Fasteners:
a. Nails: Large head galvanized or stainless steel box nails, 11 gage
minimum; length as required to penetrate 3/4-inches minimum
into battens, or sheathing or through the thickness of the
sheathing.
b. High wind clips are required to secure the nose end of the eave
course tiles.
2. Underlayment Fasteners:
a. 3/4 inch (1 9mm) corrosion resistant roofing nails.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-5
b. Provide tin tabs or caps, minimum 32 gauge zinc coated sheet
metal not less than 1-5/8-inch (41 mm) nor more than 2-inch
(50mm) diameter.
C. Plastic cement: ASTM D4586; Type 2, asphalt type with mineral fiber
components, free of toxic solvents, capable of setting within 24 hours at
temperatures of 75'F. (24'C.) and 50 percent RH.
D. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in
applications of underlayment free of asbestos and toxic solvents.
E. Deck Tape: 2 inch (50mm) wide aluminum coated cloth duct tape with
adhesive backing.
F. Wood Battens: Nominal 1-inch by 2-inch softwood lumber boards, as
approved by the local authorities for roofing applications and complying with
requirements for exterior blocking of Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
1. Verify that waterproofing and work of other trades which penetrates roof
deck and flashings have been completed.
2. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign material,
moisture and unevenness, which would prevent execution and quality of
application of tile roofing system.
3. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
4. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation.
Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by
installer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
Surface Preparation: Broom clean deck surface.
Layout: Layout roof in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Repair tom or punctured materials before roofing over.
3.03 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. . Underlayment: Completed before installation of battens.
1. Membrane Waterproofing Installation: See Section 07133 for type and
locations. Install directly over wood sheathing or nailboard.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-6
2. Cover membrane waterproofing and entire area of sheathing or nailboard
with felt underlayment.
3. The underlayment membrane shall waterproof the roof deck. It shall be a
weatherproof barrier capable of shedding any moisture to which may be
exposed, allowing it to escape at the eave.
B. Felt Underlayment:
1. Install eavehiser detail in accordance with tile manufacturer's standards
and as indicated on Drawings.
2. Install underlayment commencing at eave and overlapping fascia edge by I
inch (25 mm) laid parallel to eave.
3. Complete installation of field underlayment, shingle fashion maintaining a
2-inch (50 rnm) head and 6 inch (150 mm) side laps. Secure underlayment
with 3/4-inch (19 mm) roofing nails at 12 inch (300 mm) on center at laps
and 24 inch (600 mm) on center down the longitudinal centerline of each
Ply-
4. Interlace piles at valley sections crossing for full coverage.
3.04 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General: Install flashing in accordance with Section 07600 and roof tile
manufacturer's instructions.
Valley Flashing:
1. Fix valley flashing in place by nailing adjamnt to flashing and bending
nail over turned up edge flashing.
2. Do not flatten turn-up on flashing.
3. Do not nail through flashing.
Provide base flashing around pipes, vents, flues and chimneys with products
fixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Install and dress to profile of tile counter flashing at wall abutments, parapet
copings and chimney projections.
Provide and install flexible metal soakers at intersection of ridge and hip
andor gable apex. Turn up edges of soakers.
3.05 TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roofing system in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing
Guide, and RTYWSRCA Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual
(ICBO ER-6034P), and tile manufacturer's instructions.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-7
1. Coordinate installation of roof-mounted components or work projecting
through roof with weather tight placement of counter flashing.
Battens: Install horizontal battens as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Fix batten secured to deck at not more than 24 inch (600 mm) on center
using 8d corrosion resistant nails.
2. Size and configuration shall suit tile system.
3. Batten installation shall have a provision for drainage by providing a
minimum % inch break in battens every 4 feet.
4. Do not cut battens in place on the deck as this is likely to damage the
membrane.
B.
C. Tile Installation, General:
1. Comply with coursing tables to minimize cutting and drilling short course
tile.
2. Lay field tile in staggered bond pattern. Place tile square with building
lines and parallel with roof slope. Place filler and closure pieces as
required.
3. Lay tiles on top of battens with tile lugs overlapping edge of battens. Align
each tile so that horizontal lines are parallel to eave line, eave line are at
right angles with rake and batten lugs are firmly engaged on battens.
Remove foreign matter fiom interlocking ribs to ensure correct fit and
interlock. Cracked or broken tile shall not be installed nor allowed to
remain on the roof.
4. Align each tile so as to allow at least 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) between tiles
while ensuring the tiles do interlock completely. Do not abut tiles tightly.
5. Nail every tile, starter course, ridge course and gable courses.
6. Cut tiles at roof penetrations, to match. angle of hips, valleys and
elsewhere as required in a manner not to damage or weaken tiles. Discard
cracked, broken, chipped or otherwise damaged tiles.
7. Where pieces of cut tiles, especially in hip and valley areas, are too small
to nail, they shall be secured with approved adhesive and wired.
8. Extend tile 1-inch beyond fascia detail.
9. Installed head lap 3-inch (75 mm) minimum.
Valley: Cut at 45' with flashing placed as detailed.
Hip and Ridge Tiles: Install hips and ridges as indicated and recommended by
manufacturer using special shape tile.
D.
E.
1. Lay hip and ridge tile weather bar snug to overlapped tile at minimum 3-
inch overlap. Nail to supporting member using one corrosion resistant nail
of sufficient length to penetrate %-inch (1 9 mm) into supporting member.
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-8
2. Nose ends shall be set in a bead of approved roof tile adhesive.
Rakes: Install rakes as indicated and recommended by manufacturer using
special shape tile.
1. Install rake tiles to overlap field tile and barge board fitting over surface
of field tile.
2. Secure with two corrosion resistant nails of sufficient length to penetrate
%-inch (1 9 mm) into supporting member.
High Wind Clips: Install at perimeter row of roof. Nail one clip per tile.
Waterstopping: At the end of each day's work, the work performed during that
day shall be sealed at the edges and well covered to prevent moisture form
entering under the material. Contractor shall take necessary precautions during
installation to insure that moisture from inclement weather shall be prevented
from entering the building where interior finishes are in place and or building
is occupied.
Completed Roofing: Tile must be sound, whole and clean, and roof shall be
left in every respect tight and neat example of workmanship.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.06 CLEANING
1. During the course of the work and on completion, remove and dispose of
excess material, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave work in
clean condition
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Construction Traffic: Protect materials and take precautions to prevent other
trades from damaging roof during and after construction. Use runways over
materials in place.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Improvement Concrete Roof Tile
07322-9
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes specifications for sheet metalwork, including metal
flashing, trim, gutters and downspouts, leader collection boxes, scuppers, and
miscellaneous sheet metalwork, as indicated.
~ ~
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A1 67 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
2. ASTM A653/A653M Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
3. ASTM A924/A924M Specifications for General Requirements for Steel
Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
4. ASTM B29 Specification for Refmed Lead
5. ASTM B32 Specification for Solder Metal
Plate
7. ASTM B306 Specification for CopperDrainage Tube (DWV)
8. ASTM B370 Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building
Construction
-6.- ASTM_B~~peinum--~d Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
B. Federal Specification (FS):
1.. FS TT-S-230 Sealing Compound:
a.
b.
Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Calking, Sealing,
and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
FS TT-S-1543 Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base
(For Calking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures)
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Flashing and Sheet Metal
07600-1
c. FS UU-B-790 Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft,
Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire Resistant)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Refer to Section 01300, Submittals for submittal requirements and
procedures.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit detailed Shop Drawings of metal
flashing and sheet metalwork, including gutters and downspouts, and installation details.
Include manufacturers' product data for materials and manufactured items.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Flashing and sheet metalwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance
with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
Except where otherwise indicated, comply with minimum thickness or gage
requirements as specified in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
MATERIALS
Galvanized Sheet Metal: Standard galvanized steel sheet, meeting
requirements of ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/A924M, as
applicable, with minimum zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot and 0.2
percent copper bearing, and mill phosphatized for maximum paint adherence.
Where sheet metal gage is not indicated, provide 24 gage.
Stairiless Steel: Stainless steel sheet for architectural applications, meeting the
requirements of ASTM A167, Type 304 or Type 316, with No. 4 finish.
Where stainless steel sheet gage is not indicated, provide 26 gage.
Sheet Copper: Standard cold-rolled copper sheet for building construction,
conforming with ASTM B370, 16 oz., 20 oz., 24 oz., or 32 oz. per square foot
as indicated or required. Where copper weights are not indicated, provide 16
oz. Gutters and downspouts shall be fabricated from 24 oz. copper. Cleats
shall be 20 oz. copper.
Copper Drainage Tube: Where downspouts are indicated as copper pipe or
tube, provide DWV copper drainage tube conforming to ASTM B306.
Provide for installation with standard copper, brass, or bronze fittings, as
indicated, capable of being soldered. Coordinate with plumbing requirements
specified under Section 15400 - Plumbing. a
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Flashing and Sheet Metal
07600-2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Aluminum Sheet Metal: ASTM B209, 5005 or 3003-HI4 aluminum alloy as
appropriate, clear anodized or epoxy coated. Where aluminum sheet thickness
is not indicated, provide 0.020 1 inch thickness.
Sheet Lead Standard 0.062 inch thick lead sheet weighing 4 pounds per
square foot, arsenical-antimonial and pig lead alloy meeting the requirements
of ASTM B29. Use sheet lead or tubing for flashing of vent pipes and other
penetrations of the roof
Solder: Grade A meeting requirements of ASTM B32, composed of 50
percent pig lead and 50 percent block tin, warranted pure. Flux shall be an
approved brand of soldering flu for the type of metal or muriatic acid
neutralized with zinc.
Building Paper: Rosin sized, unsaturated paper, weighmg approximately 6
pounds per 100 square feet, or a water-repellent smooth building paper
meeting requirements of FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade A.
Fasteners and Accessories: Furnish anchors and fasteners, washers, straps, and
accessories required for a complete and finished installation. Fasteners and
accessories shall conform with the following requirements:
1. Nails shall be stainless steel, hard copper, bronze, or brass. Where
sheet metal is built in over roofing materials or other sheet metal, use
nails or screws with 1 inch matching nonferrous washers. Screws shall
be standard stainless steel, brass, or bronze wood screws, as required.
Sheet metal screws shall be self-drilling, self-tapping stainless steel or
tempered non-corrodible steel of proper size and length to suit
conditions.
2. Screw heads shall be furnished with neoprene washers.
3. Straps: Straps and miscellaneous fastenings, where required, shall be
stainless steel, half-hard copper, or half-hard 70-30 brass of size indicated
or required. Where not indicated, provide straps of 1/16 inch thick by 1
inch wide size.
Sealant: Calking or sealing compound shall be a silicone synthetic rubber
elastomeric sealant which cures at normal temperature to a flexible firm
rubber, tack free, in gun grade consistency. Sealant shall be specially designed
for adhesion to the surfaces to which it will be applied, and shall meet or
exceed the minimum requirements of FS TT-S-230 or FS TT-S-1543, as
applicable.
Isolating Material: Alkali-resistant bituminous paint or varnish.
2.02 FABRICATION AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Form and fabricate sheet metalwork as indicated and in accordance with the
approved Shop Drawings and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
Properly reinforce sheet metalwork as required for strength and appearance.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Flashing and Sheet Metal
07600-3
B. Galvanized sheet metal surfaces which will be concealed in the finished work
shall be chemically treated or etched to assure maximum paint adherence and
then shop painted with one coat of an approved galvanized primer as specified
in Section 05509, Miscellaneous Metal. Finish field painting is specified in
Section 09920, Painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Standards: Install flashing and sheet metalwork as indicated and in
accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual.
Flashing and Metal Trim: Provide flashing, counterflashing, cap flailing,
metal trim, and any other fabricated items and miscellaneous sheet metalwork
indicated or required to provide a complete and watertight installation.
Gutters and Downspouts: Install gutters and downspouts as indicated and in
accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and pertinent provisions of
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
B.
C.
D. Work Quality:
1. Sheet metalwork shall be finished straight andtrue, with miters and
joints accurately fitted.Exposed work shall be free of dents and other
defects. Comers shall be reinforced and seams made waterproof,
Edges of sheet metal shall be hemmed.
Provide for expansion and contraction in sheet metal assembly by
means of expansion joints or other appropriate methods of SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide reinforcement as required.
Isolate and protect dissimilar metals from contact with each other by
applying specified isolation material to contact surfaces. Protect
surfaces of sheet metal in contact with concrete, treated wood, or
aluminum with a heavy coating of bituminous paint.
Provide waterproof neoprene washers wherever required fasteners
penetrate sheet metal. Exposed fasteners will not be permitted for any
portion of this work.
Calking and Sealing: Calk or seal joints and laps of sheet metalwork as
indicated or required for a waterproof installation. Beads of sealant which will
be concealed in the finished work shall be continuous with no voids of
material. Interface and coordinate the calking and sealing work of this Section
with the work specified in Section 07900, Sealants.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Flashing and Sheet Metal
076004
F. Flashing for Roof Penetrations:
1.
2.
Flashing of roof penetrations shall be 4 pound lead. Flashing shall be
accurately formed to conform with roofing contours and
configurations and as required to assure a watertight installation.
Flashing shall be built in as the roofing work progresses. Flash and
burn lead against any penetrations through its surface.
Except as indicated otherwise, plumbing and mechanical vent flashing
shall be of 4 pound lead tubing. Flanges shall be minimum 18 inches
square, and tubing shall be long enough to permit turning lead into the
end of vent pipe.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Flashing and Sheet Metal
07600-5
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART l--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies sealants for roof flashing, pipe penetrations and joint sealant.
1.02 QUALrrY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference J-&e
FEDSPEC ‘TT-S-0023OC-1970 Sealing Compound Elastomeric Type, Single
Component
Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-
Component
FEDSPEC TT-S-00227E-1970
1.02SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings showing dimensions and details of sealants
2. Manufacturer’s product data.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Manufacturer’s certification of compliance
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS:
Acceptable products shall be Sikaflex by Sika Chemical Corporation, Vulkem by
Mameco International, U-Seal Joint Sealant by Burke Company, or Rubber Calk by
Products Research and Chemical Corporation.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Sealants
07900-1
B. GENERAL:
Polyurethane sealants shall conform to FEDSPEC TT-S-023OC for one-component
systems and FEDSPEC TT-S-00227E for two-component systems. Polyurethane
sealant shall be one of the following two types.
1. SELF-LEVELING. Self-leveling polyurethane sealant shall be Type I, Class A
as specified by the FEDSPECs referenced above.
2. NONSAG. Nonsag polyurethane sealant shall be Type 11, Class A as specified
by the FEDSPECs referenced above.
C. PRIMER:
Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
D. BACKER ROD OR BACKER TAPE:
Backer rod shall be open cell polyethylene or polyurethane foam. Rod shall be
cylindrical unless otherwise specified. Backer tape shall be polyethylene or
polyurethane with adhesive on one side.
2.02 MASTIC SEALANT
A. GENERAL:
Mastic joint sealant shall consist of a blend of refined asphalts, resins and plasticizing
compounds, reinforced with fiber. Sealant shall be compatible with joint fillers and
shall be pressure grade.
B. PRIMER
Primer shall be as recommended by the mastic sealant manufacturer.
2.03 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
1. Manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specified products.
2. Manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and application of
sealants and primers.
PART 3--EXECUTION
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Sealants
07900-2
3.01 GENERAL 0
Sealants and primers shall be applied according to the sealant manufacturer's
recommendations. Polyurethane sealants shall be used on all expansion joints and specified
construction joints .
Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry and free of dust, loose mortar, concrete and
plaster. Additional preparation of joints and spaces shall be provided in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Primer shall be applied only to the surfaces that will be
covered by the sealant.
3.02 POLYURETHANE SEALANTS
A. GENERAL:
Nonsag polyurethane sealants shall be used on vertical joints. Self-leveling
polyurethane sealants shall be used on horizontal joints.
B. JOINT DIMENSIONS:
Unless otherwise specified, joints and spaces to be filled shall be constructed to the
following criteria. Joints and spaces shall have a minimum width of 114 inch and a
maximum width of 1 inch. The depth of the sealant shall be one-half the width of the
joint, but in no case less than 114 inch deep. Sealant depth shall be measured at the
point of smallest cross section. When joints exceed the depth requirements, backing
rod shall be inserted to provide the joint depth specified. If the joint sealant depth is
within the specified tolerances, backer tape shall be placed in the bottom of the joint.
3.03 MASTIC SEALANT
A. JOINT DIMENSIONS:
Joints to be sealed shall be 2 inches deep, 1 inch wide at the top, and 314 inch wide at
the base.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements
. **END OF SECTION**
Sealants
07900-3
PART l--GENERU
SECTION 08 120
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
.
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section specifies aluminum doors and frames.
B. TYPE:
Unless otherwise specified, the doors shall be flush slab type. Frames shall be square-cut and
mechanically locked at header ends and shall have integral stops.
C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
1. STRUCTURAL: Shapes and thicknesses of framing members shall be
sufficient to withstand a design wind load of not less than 30 pounds per
square foot of supported area with a deflection of not more than 1/175 times
the length of the member and a safety factor of not less than 1.65.
2. AIR INFILTRATION: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air
infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot of
fixed area at a test pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot (50 mile per hour
wind).
3. WATER PENETRATION: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 33 1,
there shall be no water penetration at a pressure of 8 pounds per square foot
of fixed area.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-1
Reference
AA DAF45-80
ASTM A36l36M-88
ASTM B209-90
ASTM B22 1-90
ASTM E283-84
ASTM E33 1-86
- Title
Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
Structural Steel
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube
Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
CuIzain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference
SSPC-PS 9.01-82 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic Painting
System with Extra-Thick Film
B. Related Sections
Section 09900 Coating Systems
C. CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE:
Manufacturer's certificates shall be submitted to the Project Manager attesting that doors,
frames, and accessories meet the specified requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 of this document.
Shop drawings containing the following information shall be provided:
1.
2.
3. Metal gauges
4.
5. Methods of anchorage
6. Glazing details
7. Weatherstripping
8.
9. Details of installation
10.
Elevations of each door type
Size of doors and frames
Details of door and fime construction
Provisions for and location of hardware
Schedule showing location of each door, fiame, and swing of door
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-2
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials delivered to the site shall be unloaded and stored with minimum handling. Storage
space shall be in a dry location with adequate ventilation, fiee fiom dust or water, and easily
accessible for inspection and handling. Materials shall be stacked on nonabsorptive strips or
wood platforms. Doors and hmes shall not be covered with farps, polyethylene film, or
similar coverings. Finished surfaces shall be protected during shipping and handling using
mandacturer's standard method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall be applied to
surfaces to which calking and glazing compounds must adhere.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES
Swing-type aluminum doors and fiames shall be of size, design, and location indicated.
Doors shall be provided complete with fiarnes, fiaming members trim, and accessories.
2.02 MATERTALS
A. ANCHORS:
Unless otherwise specified, anchors shall be steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish.
B. WEATHERSTRIPPING:
Unless otherwise specified, weatherstripping shall be continuous wool pile.
C. ALUMINUM ALLOY FOR DOORS AND FRAMES:
Aluminum alloy for doors and fiames shall be ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for
extrusions and ASTM B 209, alloy and temper best suited for aluminum sheets and
strips.
D. FASTENERS:
Unless otherwise specified, fasteners shall be nonmagnetic stainless steel or aluminum.
E. STRUCTURALSTEEL
Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A 36.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-3
F. ALUMINUMPAINT:
Unless otherwise specified, aluminum paint shall be as recommended by aluminu door
manufacturer.
G. BITUMINOUS COATING:
Coating shall be cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-PS 9.01 compounded
for 30 mil thickness per coat.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. AL'UMINLTMFRAMES:
Frames shall be fabricated fiom extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately
as indicated. Removable glass stops and glazing beads shall be provided for hes
accommodating fixed glass. Countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws spaced not more
than 12 inches O.C. shall be used for exposed fastenings. Joints in frame members shall
be milled to a hairline fit, reinforced, and secured mechanically.
B. ALUMINUMDOORS:
Doors shall be of type, size, and design indicated and not less than 1 3/4 inches thick.
Minimum wall thickness shall be 0.125 inch, except beads and trim shall be 0.050 inch.
Door sizes shown are nominal and shall include standard clearances as follows: 0.093
inch at hinge and lock stiles, 0.125 inch between meeting stiles, 0.125 inch at top rails,
0.187 inch between bottom and threshold, and 0.687 inch between bottom and floor.
Single-acting doors shall be beveled 0.125 inch at lock, hinge, and meeting stile edges.
Double-acting doors shall have rounded edges at hinge stile, lock stile, and meeting stile
edges.
Unless otherwise specified, doors shall be flush doors using facing sheets with a plain
smooth surface. Construction shall consist of a phenolic resin-impregnated kraft paper
honeycomb core, surrounded at edges and around glass and louvered areas with extruded
aluminum shapes. The impregnation of core shall have a minimum of 20 percent resin
content. Sheet aluminum door facings shall be not less than 0.W-inch thick laminated to
a 0.10-inch thick tempered hardboard backing. The backing shall be bonded to the
honeycomb core. Facing sheets shall be bonded to core under heat and pressure with a
thermosetting adhesive, and mechanically locked to the extruded edge members.
C. WELDING AND FASTENING:
Where possible, welds shall be located on unexposed surfaces; on exposed surfaces
welds shall be dressed smoothly. Welding rods, filler wire, and flux shall be selected to
produce a uniform texture and color in finished work. Flux and spatter shall be removed
from surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts will be permitted only
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-4
in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk heads. Concealed reinforcements
for hardware shall be welded in place.
D. WEATHERSTRIPPING:
Weatherstripping shall be provided on edges of exterior doors and fit into slots which are
integral with doors or fiames.
Weatherstripping shall be replaceable without special tools. Installation shall allow
doors to swing fieely and close positively.
E.
F.
G.
H.
ANCHORS:
Anchors, of the sizes and shapes indicated, shall be provided on the backs of subfiames
for securing subfiames to adjacent construction. Transom bars shall be anchored at ends
and mullions at head and sill. Freestanding door fiames shall be reinforced and anchored
to floor construction in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Anchors shall
be placed near top and bottom of each jamb and at intermediate points not more than
25 inches apart.
PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE:
Hardware templates and hardware (except field-applied hardware) shall be delivered to
the door manufacturer for use in fabrication of aluminum doors and fiames. Doors and
frames shall be cut, reinforced, drilled, and tapped at the factory to receive template
hardware. Doors to receive surface-applied hardware, except push plates, kick plates,
and mop plates, shall be provided with reinforcing only and drilled and tapped in the
field. Hardware reinforcements shall be stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped
galvanized finish, and secured with stainless steel screws. Reinforcement in core of
flush doors shall be provided as required to receive locks, door closers, and other
hardware.
PROVISIONS FOR GLAZING:
Extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads shall be provided on interior side of doors and
extruded aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed glazing beads on exterior
or security side of doors. Glazing beads shall have vinyl insert glazing gaskets and be
designed to receive glass of thickness specified.
FINISHES :
Finish on doors and fiames shall be factory finish of anodic coating. Exposed aluminum
surfaces shall be cleaned and provided with an anodized finish conforming to AA
DAF45. Finish shall be High Gloss paint per specifications 09900. Color shall be
‘SEDONA’ by Sinclair.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-5
2.04 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided in:
1. Detail specifications and instructions for installation, adjustments, cleanhg and
maintenance.
2. Certificates of compliance specified in paragraph 08120-1.02 B.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Frames shall be plumb, square, and level and anchored to adjacent construction as specified
and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Bottom of each Me shall be
anchored to rough floor construction with 3/32-inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured
to back of each jamb and to floor construction; stainless steel bolts and expansion rivets shall
be used for fastening clip anchors. Doors shall be hung to produce clearances specified
After erection and glazing, doors and hardware shall be adjusted to operate properly.
3.02 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MS
A. DISSIMILAR METALS:
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or
small areas of white bronze, aluminum shall be protected fiom direct contact by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
2. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the album and the
dissimilar metal.
3. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of
aluminum paint.
4. Use a no absorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.
B. DRAINAGE FROM DISSIMILAR METALS:
In locations where drainage fiom dissimilar metals has direct contact with aluminum,
provide protective paint, to prevent aluminum discoloration.
C. MASONRY AND CONCRETE:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08 120-6
Aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials shall be
protected with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
D. WOOD OR OTHER ABSORPTIVE MATERIALS:
Aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to fiequent moisture, and
alumhum surfaces in contact with treated wood, shall be protected with two coats of
aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. In lieu of painting the
aluminum, the Contractor shall have the option of painting the wood or other absorptive
surface with two coats of aluminum paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.
3.03 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, door and fiame surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance
with door manufacturer's recommended procedure, including removal of excess glazing and
sealant compounds. Protective coating shall be removed when completion of construction
activities no longer requires its retention. Use of abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents is
not allowed.
3.04 PROTECTION
Doors and fkmes shall be protected from damage and fiom contamination by other materials
such as cement mortar. Prior to completion and acceptance of the work, damaged doors and
frames shall be restored to original condition or replaced with new ones.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Aluminum Doors and Frames
08120-7
Section 08520
GLASS BLOCK WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prefabricated exterior glass block window units.
B. Perimeter treatment
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200
B. Section 07900
Unit Masonry
Sealants.
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products.
B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and
Tubes.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Glass block units: Wood sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, vision
glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data for glass units.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures,
positioning of reinforcement and perimeter conditions requiring special
attention.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Glass Block Window
08520-1
1.8
1.9
1.10
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section [with
minimum five years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions as per
manufacturers recommendations.
B. Accept glass block units on site on pallets; inspect for damage.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the construction drawings.
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: 10 years for panel assembly, 2 years for wood
components, 5 years for glass blocks, against defective materials or
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
B.
C.
MANUFACTURERS
A. Pacific Accent Product Group or approved equal.
MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063alloy, T5 temper, powder coat
painted finish.
B. Wood: Pine, primed finish.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel.
GLASS UNIT PANELS
A. Solid Glass Units: Factory sealed unit cores. Nominal Size: 8 x 8 inch (204 x
204 mm)
1. Color: Clear.
Jamb: Wood, 4-9/16 inch (1 16 mm) wide profile.
Muntins: Width to match glass block, of same material and finish as jamb.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Glass Block Window
08520-2
D. Installation Method Installation Strap, 1 -inch (25 mm) setback.
E. Jamb cladding: Aluminum, finish to match jamb.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough openings and confirm sill plate is level.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Exterior units: Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt
building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of
assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Do not use foam spray
insulation. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier
materials. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
C. Attach unit to structure using 2-1/2 inch galvanized casing nails. Drill pilot holes
when nailing through frame.
D. Shim unit at head and sides at maximurn 18-inch (450 mm) centers; do not shim
underside of unit.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Do not scratch or deface units.
3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external comers. Provide protection
without damaging completed work.
*END OF SECTION*
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Glass Block Window
08520-3
SECTION 09900
COATING SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies coating systems, surface preparations, and application requirements.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference (Latest Edition) Title
ANSI A13.1
AWWA C203
AWWA C210
AWWA C214
Scheme for the Identification and Coding
Coat-Tar Protective Coatings and Lining for Steel Water
Pipelines-Enamel and Tape-Hot-Applied
Liquid Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and
Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects
NACE
SSPC GP-1
SSPC GP-2
Manual for Painter Safety
Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of
Painting Contractors
Standard Procedure for Evaluating the Qualifications of
Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint
SSPC SP-1 Surface Preparation Specification No. 1, Solvent
Cleaning
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-1
SSPC SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP-5
SSPC SP-6
SSPC SP-7
SSPC SP-8
SSPC SP-10
SSPC SP-11
White Metal Blast Cleaning
Commercial Blast Cleaning
Brush-off Blast Cleaning
Pickling
Near White Blast Cleaning
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
SSPC Guide 3, PA Guide to Safety in Paint Application
B. Regulatory’Requirements:
1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile
organic compounds.
2. Reform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations
of the following:
a. Paint manufacturer’s instructions.
b.
c.
SSPC-PA Guide 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Application.
Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms Used in this Section:
1.
2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
3. HCl: Hydrochloric Acid.
4.
5.
Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils, or square feet per gallon.
MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness.
MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-2
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mil: Thousandth of an inch.
Military Specification-Paint.
PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet.
SFPG: Square Feet Per Gallon.
SFPGPC: Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat.
SP: Surface Preparation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of the latest version of SSPWC.
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Data Sheets:
a. For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS), the
manufacturer’s Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where
applicable) for each product used in the paint system. The PSDS form is
appended to the end of this section.
Submit required information on a system-by-system basis.
Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating applicator.
acceptable.
b.
c.
d. Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer’s literature only is not
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Applicator’s Qualification: List of references substantiating experience.
2. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer’s certification stating factory applied
coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified.
If the manufacturer of finish coating differs fiom that of shop primer, provide
both manufacturers’ written confirmation that materials are compatible.
Manufacturer’s written instructions and special details for applying each type of
3.
4.
paint.
5. Manufacturers’ Certificate of Proper Installation.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-3
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain teniperatures
within the range recommended by paint manufacturer.
B. Shipping:
1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the site, protect coating fiom
damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion.
2. Use nonmetallic or padded slings and straps in handling.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply paint in temperatures outside of manufacturer’s recommended maxinium
or minimum allowable, or in dust, smoke-laden atrnosphere, damp or humid weather.
B. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,
or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient
air.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Coatings Manufactures Code A (Able to supply most heavy-duty industrial coatings
and architectural paints):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
heron Protective Coatings, Brea, CA.
Benjamin Moore Paints, New York, NY.
Carboline Coatings Co., St. Louis, MO.
Devoe & Raynolds Co., Louisville, KY.
DuPont Chemical Co., Wilmington, DE.
HempeVReliance Paints, Houston, TX.
Keeler and Long, Inc., Watertown, CT.
Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating systems
09900-4
9. Pittsburgh Paints, Pittsburgh, PA.
10. Plas-Chem Coatings, St. Louis, MO.
1 1. Porter-htemational, Louisville, KY.
12. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH.
13. Sigma Coatings, hc., Harvey, LA.
14. Tnemec Coatings, Kansas City, MO.
15. Valspar Corp., hsa, CA.
16. Wisconsin Protective Coatings, Green Bay, WI.
B. Paint Manufacturers Code B (Able to supply most architectural and institutional
paints):
1. Sinclair, CA.
2. Ameritone, Long Beach, CA.
3.
4.
Detroit Graphite Co., Rockford, E.
Fuller/O’Brien Paint Co., San Francisco, CA.
5. Pratt and Lambert, Inc., Buffalo, NY.
6. Rustoleum Corp., Evanston, E.
7.
8.
Samuel Cabot, Inc., Boston, MA.
Textured Coatings of America, Los Angeles, CA.
C. Specialty Manufacturers Code C:
1. Darworth Co., Avon, CT.
2.
3.
4.
Jasco Chemical Co., Mountain View, CA.
McCloskey Varnish Co., Philadelphia, PA.
Olympic Stain & Varnish, Seattle, WA.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-5
D. Elastomeric Coating Manufacturers Code D:
1. Futura Coatings, Hazelwood, MO.
2. Gaco Western, Seattle, WA.
3. 3M Co., St. Paul, MN.
4. Plas-Chem Coatings, St. Louis, MO.
5. Polibrid Coatings, Brownsville, TX
6. Polymer Development Laboratories, Inc., Orange, CA.
7. Technical Urethanes, Inc., Clearbrook, VA.
8. Thane-Coat, Houston, TX.
9. United Coatings Co., Spokane, WA.
E. Special Concrete Coating Manufacturers Code E:
1. Duvick Corrosion Proof Inc., Streetsboro, OH.
2. Master Builder Technologies, Cleveland, OH.
3. Polyspec Corp., Houston, TX.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Material Quality: Manufacturer’s highest quality products and suitable for
intended service.
2.
3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by
Materials Including Primer and Finish Coats: Produced by same manufacturer.
manufacturer of the particular coating.
B. Products are listed below according to their approximate order of appearance in the
systems. The letter designating the manufacturer code refers to Article Manufacturers.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-6
I Wash Primer I Vinvl butvral acid
Epoxy Nonskid
Inorganic Zinc
Primer
Silicone/Silicone Elevated temperature silicone or silicone/acrylic based 1
Acrylic
Elastomeric
Polyamide or amine converted epoxies aggregated;
aggregate may be packaged separately
Solvent or water based, having 85 percent metallic zinc
content in the dry film; follow manufacturer's
recommendation, for topcoating
100 percent solids, plural component, spray applied,
Polyurethane
Manufacturer Cod
A
high build, elastomeric polyurethane coating, suitable
for the intended service
A
Cementitious
Acrylic
Emulsion
A
Two-component (liquid and aggregate) filler A, B
A
Polyamide High
Build Epoxy
A
Capability of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat A
A. B
Two-component, aliphatic or acrylic based
Single-coniponent
polyurethane; high gloss finish
A
A
A, B
A
Single component
A
A, B
D
I Polyamide
' Solids
Epoxy, High
Polyurethane
Enamel
Acrylic Latex
(High-Gloss)
Acrylic Latex
(Semi-Gloss)
Percent of volume solids 80 percent minimum, suitable
for immersion service
, A
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-7
Product
Canvas Sealer
Definition
Single-package latex or alkyd primer for canvas
surfaces; follow manufacturer’s recommendations for
surface DreDaration
Manufacturer Code
A, €3
Single-component, coal-tar pitch based I A
Paint
Block Filler
Alkyd Wood
Primer
Primer-sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces, 100 A, B
percent acrylic emulsion
Flat alkyd A, B
Semigloss alkyd
A two-component, polyamide epoxy emulsion
(Semigloss) I I
A
Acrylic Latex
(Flat)
Co-polymer oil, clear, dull luster
Satin luster, linseed oil
Acrylic, water repellant, penetrating stain
Clear acrvlic
Water Base
EDOXV
A, B, c
A, B, c
B
B
Sanding Sealer
Stain, Wood
Stain, Concrete
4crvlic Sealer
Varnish
3las-Flake
Ceinforced High
3uild Epoxy
Flat latex
Nonpigmented vehicle based on a variety of resins
(alkyd, phenolic, urethane) available in gloss,
semigloss, and flat finishes
Solventless, moisture tolerant, room temperature amine
aired epoxy
E
I
2.03 MIXING
A. Multiple-Component Coatings:
1. Prepare using the contents of the container for each component as packaged by
paint manufacturer.
2. No partial batches will be permitted.
3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot
life.
4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small
areas.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-8
5. Mix only components specified and fumished by paint manufacturer.
6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even
within the same generic type of coating.
B. Colors:
Formulate paints with colorants fiee of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that
might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at
the site.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3 .O 1 EXAMINATION
A. Surface Preparation Verifications:
1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these
Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of paint
manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements
shall apply.
2. Provide Project Manager minimum 7 days’ advance notice to start of shop or
field surface preparation work and coating application work.
3. Perform such work only in presence of Project Manager, unless Project Manager
grants prior approval to perform such work in Project Manager’s absence.
B. Schedule inspection with Project Manager in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats
prior to succeeding coat.
3.02. PREPARATION
A. Shop Blast Cleaning:
1, Notify Project Manager at least 7 days prior to start of shop blast cleaning to
allow for inspection of the work during surface preparation and shop application
of paints.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-9
B.
C.
2. Structural steel, metal doors and frames, metal louvers, and similar items, as
reviewed by Project Manager, may be shop prepared and primed. Centrifugal
wheel blast cleaning is an acceptable alternate to shop blast cleaning.
Field Abrasive Blasting:
Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore
damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed.
Protection of Items not to be Painted
1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates,
aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates
on machinery, and other sufaces not intended to be painted.
2. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent
surfaces.
3. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment f?om damage
during surface preparation and painting process.
4. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials fiom entering the
motors.
3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A., Metal Surfaces:
1. Where indicated, meet requirements of the following SSPC Specifications:
a.
b.
d.
e.
f
g. h.
C.
1.
Solvent Cleaning: SP 1-82.
Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2-89..
Power Tool Cleaning: SP 3-89.
White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5-91.
Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6-91.
Brush-off Blast Cleaning: SP 7-9 1.
Pickling: SP 8-91.
Near-White Blast Cleaning: SP 10-91.
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: SP 1 1-91
2. The words “solvent cleaning,” “hand tool cleaning,” “wire brushing,” and “blast
cleaning,” or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint
manufacturer’s specifications refer to the applicable SSPC Specifications.
a
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-1 0
3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet
or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers’
recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. 0
4. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning.
5. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface
defects.
6. Welds and Adjacent Areas:
a. Prepare such that there is:
1)
2)
3) Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of
weld bead.
No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead.
No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any other area to be
painted.
No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead.
b.
7. Preblast Cleaning Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior
to blast cleaning.
Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with
appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing.
Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitabIe soIvents
and clean cloths.
8. Blast Cleaning Requirements:
a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain specified
degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein
and takes precedence over coating manufacturer’s recommendations.
Select type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets
coating manufacturer’s recommendations for particular primer to be used.
Use only dry blast cleaning methods.
Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems.
Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental
control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required),
and disposition of spent aggregate and debris.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements:
a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by e dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-1 1
painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling
is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth.
Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have
started to rust before they are painted.
b.
B. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate hand or
power tools.
2. Remove oil and grease by wiping or scrubbing the Surface with a suitable
solvent, rags and brushes. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the find wiping
to avoid contaminating the surface.
3. Obtain coating manufacturer’s recommendations for additional preparation that
may be required.
C. Concrete Surfaces:
1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed.
2. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other
foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods.
3. Brush-off blast clean to remove loose concrete and provide a tooth for binding.
Upon approval by Project Manager, surface may be cleaned by acid etching
method. Approval subject to producing desired profile.
4. Secure coating manufacturer’s recommendations for additional preparation if
required for excessive bug holes exposed af’ter blasting.
5. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to
painting.
D. Plastic Surfaces:
1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with a medium grit sandpaper to provide
tooth for the coating system.
2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided sufficient
controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements 0 Coating Systems
09900-1 2
E. Masonry Surfaces:
1. Complete and cure masonry constsuction for 14 days or more before starting
surface preparation work.
2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other
foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods.
Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits
using one of the following:
a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by
rinsing with clean water.
3.
b. Brush-off blasting.
c. Water blasting.
4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces.
5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesions, dry
prior to painting.
6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and fiee of surfwe
imperfections that would impair the intended finished appearance.
7. Clear Coated Masonry Surfaces: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture
after cleaning.
Existing Surfaces to be Painted:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Detergent wash and freshwater rinse.
Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by Hand or Power Tool,
SP 2-89 or SP 3-89.
Feather surrounding intact coating.
Apply one spot coat of the specified primer to bare areas, overlapping prepared
existing coating.
Apply one full finish coat of the specified primer of finish coat(s) overall.
If an aged, plural-component material is to be topcoated, contact coating
manufacturer concerned for additional surface preparation requirements.
Mah Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900- 13
7. Application of Cosmetic Coat:
a.
b.
c.
It is assumed that existing coatings have oxidized sufficiently to prevent
lifting or peeling when overcoated with paints specified.
Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting painting.
If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from Project
Manager.
8. Perfom blasting as required to restore damaged surfaces. Materials, equipment,
procedures shall meet requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council.
3.04 SURFACE CLEANING METHOD
A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC-
SP 7-9 1, Brush-off Blast Cleaning.
Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nut shell.
Select various surface preparation parameters such as size and hardness of
abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance &om surface such that
surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage.
Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed
to view.
Project Manager will approve acceptable blast cleaned area and will use area as a
representative sample of surface preparation.
Repair or replace surfaces damaged by blast cleaning.
B. Acid Etching:
1. After precleaning, spread the following solution by brush or plastic sprinkling
can: 1 part commercial muriatic acid reduced by 2 parts water by volume.
Adding acid to water in these proportions gives an approximate 10 percent
solution of HCI.
2. Application:
a.
b.
Application Rate: Approximately 2 gallons per 100 square feet.
Work acid solution into surface by hard-bristled brushes or brooms until
complete wetting and coverage is obtained.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900- 14
c.
d
e.
f
Acid will react vigorously for a few minutes, during which time brushing
is continued.
After bubbling subsides (1 0 minutes), hose down the remaining slurry with
high pressure clean water.
Rinse immediately to avoid formation on the surface of salts that are
difficult to remove.
Thoroughly rinse to remove any residual acid surface condition, which can
impair adhesion.
3. Ensure surface is completely dry before application of coating.
4. Apply acid etching, to obtain a “grit sandpaper”. surface profile. If not, repeat
treatment.
C. Solvent Cleaning:
1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and
cutting compounds, and other surface contaminants by using solvents, emulsions,
cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods which
involve a solvent or cleaning action.
2. Meets requirements of SSPC-SP 1-82.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. The intention of these Specifications is for existing and new concrete, metal and
submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not,
except as specified otherwise.
2. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system.
Consult coatings manufacturer’s written instructions for these requirements. Do
not immerse coating for any purpose until completion of curing cycle.
3. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint manufacturers’
printed recommendations and special details. The more stringent requirements
shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough dyng of
previously applied paint.
4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise
approved.
5. Sand metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-1 5
6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to
applying next coat.
7. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to structures or to
one another prior to assembly or installation.
8. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe
penetrations.
9. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use.
10. Where more than one coat of a material is applied within a given system,
alternate color to provide a visual reference that the required number of coats
have been applied.
B. Galvanized Metal:
1. Concealed galvanized surfaces (behind building panels or walls) do not require
painting unless specifically indicated herein.
2. Prepare surface and apply wash primer or coating manufacturer’s recommended
coating. This primer will replace the required paint system’s indicated primer.
3. Apply coating system appropriate for the exposure (intennediate/finish coats).
C. Shop Primed and Factory Finished Surfaces:
1. Schedule inspection with Project Manager before shop priming or topcoating
factory finished items delivered to site.
2. Prepare surfaces and spot prime using specified prinier.
3. Apply mist coat of primer, 1-mil dry film thickness.
4. After welding, prepare and prime holdback areas as required for paint system.
Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Manufacturer Applied Paint Systems:
1. Repair abraded areas on factory finished items as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish.
MahT Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900- 16
3. Fusion Bonded Coatings: Provide appropriate required repair kits for field use.
E. Film Thickness:
1. Number of Coats: Minimum required without regard to coating thickness.
Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness,
depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers’ products, and
atmospheric conditions.
2. Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed coating manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surfaces:
a.
b.
c.
Perform with properly calibrated instruments.
Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications.
All coats are subject to inspection by Project Manager and coating
manufacturer’s representative.
4. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, and plastic, surfaces to ensure
proper and complete coverage has been attained.
5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where
insufficient film thickness are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in
these areas.
6. Thiclmess Testing:
a.
b.
c.
ARer repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, find test will be
conducted by the Project Manager.
Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type dry film
thickness gauge.
Test finish coat, except zinc primer, galvanizing, and elastomeric coatings
in excess of 25 mils dry, for holidays and discontinuities with an electrical
holiday detector.
Holiday detect coatings in excess of 25 mils dry with high voltage units
recommended by the coating manufacturer.
Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a
minimum of 8 hours after application of coating.
d.
e.
F. Porous Surfaces, such as Concrete, Masonry:
1. FilledSurfacer: Use coating manufacturer’s recommended product to fill air
holes, bug holes, and other surface defects.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900- 1 7
G.
H.
2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion.
a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer and
depended on surface density and type of coating.
3. Surfaces Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running
water, just prior to application of coating.
Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays:
1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint
manufacturer.
2. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner,
which will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance.
Unsatisfactory Application:
'1. If item has an improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness, clean surface
and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage.
Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer.
2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and
feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of
repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required.
3. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for
rejection.
4, Repair defects in accordance with Written recommendations of coating
manufacturer.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A, Testing Gages:
1. Provide a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness
specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Cop, Anaheim, CA; Mikrotest;
or equal.
2. Provide an electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type to test finish
coat, except zinc primer, high-build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for
holidays and discontinuities as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel,
CA, Model M- 1 ; or equal.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements a. Coating Systems
09900-1 8
3. Provide a high voltage holiday detector for elastomeric coatings in excess of 25
I Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Abrasive Blast, or Polyamide Epoxy 3 coats, 3 MDFTPC
mils dry film thickness. Unit to be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
3.07 CLEA"
Surface Prep.
Abrasive Blast, or
Centrifugal Wheel
Blast (SP 5-91)
A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or
destroy at the end of each day.
Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover J
Prime in accordance with
manufacturer's
recommendati om
Cod-TU EPOXY 2 coats, 16 MDFT
B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers fi-om the
site or destroy in a legal manner.
Abrasive Blast, or
Centrifugal Wheel I Epoxy Primer
Pc Polyamide, Anticorrosive
C. Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and
leave entire job clean.
1 coat, 2.5 MDFT
3.08 PROTECTNE COATINGS SYSTEMS
-. Blast (SP 10-9 1)
Polyurethane Enamel
A. System No. 1 Submerged Metal-Potable Water:
1 coat, 3 MDFT
Centrifugal Wheel I Blast fSP 5-91)
B. System No. 2 Submerged Metal-Domestic Sewage:
C. System No. 5 Exposed Metal-Mildly Corrosive:
I SurfacePreD. I Paint Material I Min. Coats. Cover I
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900- 19
D.
E.
F.
G.
Paint Material
Rust-Inhibitive Primer ’
System No. 6 Exposed Metal-Atmospheric:
Min. Coats, Cover
1 coat, 2 MDFT
Surface Prep.
Solvent Clean (SP 1 -
82) followed by
Hand Tool (SP 2-89),
Power Tool (SP 3-
89)
Centrihgal Wheel
Blast (SP 6-91)
Alkyd Enamel
Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Wash Primer or Coating
Manufacturer’s
Recommendation
1 coat, 0.4 MDFT
2 coats, 4 MDFT
Surface Prep.
System No. 10 Galvanized Metal Conditioning:
~ ~~~ Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Brush-off Blast (SP
7-9 1) or Plastic
Remaining coats as required
for exposure.
Epoxy Nonskid (Aggregated)
System No. 1 1 Galvanized Metal Repair:
Surface Prep.
Solvent Clean (SP 1-
82
Followed by Hand
Power Tool (SP 3-
89), or Brush-off
To01 ( SP 2-89),
Blast (SP 7-91)
Paint Material
Organic Zinc Rich Primer .
System No. 13 Skid-Resistant-Aluminum:
Min. Coats. Cover
1 coat, 3 MDFT
1 coat, 16 MDFT
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-20
H. System No. 19 Concrete Tank Lining:
Glass-flake Reinforced High 2 coats, 140 SFPGPC
Concrete
Surface Prep.
Masonry
Prime in accordance with
manufacturer’s
recommendations
Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Acrylic Sealer 2 coats, 100 SFPGPC
I. System No. 1 10 Masonry Sealer:
3.1 1 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following
application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following,
request clarification from Project Manager before starting work in question.
B. System No. 1 Submerged Metal-Potable Water:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above the maximum liquid surface;
metal surfaces above the maximum liquid surface that are a part of the immersed
equipment; surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, and
access manholes, and structural steel.
C. System No. 2 Submerged Metal-Domestic Sewage:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface,
metal surfaces above maximum liquid surface that are a part of immersed
equipment, concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes,
pipes, pipe sleeves, and access manholes, and structural steel.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-2 1
D. System No. 5 Exposed metal-Mildly Corrosive:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Exposed metal surfaces, located inside or outside of structures and exposed to
weather or in a highly humid atmosphere, such as pipe galleries and similar areas.
E. System No. 6 Exposed Metal-Atmospheric:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Exposed metal surfaces, new and located inside or outside of structures or
exposed to weather, including electrical and instrumentation equipment, sheet
metal work and miscellaneous architectural metal trim.
2. Apply surface preparation and primer to surfaces prior to installation. Finish
coats need only be applied to surfaces exposed aRer completion of construction.
F. System No. 10 Galvanized Metal Conditioning:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Galvanized surfaces requiring painting.
G. System No. 11 Galvanized Metal Repair:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded, chipped, or otherwise damaged.
H. System No. 13 Skip-Resistant-Aluminum:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Aluminum stair surfaces.
System No. 19 Concrete Surface Lining:
Use on the following items or areas:
1. Concrete surfaces.
2. Piping station dry well.
I.
- Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-22
J. Surfaces Not Requiring Painting:
Unless otherwise stated or shown, the following areas or items will not require painting
or coating:
1. Reinforced Steel.
2. Nonferrous and corrosion-resistant ferrous alloys such as copper, bronze, Monel,
aluminum, plate, and stainless steel, except where:
a.
b.
c.
Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals.
Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or
aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.
Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
3. Nonmetallic materials such as glass, PVC, wood, porcelain, and plastic (FRP)
except as required for archjtectural painting or color coding.
4. Prefinished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers,
switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches (if
prefinished in OSHA yellow), acoustical tile, cabinets, elevators, building
louvers, and wall panels; color coding of equipment is required.
5. Nonsubmerged electrical conduits attached to unpainted concrete surfaces,
6. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication, unless specified elsewhere or
subject to immersion.
7. Insulated piping and insulated piping with jacket will not required exterior
coating, except as require exterior coating, except as required for architectural
painting or color coding.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-23
PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET
Product Name/Number
Paint Material (Generic) (Proprietary)
Complete and attach manufacturer’s Technical Data Sheet to this PSDS for each coating system.
Paint System Number (fiom Spec.):
Min. Coats, Coverage
~~ ~ ~ Paint System Title (&om Spec.):
Coating Supplier:
Representative:
Surface Preparation:
~~~~
**END OF SECTION**
a.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Coating Systems
09900-24
SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTl NG UIS H ERS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1
1.
1.2
1.
1.3
1.
1.4
1.
1.5
1.
2.
WORK OF THIS SECTION
The WORK of this Section includes providing fire protection equipment,
cabinets, and appurtenant work, complete.
CODES
The WORK of this Section shall comply with the current editions of the following
codes as adopted by the City of San Diego Municipal Code:
1. Uniform Building Code
2. Uniform Fire Code
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS ,
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the
WORK of this Section:
1. Trade Standards:
National Fire Protection Association, Standard No. 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers" Underwriter's Laboratory, Fire Protection Equipment List
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300:
1. Manufacturer's catalogue containing technical data, installation
instructions, and details.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery of Materials: Fire extinguishers and appurtenant materials shall be
delivered in original unbroken packages or containers, bearing the manufacturer's
label with manufacturer's name, product description, and rating.
Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in an area which is protected fiom
deleterious elements as recommended by the material manufacturer. Storage shall
be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Fire Extinguisher
10520- 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
1.
2.2
1.
2.
2.3
1.
2.4
1.
2.
2.5
1.
2.6
GENERAL
All fire protection equipment shall be from the same manufacturer (unless
otherwise indicated) and shall meet the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers".
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Type A extinguisher shall be 201b minimum capacity, dry chemical type with
minimum UL rating of 10-A:60B:C, in enameled steel container, for Class A,
Class B, and Class C fires.
Five extinguishers shall be installed as shown on the plans.
CABINETS
Fire extinguisher cabinet shall be semi-recessed steel cabinet with clear anodized
aluminum door and door frame, and projecting, convex, butyrate plastic, canopy
type viewing door panel. The size shall be as necessary to hold fire extinguisher
at cabinet location.
BRACKETS AND OTHER MATERIALS
Mounting brackets shall be specially designed for extinguishers or cabinets.
All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and
proper installation of fue fighting devices shall be as selected by the
CONTRACTOR.
MANUFACTURERS
Fire protection equipment shall be manufactured by one of the following (or
equal):
1. General Fire Extinguisher Corp.
2. J.L. Industries
3. Potter-Ro emer
4.
5. Walter Kidde and Co.
Standard Fire Equipment (Division of Zurn Co.)
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Fire Extinguisher
10520-2
1. CONTRACTOR shall install a facility noteboard and operations and maintenance
shelf in the MCC Room as shown on the plans.
, PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Brackets: All fire extinguishers shall be provided with and installed on brackets or
brackets within cabinets. The CONTRACTOR shall block and reinforce the wall
area as necessary to support the fire extinguishers.
2. Locations: Fire protection equipment locations shall be verified with the
RESIDENT ENGINEER and Fire Marshall before installation and shall be
installed, where directed, per NFPA Standard No. 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
END OF SECTION 10520
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Fire Extinguisher
10520-3
SECTION 1 1000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIE'MENT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
This section specifies general requirements, which are applicable to all mechanical
equipment. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all mechanical equipment
meets the requirements of this section in addition to the specific requirements of the
individual equipment specification section.
B. Equipment Lists:
Equipment lists, presented in these specifications and as specified on the drawings, are
. included for the convenience of the Project Manager and Contractor and are not
complete listings of all equipment, devices and material to be provided under this
contract. The Contractor agrees to prepare his own material and equipment takeoff
lists as necessary to meet the requirements of this project manual.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arrangement:
The arrangement of equipment shown on the drawings is based upon information
available to the Owner at the time of design and is not intended to show exact
dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer. The drawings are, in part,
diagrammatic, and some features of the illustrated equipment installation may require
revision to meet actual equipment installation requirements. Structural supports,
foundations, connected piping, valves, and electrical conduit specified may have to be
altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made
for such revisions and alterations.
B. References:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements .General Requirements For Equipment
IIOOO-1
Reference (Latest Edition) - Title
AFBMA Std 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
AFBMA Std 11
ANSI B1.l Unified Screw Threads
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
ANSI B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 125
ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head
Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Log Screws
ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY:
Equipment systems made up of two or more components shall be provided as a unit by
the responsible manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall assign
unit responsibility to, and obtain each system &om, the supplier of the driven
equipment. The supplier shall provide all components of the system to enhance
compatibility, ease of construction and efficient maintenance. The responsible
manufacturer shall coordinate selection and design of all system components such that
all equipment is compatible and operates properly to achieve the performance
requirements specified. Assignment of unit responsibility shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to the Owner for performance of all systems.
Where the detailed specification requires the Contractor to furnish a certificate from
the Unit Responsibility Manufacturer, such certificates shall be signed by an officer of
the manufacturer's corporation and shall be notarized. No other submittal material will
be processed until a Certificate of Unit Responsibility has been received and has been
found to be satisfactory.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS
Flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this section shall conform in
dimensions and drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Pipe threads shall conform in
dimension and limits of size to ANSI B 1.1, coarse thread series, Class 2 fit.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements General Requirements For Equipment
I 1000-2
Threaded flanges shall have a standard taper pipe thread conforming to ANSI B1.20.1.
Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall be flat faced.
Flange assembly bolts shall be heavy pattern, hexagonal head, carbon steel machine bolts
with heavy pattern, hot pressed, hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2.
Threads shall be Unified Screw Threads, Standard Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A and 2B,
ANSIB1.l.
2.02 BEARINGS
Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated, ball or
roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. Each bearing shall be
rated in accordance with the latest revisions of AFBMA Methods of Evaluating Load
Ratings of Ball and Roller Bearings. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall
have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life shall be determined using
the maximum equipment operating speed.
Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, shall
be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension
tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic
alemite type.
Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a
separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to
safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient
temperature of 60 degrees C and shall be equipped with a filler pipe and an external level
indicator gage.
All bearings accessible to touch and located within 7 feet measured vertically fiom floor or
working level or within 15 inches measured horizontally fi-om stairways, ramps, fixed
ladders or other access structures shall either incorporate bearing housings with sufficient
cooling to maintain surface temperature at 65 degrees C or less for continuous operation at
bearing rated load and a 50 degrees C ambient temperature or appropriate shielding shall be
provided that will prevent inadvertent human contact.
2.03 COUPLINGS
Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment sections, equipment with a driver
greater than 1/2 HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the
output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling which
can accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and which
cushions shock loads and dampens torsional vibrations. The flexible member shall consist
of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber. The flexible member
shall be attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws, and the flanges
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements General Requirements For Equipment
1 1000-3
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
shall be attached to the stub shaft by means of taperlock bushings which shall give the
equivalent of a shrunk-on fit. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the driver
and the driven unit. Each coupling shall be sized and provided as recommended by the
coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of
rotation, and type of service.
Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded,
Thomas-Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or equal, couplings will be acceptable provided they are sized
iff-accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and sizing data are
submitted. They shall be installed in conformance to the coupling manufacturer's
instructions.
GUARDS
Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards which meet the requirements
OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of 14-gage steel, 1/2-13-15 expanded metal screen
- ~~ ~ ~- ~ --
of
to
provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards shall be
galvanized after fabrication and shall be designed to be readily removable to facilitate
maintenance of moving parts. Reinforced holes shall be provided. Lube fittings shall be
extended through guarcts; -- -- __ ___ ~
GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS AND GAGES
Gage taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of pumps, blowers and
compressors. Pressure and vacuum gages shall be prouided.whae-specifkd.
NAMEPLATES
Nameplates shall be provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified
equipment name or abbreviation and equipment number, Equipment mmeplates shall be
engraved or stamped stainless steel and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location
with stainless steel screws or drive pins.
LUBRICANTS
The Contractor shall provide for each item of mechanical equipment a supply of the
lubricant required for the commissioning period. Lubricants shall be of the type
recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall be products of the Owner's current
lubricant supplier. The Contractor shall limit the various types of lubricants by
consolidating them, with the equipment manufacturer's approval, into the least number of
different types. Not less than 90 days before the date shown in his construction schedule for
starting, testing and adjusting equipment, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with three
copies of alist showing the required lubricants, after consolidation, for each item of
mechanical equipment. The list shall show estimated quantity of lubricant needed for a 111
year's operation, assuming the equipment will be operating continuously.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements General Requirements For Equipment
1 1000-4
2.08 ANCHOR BOLTS
Anchor bolts shall be designed for lateral forces for both pullout and shear in accordance
with the provisions of Section 05501. Unless otherwise stated in the detailed specification,
anchor bolt materials shall conform to the provisions of Section 05501.
2.09 SPAREPARTS
Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, shall be stored in
accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts shall be tagged by project
equipment number and identified as to part number, equipment manufacturer, and
subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration such as
ferrous metal items and electrical components shall be properly protected by lubricants or
desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with
individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches
high, or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and
locking hasp. Hinges shall be strap type. The box shall be painted and identified with
stenciled lettering stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words
"spare parts." A neatly typed inventory of spare parts shall be taped to the underside of the
cover.
PART 3-EXECUTION e
Installation of equipment accessories included in this section shall be as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment
specification section.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements General Requirements For Equipment
1 1000-5
PART I-GENERAL
SECTION 11002
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies equipment mounting, consisting of equipment base, supports,
anchorage and accessories.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
All tanks, piping, equipment, supports and anchorages shall be designed by the
Contractor in accordance with requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC)
and Structural Engineering Association of California (SEAOC), latest edition,
unless specified otherwise herein. All elements required to resist the calculated
forces described herein shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. Calculations and Shop Drawings:
Calculations and shop drawings shall be submitted for all of the work required
above. All calculations must be made and signed by a civil or structural engineer
currently registered in the State of California. Inasmuch as all anchorage of
equipment is to be made of poured-in-place concrete elements, it is imperative that
types of anchorage be coordinated with the concrete subcontractor so that anchorage
may be installed at time of pouring. If calculations and anchorage details are not
submitted prior to pouring of concrete, the Contractor will become responsible for
any strengthening of concrete elements because of superimposed seismic loading.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of the latest version of the SSPWC.
The following information shall be provided:
1. Shop drawings for all equipment base and anchorage details.
2. Certification 'of anchor bolt calculations specified in paragraph 1 1002-1 -02.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Equipment Mounting
11002-1
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Equipment mountings shall be as shown. All equipment located on floor slabs shall be
mounted on concrete pads. Where a steel or cast base is shown or specified between the
equipment and the concrete pedestal, it shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.02 CAST IRON BASES
Cast iron bases located within a building do not require galvanizing but must be sealed in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 09900. All fasteners requiring
connections to the base shall be terminated by nuts welded to the bottom side of the base
and plugged with cork, plastic plugs or grease, or acorn nuts. In no case shall the fastener
terminate only into the metal base.
2.03 CONCRETE PEDESTALS
Concrete pedestals shall be 3 inches larger than the steel or cast base. All conduits, piping
connections, drains, etc., shall be enclosed by the concrete base. No conduits, piping
connections, drains, etc., will be accepted which rise directly fi-om the floor.
PART 3-EXECUTION e 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment:
Except where a higher lateral force is required by code, each piece of equipment
installed shall be anchored to resist a minimum lateral seismic force of 60 percent of
the operating weight of the equipment. This force shall be considered acting at the
center of gravity of the piece under consideration. No equipment shall be anchored
to vertical structural elements without written approval of the Project Manager.
Non-vibrating isolation equipment shall be anchored directly to the supporting floor
system. In addition to the anchorage, all equipment shall be internally designed so
that all static and moving parts are anchored to the supporting fiamework to resist
the imposed seismic force. All forces must be transmitted to the base in order to be
anchored as required.
Equipment, piping supports and anchorage located outside the buildings shall be
designed to comply with the UBC, latest edition.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Equipment Mounting
11002-2 ,
B. Piping:
All piping, raceways, accessories, and appurtenances, furnished with equipment ’
shall be anchored to resist a lateral seismic force of 60 percent of its operating
weight without excessive deflection. This force shall be considered acting at the
center of gravity of the piece under consideration.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Equipment Mounting
1 1002-3
SECTION 1 1004
EQUIPMENT CONTROL DEVICES
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies electrical and instrumentation devices specified as part of equipment
systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. GENERAL:
Control devices shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or Factory
Mutual (FM) for their intended purpose where such listing has been applied to similar
products.
B. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference (Latest Edition) - Title
JIC EMP-1
NEMA ICs 2
Electrical Standards for Mass Production
Equipment
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and
Assemblies
NEC National Electrical Code
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shalI be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of the latest version of SSPWC.
1. Sufficient data for materials and components to demonstrate compliance with
the specifications.
2. Location of ancillary devices, conduit, junction boxes, safety and control devices,
and conduit entries for feeding or controlling the equipment.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Equipment Control Devices
11004-1
3. Electrical elementary diagrams, internal connection diagrams, and external
interconnection diagrams, drawn in accordance with JIC andor ICs standards.
Connection diagrams shall be the conventional Qpe with lines showing point-to-
point wiring and must show terminals and devices as viewed by the electrician;
wireless or wire schedule types are not acceptable.
4. Process flow diagrams and process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) using
ISA symbols for equipment which interfaces with the instrumentation system or
has internal control loops.
5. Range and setting of indicators, instruments, timers, and devices.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER RATINGS
Devices shall be suitable for the control circuit voltage.
Where more than one piece of equipment (each having its own power source) have a
common control power system, provision shall be made for transferring the control power
system to an active source should the main source of control power fail.
2.02 PILOT DEVICES
Electrical pilot devices including switches, relays, and contacts shall be heavy-duty industrial
quality devices. Contacts which provide alarm, malfunction or control to external systems
shall be rated NEMA A600 (10 amps continuous at 600 volts AC), except that pressure
switches and temperature switches shall be rated NEMA B600 (5 amps continuous at 600
volts AC). Range of switches shall be that recommended by the mechanical equipment
manufacturer.
2.03 ALARM AND MALFUNCTION DETECTION
Devices which are used to directly signal alarm or malfunction conditions shall be externally
manually reset. The devices shall have a minimum of one contact which shall open on
malfunction or alarm condition, as scheduled. Other output relays and devices shall have a
minimum of one normally open and one normally closed contact which may be a NEMA
Form C contact. If the contact of the device is required for internal equipment control as
well as to signal alarm or malfunction conditions, then the manufacturer may make the reset
function a part of his equipment's master shutdown system. However, each source of
shutdown shall be shown by local trouble lights or flags which are manually reset at the
equipment control panel. Trouble output contacts shall open and remain open until manually
reset when equipment is shut down due to a malfunction. Trouble contacts shall not indicate
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Iniprovement Equipment Control Devices
I 1004-2
abnonnal conditions when the equipment has been manually shut down. Alarm and
malfunction signals shall be initiated by a contact opening.
2.04’ CABLE
Rubber covered multi-conductor cable shall not be used on stationary equipment for any
voltage exceeding 250 volts AC, nor shall it be used for connections to any motor rated 1/4
horsepower or larger. For these purposes, JIC EMF-1-1967 E12.4.4 through E12.4.8 and
E13.3 shall apply.
2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT CONDUIT
Flexible conduit shall be liquidtight flexible metal conduit, formed from spirally wound
galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked, jacketed with
liquidtight plastic cover. Minimum size shall be 1/2 inch. Fittings for liquidtight conduit
shall have cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut, brass grounding fermle
threaded to engage conduit spiral and O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection
and isolated throat. Forty-five and 90-degree fittings shall be used where applicable.
Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 inches.
2.06 INDICATING LIGHTS
Indicating lights shall be oiltight transformer type with low voltage lamps and push-to-test
features and shall be equipped with colored lenses in accordance with the following
schedule:
Color Tvpical function Example
Red Danger, abnormal Voltage applied, cycle in automatic,
condition, fault condition faults in air, water, lubricating or
filtering systems, ground detector
circuits.
or head in forward position.
End of cycle, unit or head returned,
motors stopped, motion stopped,
contactors open
Amber (yellow) Attention Motors running, machine in cycle, unit
Green Safe condition (security
White or clear Normal condition Normal pressure of air, water.
lubrication
2.07 GROUNDING
A separate ground conductor shall be run in each power conduit. The conductor shall be
sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. The conductor shall be bonded to the inside of
the device junction box.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Equipment Control Devices
I 1004-3
Freestanding control panels shall be equipped with a 1/4-inch by 1-inch copper ground bus
running the length of the panel, with the steel structure connected to the bus so as to
effectively ground the entire structure. A compression fitting shall be provided at each end
of the ground bus for accepting plant ground connections.
2.08 DEVICES WITH MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS
Equipment which is provided with control devices having motor starters or contactors shall
also comply with the following.
A. DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
Equipment shall be provided with a disconnect switch. If the disconnect switch is not
located within sight of the drive, it shall be provided with a padlock hasp. The
disconnect shall be a horsepower rated disconnect switch or molded case circuit
breaker, except that a manual motor starter may be used for drives less than 2 kVA.
Horsepower rated disconnect switches for equipment 2 kVA or greater shall be
provided with UL ClassRKI fuses. Circuit breaker interrupting ratings shall be
10,000 symmetrical amperes for service at 240volts or below and shall be
22,000 symmetrical amperes for service above 240 volts unless otherwise noted.
When the disconnecting device is not a circuit breaker or fused disconnect, the circuit
feeding the disconnecting device shall have adequate overcurrent and short circuit
protection.
B. OVERLOAD PROTECTION:
Protection shall be provided for full motor running overload in ungrounded conductors
for motors.
C. OVERLOAD RELAY CONTACTS:
Overload relay contacts shall not be connected in the line having provision for
grounding. Grounding connections shall be provided in the @sed side of control
circuits and shall be connected.
D. POWER:
Power will be supplied at one voltage as shown or specified. Additional voltage
requirements, such as 120 volt control power, shall be derived from transformers
provided internal to the control device as required. Each control power transformer
shall be rated at least 150 percent of the calculated maximum load it serves.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Equipment Control Devices
1 1004-4
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Control devices, when installed, shall comply with the requirements of the NEC.
3.02 FIELD WIRING
Conduit, wiring, or mounting of devices not shown on the electrical or instrumentation
drawings but required for a complete and operable system shall be provided under this
section.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Equipment Control Devices
1 1004-5
SECTION 1 1021
VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS -
PART I-GENERAL
1 .O 1 DESCRIPTION
This section includes vibration isolation system requirements for mechanical equipment.
Additional vibration isolation system requirements are provided in individual mechanical
equipment specification sections.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TESTING:
Unless the equipment incorporates unit construction using an integral rigid fiame or is
specified otherwise, each item of mechanical equipment, along with its drive unit, shall
be mounted on a rigid steel or steel and concrete base. Cast iron bases will be permitted
only when the equipment is not furnished with a vibration isolation system. Where
specified or noted on the drawings, the equipment, including the base, shall be
mounted on or suspended fiom vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of
vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the supporting structure. Vibration
isolation available internally in the equipment will not be considered equivalent and
shall not be provided when vibration isolation as specified herein is required. Normally
provided internal vibration isolators shall be replaced with rigid supports in such cases.
Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with unit weight distribution to
produce reasonably uniform deflections at each support. Bases, isolators and
deflections shall be as specified in the Equipment Vibration Isolation Selection Guide.
B. SEISMIC RESTRAlNTS:
Where seismic restraint is required by the detailed specification, equipment and
appurtenances resiliently mounted on spring or pad type vibration isolators, except for
curb mounted equipment, shall be provided with seismic restraints or snubbers as
specified herein. Seismic restraints for equipment mounted on vibration isolation curbs
shall consist of slack stainless steel cables designed to provide 4 g restraint in the four
primary horizontal directions.
For all spring mounted equipment with an operating weight (dead plus live loads,
including any integral supports) of 250 pounds or more, the selection of the particular
seismic snubber shall be based upon complete dynamic analysis calculations using
seismic response data derived for the system. Seismic response data are available in the
soils report.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-1
The dynamic analysis report shall include a listing and explanation of all assumptions
made which affect the calculations and the following information along the three
principal orthogonal axes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The six natural frequencies of the system both with and without snubbing.
The most probable movements (RMS values) at all mounting or
combination mounting and snubber locations as well as at duct, pipe, and
electrical connection points and the equipment extremities.
Maximum accelerations at the center of each significant system element
such as the motor, fan, compressor, heat exchanger, or engine as well as at
the mounting or combination mounting and snubber locations, all expressed
in g units.
The most probable force (RMS value) at each mounting or mounting and
snubber location expressed in pounds.
It is the intent of this specification that the acceleration shall not exceed 4 g
nor shall the excursion fiom center exceed 5/8 inch at the snubbers based on
the RMS values. The capacity of each seismic snubber at 3/8-inch deflection
shall be 3 to 4 times the load assigned to the mount grouping in its
immediate area.
When the analysis shows that levels higher than 4 g occur at the snubbers
because of the maximum allowable amplitude, the Contractor shall suggest
an alternate mount system based upon an additional dynamic analysis that
will maintain the 4 g level. The Engineer will express a preference for either
the higher g level or the alternate method at his option.
The analysis shall have the equipment modeled as a single 3-dimensional
rigid body composed of several rigidly attached lumped masses. The system
must be conservative and have six natural modes and frequencies.
The final solution shall be obtained as a combination of model responses in
the form of a most probable value equal to the RMS values of the six modes.
The report must be signed by a professional engineer registered in the State
of California with demonstrated' competence in the field.
C. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
The Contractor shall cause all vibration isolation systems, including the isolators,
seismic restraints and flexible connectors between the isolated equipment and
associated piping, ducting andor electrical work, to be designed by an engineer
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-2
1.03
qualified in this type of work. This provision, however, shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor of his overall responsibility for the work. The Contractor shall
submit the engineer's qualifications to the Project Manager for the Engineer's review
prior to starting the vibration isolation design. Vibration isolation mountings and
seismic restraints shall be as manufactured by mason kinetics Corporation, or equal.
Flexible connectors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the mechanical
equipment item in accordance with the recommendations of the vibration isolation
system engineer.
D. TESTING
Seismic restraint tests shall be conducted in an independent laboratory or under the
supervision of an independent professional engineer registered in the State of
California. The snubber assemblies shall be bolted to the test machine as the snubber is
normally installed. Test reports shall certify that nether the elastomer elements nor the
snubber body sustained any obvious deformation after release of load.
SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 of this document.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for the Engineer's review the following:
1. Vibration isolation system design engineer's qualifications.
2. Complete calculations showing static and dynamic deflections, weights, isolator
locations and flexible connector designs
3. Spring deflections and diameters, compressed spring heights and solid spring
heights.
4.
5.
Curb mounted base seal and wind resistance details.
Scale drawing of Type D mounting hanger showing the 30-degree arc capability.
6. Seismic restraint load deflection curves up to U2-inch deflection along the three
principal orthogonal axes.
7. Seismic restraint dynamic analysis report.
1.04 WORMATION
Information to be furnished to the Project Manager shall include certified copies of all
seismic restraint test reports.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-3
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 BASES
A. CURB-MOUNTED BASES:
Curb mounted equipment where vibration isolation is required, principally roof top
heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, shall be mounted on vibration
isolation bases that fit over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded
aluminum top and bottom members shall contain cadmium-plated springs having a
1-inch minimum deflection with 50 percent additional travel to solid. Spring diameters
shall be no less than 0.8 times the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be
provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum Clearance of
1/4 inch so as not to interfere with spring action except in high winds. The weather seal
shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base
and a waterproof flexible neoprene connection duct joining the outside perimeter of the
aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity
closure. Calking shall be kept to a minimurn.
. B. TYPEIBASES:
Type I bases shall be structural steel bases. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for
all equipment other than centrifugal refiigeration machines and pump bases, which
may be "T" or "L" shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for
suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a
minimum depth equal to l/lOth of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need
not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within
acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Grout holes shall be provided for
the bases of all equipment where vibration isolation is not specified. Where vibration
isolation is required, height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting
locations to provide a base clearance of 1 inch.
C. TYPEIIBASES:
Type 11 bases shall be steel members used to cradle machines having legs or bases that
do not require a complete supplementary base. All members shall be sufficiently rigid
to prevent strains in the equipment. Where vibration isolation is required, height saving
brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a clearance of 1 inch
below the base.
D. TYPE III BASES:
Type III bases shall be rectangular foundations consisting of concrete filled structural
steel beam or channel forms. Bases for split case pumps shall be of sufficient size to
provide support for suction and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-4
2.02
inches unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer or required for mass
or rigidity. In general, base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12th of the longest
dimension of the base but not less than 6 inches. Forms shall include, as a minimum,
concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2-inch bars or angles welded in place on 6-inch
centers each way in a layer 1-112 inches above the bottom or additional steel as
required by structural conditions. Forms shall be furnished with drilled steel members
with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the
anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Where vibration isolation is required, height
saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1-inch
clearance below the base.
VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS
A. TYPE A MOUNTINGS:
Type A mountings shall be double deflection neoprene mountings having a minimum
static deflection of 0.35 inch. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid
corrosion and shall have friction pads both top and bottom so that they need not be
bolted to the floor. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to
resist lateral migration. Resilient washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent
contact between the bolts and the equipment support bases. On equipment such as
small vent sets, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the
overhang.
B. TYPE B MOUNTINGS:
Type B mountings shall be fi-ee-standing, spring-type isolators laterally stable without
any housing and complete with 1/4-inch neoprene acoustical fiiction pads between the
base and the support. Mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to
the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the compressed height
of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid
equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. TYPE C MOUNTINGS:
Type C mountings shall be Type B mountings with a housing having vertical limit
stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Type C mountings shall be
provided for equipment with operating .weight different fi-om the installed weight, such
as chillers, boilers, etc., and equipment exposed to the wind, such as cooling towers.
The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and shall be located between the
supporting steel and roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The
installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 112 inch
shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring to
prevent interference with the spring action. Limit Stops shall be out of contact during
normal operations. Mountings shall be hot-dip galvanized steel.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-5
D. TYPE D MOUNTINGS:
Type D mountings shall be steel hangers which contain a steel spring and a 0.3-inch
deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a
rod isolation bushing which passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and
hangerbox lower hole sizes shall be of sufficient size to permit the hanger rod to swing
through a 30-degree arc before contacting the hole. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection.
E. TYPE E MOUNTINGS:
Type E mountings shall be double-deflection, cork and rubber sandwich pads
consisting of a high-density cork layer permanently bonded to top and bottom layers of
corrugated oil-resistant synthetic rubber. The corrugated design shall allow deflection
to increase with load and shall form a non-skid surface to resist lateral migration of the
equipment. Bolt holes and anchor bolts shall be provided where required to resist
migration. Resilient washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent contact
between the bolts and the equipment support bases.
2.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Each resiliently mounted base shall have a minimurn of four all-directional double
acting seismic snubbers located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to
facilitate attachment both to the base and to the structure. The snubbers shall consist of
interlocking steel members restrained by replaceable shock absorbent elastomeric
materials compounded to the specifications set forth in the Elastomeric Snubber
Materials Table.
The thickness of the elastomeric material shall be not less than 3/4 inch. Snubbers shall
be designed and manufactured with an air gap between rigid and resilient surfaces of
not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 1/4 inch. Snubbers shall be installed with factory
set clearances.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-6
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SELECTION GUIDE
Deflection and Mounting Criteria for Solid Concrete Floors'7b
Equipment Type'
Slab on Grade 20' Floor S 30' Floor Span 40' Floor Span -
Defld
-
Bast'
-
Defld -
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.5
0.75
I .5
0.75
1 .o
1.5
1 .O
3.75
I .5
1.75
1.75
1.75
.5
.5
L75
1.75 -
-
Base' -
I
II
II
I
11 n
I1 II
I1 -
-
Defld -
1.5
1.5
1.5
I .5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1 .o
1.5
I .o
3.75
L .5
1.75
I .5
I .5
.5
.5
.5
.5 -
-
Dend
-
Moun
-
Base'
-
Mount
-
Mount Base' Mount
Refrigemtion equipmenf
Centrifugal chillers or
heat pumps Cooler condenser
mounted
hermetic
compressors Cooler Condenser
alongside hermetic
compressor
Open Type Compressors'
Refrigeration reciprocating
500 rpm to 750 rpm
Over 750 rpm
Reciprocating chiIlers or
500 rpm to 750 rprn Over 750 rpm '
compressors
heat pumps
Factory assembled air
handling equipment(see blowers for fan heads)
Suspended units Through 5 hp
Over 5 hp - 275 rprn
to 400 rpm
Over 5 hp - over
400 rpm FIoor mounted units
Through 5 hp
Over 5 hp - 275 rpm
to 400 rpm
400 rpm
Over 5 hp - OV~T
:ompressom' Tank TypZ
Slow Speed (to 500 rpm)
horiz, vert, 1 or 2 cylinde*
Rotary Positiveh
Centrifugal'
Vacuum Pumpsi'
V-W TyPeg
1.5
1.5
I .5
2.5 2.5
2.5
2.5
0 1 .o
I .5
1.5
3.75
L.5
I .5
!.5
!.5
!.5
!.5
.5
.5 -
C
C
C
B B
C C
D
D
D
B
B
B
B
B
3
3
3
_I d
C
C
C
B B
C C
D
D
D
B
B
B
3
3
3
3
3
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1 .O
I .5
I .o
1.35
1.35
.5
.5
A
A
A
B B
C
C
D
2
1
1
4
i
B
C E E
I
11
III m
m
UI
I
IlIII
11 I1
n
I1
U
I1
Ill
I11
[I1 UI
1
I11
Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-7
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement
EQWMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SELECTION GUIDE
Deflection and Mounting Criteria for Solid Concrete Floors'.b
Equipment Type'
Slab on Grade 20' Floor Span 30' Floor Span 40' Floor Span -
Defld -
2.5
Mount Base' + Defld -
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
= :oncret
Mount Base' Defld
1.5
Base'
Ill
I or In
111
Mount
B
B
D
B
B
D
D
B
B
C
= t is desir
Base'
Ill
I or Ill
I11
11
Mount
B
B D
B
B
D
D
B
B
C
Blowers'
Utility Sets
Floor Mounted"
Roof Mounted"'
Suspendedk
Centrihgal fans'
Fan Heads'
Floor Mounted
Suspended
Tubular Centrifugal
and axial fans
Suspended unitsP
Floor Mounted - AMCA
Floor mounted 0 arrangement 9I.q
AMCA
arrangement 1'
2ooling Towers (Steel)
and Condensing Units
!ngine Driven Equipment and engine driversb
500 rpm to 750 rpm
Over 750 rpm
Hower Minimum
Deflection
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
D
B
B
D
D
B
B
C
In
I or IU
In
I or 111
m
II
Deflection Guide
When floors or roofs are I
sub-base. The sub-base s
iter than 4-inch soli' le to introduce a localized mass under the vibration mounting n the form of a
uld be 12 inches thick and I inches longer and wider than the mechanical eauiument above it. When the sub-base is I .. provided the 30 foot minimum static deflection requirements will suffice even for longer spans. When the sub-base cannot be provided, select
deflection requirements for the next larger span. For equipment mounted on elevated reinforced concrete slabs at least 8 inches thick, use selection criteria for 20 foot floor span regardkss of span
length.
Where bases are not specified, the Contractor shall provide a base appropriate for the equipment type and mounting specified. Deflections are not "nominal" but certifiable minimums in inches. The 0.75-inch, 1.5-inch, 2.5-inch, 3.5-inch and 4.5-inch minimums shall be
selected from manufacturers nominal I-inch, 2-inch, 3-inch, 4-inch and 5-inch series, respectively.
Flexible hoses shall be used to connect the unit to fixed piping. Lengths shall be six times the diameter up to a maximum of 36 inches.
Use Type I base under drive side. Use Type C mountings under the cooler and condenser.
Attach directly without vibration isolation where located on slabs on grade.
Type 111 bases shall be sized to reduce the maximum dynamic movement of the system to f 1/16-inch single amplitude (or 1/8-inch double amplitude.
Minimum static deflection or loading for Type F mounts shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
Where deflections are not shown for blowers, select deflections from Blower Minimum Deflection Guide located at the bottom of the table. When
blowers are 60 HP or larger, select deflection requirements for next larger span. A minimum of 2.5 inches shall be used unless larger deflections are
called for on the Guide of these large fans are located on a slab on grade.
Maximum deflection shall not exceed 2.5 inches.
Type I1 base is required where equipment is located on elevated floors and minimum static deflection exceeds 0.75-inch.
In lieu of Type B mount and Type 111 base, Type C mount may be substituted with Type I1 base required if minimum static deflection exceeds 0.75-
inch.
b
C
d
k
I
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-8
Type In base preferred for fans operating at static pressures exceeding 4 inches and on roof tops.
Horizontal thrust restraints consisting of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described for Type 3 mountings and with the sa e deflection as specified for the mounting, shall be provided between the equipment and ductwork or structure on the centerline of thrust symmet '
on each side of the unit. The assembly shall include rods and angle brackets for attachment. The spring element shall be contained within a steel
Where fans operate at static pressures exceeding 4 inches, horizontal thrust restraints are required (see Note 0).
Where equipment is located on elevated floors and fans operate at static pressures exceeding 4 inches, use Type 111 base OT had horizontal thrust
restraints (see Note 0). For eccentric cam-type vacuum pumps, centrifuges, and engine driven centrifuges or chillers, refer to detailed specifications for vibration isolation
requirements.
.a, it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 14-inch movement.
P
q
'
Elastomer Snubber Materials Table
Tests for Aging I
350% I +15% -40% I No cracks 1 25% (ma) 1
a ASTM D676
ASTM D412
ASTM D573
ASTM D1149
e ASTM D395
** END OF SECTION **
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvement Vibration Isolation Systems
11021-9
SECTION 1 1060
ELECTRIC MOTORS
PART 1-GENEW
1.01 DESCRlPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section provides specifications for all electric motors furnished under this
contract.
B. TYPE:
Motors specified herein are 3 phase, squirrel cage, 1/2 HP and above; or single
phase types smaller than 1/2 HP.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. GENERAL: The motors specified are, in general, premium quality motors
and shall be suitable for continuous duty operation.
2. RATING: Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service
throughout its acceleration range at impressed voltages in the range between
10 percent above and below nameplate rating. In addition, all motors shall
be selected to be nonoverloading at all points along the driven machines' full
speed characteristic curve.
Motors with 1.15 service factor shall not be required to deliver more than its
rated nameplate horsepower under the specified loading condition.
3. APPLICATION:
a. GENERAL: Motors supplied under this specification shall be
suitable for continuous duty where ambient temperatures may range
between 30 degrees F and 125 degrees F. Ambient relative
humidities will range between 30 and 100 percent. Details regarding
environmental conditions for specific applications will be found in
the detailed specifications for the driven equipment.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1 060- 1
b. ENCLOSURE TYPES: Enclosures shall be as defined by NEMA,
and for the purpose of this specification shall be identified in the
following manner:
Tvpe Enclosure
A Open drip proof (ODP)
B
C Totally enclosed nonventilated (TENV)
D
E Explo sion-pro0 f
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
Weather protected NEMA type II (WP-II)
c. , APPLICATION TYPES:
rn I. Process motors
II. Nonprocess motors
Unless noted otherwise, all motors in these specifications shall be Type I (process
motors). Type I motors shall be employed for the operation of all process-related
equipment, equipment mounted below grade and all ventilation equipment serving
process equipment areas.
Unless otherwise specified, Type 11 (nonprocess) motors are those driving
equipment with "built-in" or integral construction motors; and fractional horsepower
motors below 1/2 HP.
B. STANDARDS
Motors shall be designed and built in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following reference standards:
1. NEC; Environmental Operating Requirements.
2. ANSI Requirements for Numbering and Schematic Representation.
3. IEEE Standards for Electric Motors.
4. NEMA MG1 - latest revision.
5. NEMA 4; Requirements for Watertight Equipment.
6.
7.
NEMA 4X; Requirements for Outdoor Installations.
NEMA 7D; Requirements for Explosive Environments.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-2
8. NEC Requirements for Hazardous Locations.
C.
9. UL Requirements for Motors and Their Appurtenances.
10.
PERFORMANCE TESTS:
UL Requirements for Explosive Environments.
1. GENERAL: Should any motor exhibit indication of questionable
performance, the Construction Manager, at his discretion, may request
information or load test at any time after delivery of a motor to the job site.
If any motor proves to be defective, all costs of testing and repair or
replacement of defective motor shall be borne by the Contractor. If any
motor proves to be in accordance with recommendations or manufacturer's
tolerances, the cost of testing will be borne by the Owner.
2. INSULATION: Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by the
Contractor. Tests for acceptability shall be made using a 1000 volt megohm
meter (megger). Interpretations of test results for minimum acceptable
values of insulation resistance will be made in accordance with IEEE
publication 43.
3. LOAD TESTING: Load tests shall be performed to determine the motor's
ability to meet service factor loading conditions within the temperature
limits of the manufacturer's submittal data. Tests shall be conducted in
accordance with IEEE publication 112A. In the event that a motor does not
meet the load test requirements, the Contractor shall replace the motor at no
cost to the Owner.
1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 of this document.
The following material shall be submitted for each size and type of electric motor furnished
under this contract:
A. Descriptive bulletins, including full description of insulation system.
B. Manufacturer's connection diagrams for. motors furnished with overtemperature
protectors, heaters, or other auxiliary devices.
C. Sufficient data on overtemperature devices verify required protection.
D. Service factor.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-3
E. Efficiency at 1/2,3/4 and 4/4 nameplate horsepower.
F. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and 4/4 nameplate horsepower.
G. Temperature rise at service factor horsepower.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Open drip proof motors shall have openings constructed so that falling liquids or solid
particles striking or entering the enclosure at any angle fiom 0 to 15 degrees from vertical
will not interfere with the performance.
Totally enclosed fan cooled and totally enclosed nonventilated motors shall be provided
with drilled and tapped holes to drain all cavities within the motor. Motors with hes
286T or smaller and with frame 324T or larger shall be provided with automatic breather-
drain devices.
Weather protected NEMA Type II (WP-II) motors shall be provided with screens to prevent
objects larger than 1/2 inch fiom entering the enclosure. If weather-protected NEMA Type
II enclosures cannot be supplied for the required fi-ame sizes, subtypes B or C motor
enclosures may be substituted.
Explosion-proof motors shall be UL listed for Class I, Division 1 Group D hazardous
location and be provided with UL approved combination breather drains suitable for
hazardous locations.
Heaters shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation after shutdown on all motors 50
HP and above and for all other motors where specified. Heaters shall be cartridge type or
flexible wrap-around type installed adjacent to core iron. Heaters shall be rated 120 volts,
single phase, and rating in watts and volts shall be noted on motor nameplate or on a second
nameplate. The space heater terminals shall be brought to a separate terminal in the box.
The motor manufacturer's nameplates shall be engraved or stamped on stainless steel and
fastened to the motor frame with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive
pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all the items of information enumerated in NEMA
Standards MG1-10.37, MG1-10.38, or MG1-20.60, as applicable.
The nameplate shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection in the complete
machine.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-4
2.02 THREE PHASE MOTORS - 1/2 THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER
A. GENERAL
All motors 1/2 HP through 250 HP shall be 3 phase, squirrel cage, induction motors
on NEMA he 143T or larger. Type A motors shall be open drip proof motors
with modification to obtain premium quality motors. Types B, C, and D motors
shall be of the type generally designated by Westinghouse as "Mill and Chemical;"
by Reliance as "Model XT;" or equal. Conductors shall be copper.
B. RATING:
Motors shall be designed and connected for 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz operation.
Dual voltage (230/460) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the
motor terminal box. All motors shall have a 1.15 continuous duty service factor at
50 degrees C ambient temperature, unless noted otherwise. Starting kVA/HP shall
not exceed the values given in NEMA Standard MGI-12.34. The motors shall be
suitable for operation in either direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) of rotation.
C. INSULATION:
Insulation systems shall be NEMA Class F, nonhygroscopic, and shall be suitable
for use in moisture laden atmospheres and atmospheres containing acid or alkali
vapor. Insulation systems shall be manufacturer's premium grade, capable of
withstanding contaminated atmospheres.
D. CURRENT BALANCE:
Motor current unbalance on polyphase motors shall not exceed the values tabulated
below when motor is operating at any load within its service factor rating and is
supplied by a balanced voltage system:
Under 5 horsepower 25 percent
5 horsepower and above 10 percent
If, however, the unbalanced currents cause mechanical vibrations, the Contractor
shall correct the problem even if the measured unbalanced is less than listed above.
E. OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION:
Winding over-temperature devices shall be provided for all motors rated 50
horsepower and larger, for all Type E (explosion-proof) motors, and for all other
motors where specified.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-5
Over-temperature devices shall provide a normally closed contact suitable for wiring
into the motor control circuit. Any relays or solid state contacts which are required
shall be provided in an enclosure on or near the motor. These enclosures shall be
NEMA 12 for Type A motors, NEMA 4 for Type B, C, or D motors, NEMA 7D for
Type E, and NEMA 4X for Type F motors.
F. ENCLOSURES:
All motors shall have cast iron housing, bearing brackets, fm guard and conduit
box. Open drip proof and totally-enclosed motors shall be furnished with silicon
rubber gaskets at the base of the conduit box and between the halves of the motor
terminal box.
All motors shall be provided with a pad with a drilled and tapped hole, not less than
114 inch diameter, inside the conduit box for a motor frame grounding stud.
Motors weighmg more than 50 pounds shall be equipped with two lifting eyes. All
hardware shall be corrosion-resistant. Motors shall be delivered with the
manufacturer's standard epoxy enamel finish.
G. BEARINGS:
Three-phase motor bearings shall be conservatively designed to withstand all
stresses of the service specified. Antifiiction motor 11003-6 bearings shall be
designed to be regreasible and initially shall be filled with grease suitable for
ambient temperatures to 50 degrees C. If a higher ambient temperature is specified
for motor insulation rating purposes, bearings shall be sized and designed for the
same ambient. Bearing identification by AFBMA number shall be indicated on the
motor nameplate.
0
2.03 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motors shall be capacitor-start induction
motors. Small single-phase fan motors may be split-phase or shaded-pole type, if
such is standard for the equipment. Universal (AC-DC) type single-phase motors
are not acceptable unless their specific characteristics are necessary for the
application. Conductors shall be copper.
Single-phase motors shall be designed and connected for operation on a 1 15 volt, 60
Hz alternating current electrical system, or 208 volt where indicated.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-6
B. RATING:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motors shall not be required to deliver
more than its rated nameplate horsepower under any condition of required loading.
Type IB and IIB single-phase motors shall be continuous-time rated in conformity
With NEMA Standard MG1-10.35.
Single-phase motor locked rotor current shall not be greater than that specified in
NEMA Standard MG1-12.32, Design "N."
C. ENCLOSURES:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motors shall be Type IB or IIB. Small
single-phase fan motors may have open-type enclosures if they are suitably
protected fkom moisture, dripping water and lint buildup.
D. INSULATION:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motor insulation systems shall be as
recommended by the motor manufacturer.
E. CONSTRUCTION:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motor construction shall be as
recommended by the motor manufacturer.
F. BEARINGS:
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase motors shall be provided with sealed ball
bearings lubricated for 10 years normal use.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electric Motors
1 1060-7
SECTION 11295
AND ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC POWER
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION
-
A. The WORK of this Section includes providing packaged hydraulic power system complete
with reservoir, hydraulic pump, motor, accumulator, hydraulic solenoid positioning and fail-
safe valves, flow control and isolation valves, piping, fittings, filters, pressure gages, wiring,
and control panel for a complete installation to operate the hydraulic actuators.
B. The control system shall include pneumatic solenoid positioning and flow control valves to
operate three back up pneumatic valve actuators. The system shall include lockout valve,
air pressure regulator, filter and gauge and all necessary piping and fittings. Pneumatic
control system shall be supplied integrated in the same hydraulic control system panel.
System control shall allow for local and remote switch over fi-om hydraulic to pneumatic
valve control.
C. The WORK requires that one manufacturer accepts responsibility for furnishing the WORK
as indicated but without altering or modifying the Contractor’s responsibilities under the
Contract Documents.
B. The WORK also includes coordination of design, assembly, testing , installation and start
up testing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The WORK of the following Sections applies to the WORK of this Section. Other Sections
of the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this WORK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Section 1 1000 General Requirements for Equipment
Section 1 1004 Equipment Control Device
Section 15 100 Valves and Actuators
Section 15 104 Butterfly Valves
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the WORK of
this Section:
1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Section Vm, Pressure Vessels
Vessel Code
2. ASMEB31.1
Mahr Reservoir Improvements
Power Piping
Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
11295-1
3. JICH-1
4. ASTMA 105
Hydraulic Standards for Industrial Equipment and
General Purpose Machine Tools
Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping
Components
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 of this document..
A. The following shall be submitted in:
1. Piping, wiring and control schematics and diagrams.
2. Calculations demonstrating that the equipment will satisfy the indicated requirements.
3. Control panel arrangement drawing.
4. Information on similar installations by MANUFACTURER. Include contact name,
address and telephone number.
1.5 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: An authorized representative of the
manufacturer shall visit the site and witness the folIowing:
1.
2.
3.
Installation of the equipment for not less than 2 days.
Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment for not less than 1 day.
Startup and field-testing for proper operation for not less than 1 day.
B. Instruction of OWNER'S Personnel: The authorized service representative shall visit the
site for not less than 2 days to instruct the OWNER'S personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the equipment including step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with
necessary test equipment.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in packaged hydrauiic power systems with minimum
five installations of comparable size and complexity constructed during the last 5 years.
B. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum 5 years' experience.
PART 2 -- EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
This system will control three underwater eighteen-inch quarter turn butterfly valves. As
shown on the contract drawings and as described in the valve and actuator specification. To
ensure proper coordination of all interfacing details, the hydraulic and pneumatic operating
Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System Mahr Reservoir Improvements
1 1295-2
system shall be mandactured at a single location. Virginia Valve, Rodney Hunt Company
or equal shall manufacture the hydraulic-pneumatic power unit system. The valves will
have both hydraulic and pneumatic actuators with controls designed so that any of the
three valves can be operated in either mode. Pneumatic operation will require a
pressurized air supply and electrical power. An air receiver tank integral to the system
will supply air to the control unit. The hydraulic power unit will include a motor, pump,
and reservoir system that will store energy for fail-safe and additional valve operations in
a nitrogen-pressurized accumulator. Hydraulic operation will be fail-safe resulting in
valve closure if electrical power is lost.
A. General Operating Parameters and System Components
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Three 18-inch quarter turn butterfly valves and actuators.
Valves are 17 to 40 feet underwater
Distance from control unit to valves is approximately 495 feet
Control enclosure to be NEMA 12 padlock and located indoors
Operating time (open or close) to be 1 to 1 ?4 minutes, no valve throttling
required. Operation to be closed or fully open.
Underwater limit switches (by others) on each valve to provide contact
closures to indicate valve fully open and valve fully closed.
Valves may be operated fiom the control enclosure or fiom remote contact
inputs fkom an automated SCADA system.
Control unit is not installed in a hazardous area
Design ambient temperatures at the hydraulic system shall be 35 to 105 degrees
Fahrenheit.
10. The CONTRACTOR shall provide hydraulic fluid, accumulator precharging
nitrogen gas, interconnecting wiring and piping between the hydraulic and
pneumatic control system and the hydraulic and pneumatic actuator mounted on
the valves.
2.2 HYDRAULIC PARAMETERS
Actuators (by others) to be double acting with a volume of 50 cubic inches. The system
shall be a nominal 1,500-psi self-contained, pressurized hydraulic fluid system capable of
operating the valves at the specified speeds against the specified operating head
requirements. In addition, the hydraulic fluid system shall be designed to automatically, and
immediately close the valves upon a loss of main electrical power or other specified
emergency condition. Actuators operating pressure to be 1500 psi
Hydraulic system operating pressure to be a maximum of 200 psi limited by a pump
bypass relief valve
Pressure reducing valve will reduce pressure from system pressure to 1500 psi
Accumulators to operate all valves for three full cycles (six strokes) with system pressure
between 2400 and 1500 psi
Hydraulic pump to start at 2400 psi and stop at 2900 psi, controlled by pressure switches
Reservoir float switch to stop pump when the oil level is too low
Pressure switch to provide alarm if pressure drops below 1500 psi
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
1 1295-3
Pneumatic control will not allow valves to stop in intermediate position
Pneumatic control for each valve will include a solenoid valve to allow hydraulic control
Pneumatic control for each valve will have speed controls to independently adjust open
and closing rates
2.4 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PARAMETERS
Power input to the control unit will be 230V, 3 phase, 60 hertz
Control power will be 115V, single phase, 60 hertz
Unit will include a 230/115 step-down control transformer
Unit will include a transfer relay to switch the controls to a back-up power supply when
normal control power is lost
No controls will be on the exterior of the main enclosure
Unit will have a small NEMA 12 enclosure within the main enclosure with all local
controls. Each valve will have a Remote-Local selector switch
The Local position on the Local-Remote selector switches for all valves will not be
operative unless a secure interlock (by others) is closed
Unit will have LED indicating lights and remote alarms as contact closures for Pump E-
Stop, Low Oil Pressure, Motor Overload Trip, and Low Oil Level
Unit will have LED indicating lights and contact closures for remote signals to indicate
valve position
Unit will have Manual-Off-Auto selector switch for pump control
E-Stop pushbutton will stop pump motor, but will not stop valve operation
Pump motor will be started and stopped by pressure switches when in the pump Manual-
Off-Auto selector switch is in the Auto position
Pump will be started and stopped by a manual control Off-On selector switch when the
pump Manual-Off-Auto selector switch is in the Manual position
When valve Remote-Local selector switch is in Remote, valve control mode and position
will be determined by an automatic system via contact closure.
2.5 HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEM TUBING AND FJTTINGS:
1. Seamless or welded hydraulic steel tubing shall be used for all tubing and fittings
located on the hydraulic power unit.
2. Line Sizes:
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
I 1295-5
- ----a- The pipe size and wall thickness shall be selected to have a minimum safety
factor of 6: 1 based on the maximum working pressure of the line.
b. Suction piping shall be selected such that the fluid velocity does not exceed 4
feet per second.
c. Return line piping shall be selected such that the fluid velocity does not exceed
15 feet per second.
d Pressure line piping shall be selected such that the fluid velocity does not exceed
20 feet per second.
3. All fittings shall be of the type most appropriate for the tubing and the application.
a. All hydradic tube fittings shall be JIC 37 degree flare type.
b. All pressure hose ends shall be female 37 degree and permanently crimped to
the hose.
c. All rigid black iron piping shall utilize threaded NPTF (Dry seal) connections.
Black iron pipe shall only be used on suction and return lines.
4. Fittings shalI be Parker, or equal.
2.6 INTERCONNECTING PIPING
A. Rigid Seamless stainless steel hydraulic piping shall be installed between the hydraulic
power unit, the hydraulic valves and accumulator. This shall be provided by the valve
control system supplier. Interconnecting hydraulic lines between the control valves and
actuators shall be flexible metal hose, provided and installed by the Contractor. Rigid and
flexible lines shall be of a minimum size as recommended by the valve manufacturer. All
Hydraulic lines shall be rated with a minimum burst pressure of 6 times the maximum
working pressure of the line.
B. All hydradic shall have abrasion resistant external cover. Internal reinforcement for
hydraulic hoses shall be of high-tensile stainless steel. External abrasion resistant cover
shall be non-metal material, synthetic rubber, woven nylon or approved equal. Temperature
range shall be between -40 to 185 OF. The hoses shall be rated for constant working
pressure of 3000 PSI and minimum burst pressure of 12,000 PSI. Hydraulic hose shall be
provided in minimum of 100 feet lengths. Hose ends and fittings shall be male 37 degree
and stainless steel crimped.
C. Pneumatic hose shall have polymeric core tube, fiber reinforcement and abrasion resistant
urethane external cover. Hose shall be resistant to oil mist. Temperature range shall be
between -40 OF to 212 9. The hoses shall be rated for constant working pressure of 1250
PSI and minimum burst pressure of 5000 PSI. Hydraulic hose shall be provided in
minimum of 100 feet lengths. Hose ends and fittings shall be male 37 degree and stainless
steel crimDed. s
D. Hydraulic and pneumatic hoses shall be Parker or approved equal.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
I 1295-6
2.7 HYDRAULIC RESERVOIRS
A. The reservoir shall be designed and constructed to minimize entry of foreign matter
including water.
B. Reservoir Size:
1. Minimum reservoir size shall be 1.25 times the total return oil volume.
2. The reservoir shall be designed for adequate heat dissipation.
3. The reservoir shall be large enough to provide an adequate mounting surface for the
hydraulic system components.
4. Ample and accessible provisions shall be made for complete cleaning of the reservoir.
C. Reservoir Features:
1. The fluid level shall be visible in the sight gage throughout the normal operating cycle.
2. The reservoir shall be fabricated of steel.
3. A combination breather and filler assembly shall be supplied,
4. There shall be a baffle provided between the intake and return lines to facilitate the
separation of air and foreign matter fiom the hydraulic fluid.
The reservoir shall be provided with a tank drain and air or hydraulic pressure relief
valve.
5.
6. If required, an immersion heater shall be installed in the reservoir sized to maintain the
oil at a temperature, which will ensure protection of the pumps fiom starvation, and to
allow for proper operation of the system under the Performance Specifications.
2.8 PUMPS AND MOTORS
A. The pump and motor shall be sized to provide capacity of not less than 1.5 times combined
flow rate of all connected cylinders as specified at the design speed and pressure. Pumps
shall be capable of recharging all system accumulators within 15 minutes after power
restoration. The pumps shall be positive displacement, variable axial piston type.
B. The motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled.
C. Flexible couplings shall be used between the pump and motor.
D. mUnp and motor shall be provided with the following features:
1. Each pump shall be provided with a HandOWAuto selector switch, a red Fail
indicating light, and a green Running indicating light mounted on the control
panel.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
11295-7
E.
F.
G.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.10
A.
2. If pump fails to establish pressurized flow within an adjustable time period, a
pump failure will be assumed and indicated at the appropriate light. The pump
will be automatically shut down and prevented fiom operating until the
condition is cleared by pressing a "Pumping Reset" pushbutton mounted on the
control panel.
The direction,of rotation of each pump shall be clearly indicated on the pup.
Pump shall be Parker or approved equal.
Motor shall be Baldor or approved equal,.
ACCUMULATOR
Accumulator shall be sized to provide sufficient volume and pressure to operate three times
each of three butterfly valves at the specified design conditions through a complete opening
and closing cycle without the operation of the pumps.
All accumulator oil bottles shall be of the piston type construction. Bladder accumulators
shall not be used.
All accumulators shall be built in accordance with the requirements for pressure vessels in
ASME Section Wr. Accumulators shall be rated for 1,500-psi working pressure.
Means shall be provided for safely relieving accumulator gas and liquid pressure.
Each accumulator shall be provided with individual shut-off valves at both gas and liquid
ends.
The precharge fluid shall be nitrogen gas. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary
dry nitrogen.
There shall be a means of measuring precharge gas pressure.
There shall be a means of automatically determining when there is a-loss of precharge
pressure. This condition shall be reported as an alarm.
Accumulators shall be mounted in a package skid for floor mounting with suitable means
for handling.
Where accumulators are isolated' from the main system, they should be provided with a
separate pressure switch to maintain proper operating pressure.
A charging assembly with gauge and valving shall be provided for connecting the gas side
of the accumulators to standard brass gas bottle fittings during start-up.
Accuniulators shall be Hanna, Parker or approved equal.
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
All power unit electrically activated devices shall be factory wired to a NEMA 4 rated
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
1 1295-8
panel.
B.
C.
D.
2.1 1
1. Electrical controls shall include all necessary disconnect switches, motor starters and
circuit breakers plus control power transformer to provide a complete system requiring
only a single input power connection.
2. The 120 VAC grounded single phase control voltage shall be transformed fiom the
primary input power source. The transformer primary shall have both leads fused.
The secondary of the transformer shall be wired to a single pole circuit breaker rated at
10 amps on the ungrounded leg.
3. A panel mounted disconnect switch shall be provided.
4. Each motor circuit shall be protected with a properly sized adjustable magnetically
tripped three pole motor circuit protector.
5. Each motor shall be controlled by a 3-phase motor starter with overload relay NEMA
rated for the nameplate HP and voltage of the motor being operated.
All necessary electrical controls, operating devices, and monitoring devices required on the
HPS shall be wired to the electrical control enclosure mounted on the HPS.
Lights and Switches:
1. All indicating lights, pushbuttons and other devices shall be of the heavy-duty, full-
size, oil tight type.
Each indicating light and pushbutton shall have its own lamicoid plastic legend plate.
All switches and lights shall be GE or approved equal.
2.
3.
Internal Wiring:
1. Terminal blocks shall be track mounted, tubular screw type with pressure plate.
Terminal blocks shall be marked with the same identification as the wire terminated
there.
2. All wiring shall be identified with wiring markers with alphanumeric characters. The
identification of each wire shall be the same as that shown on the electrical schematic.
Each wire shall be so identified at each end.
3. All field connections shall be wired to a terminal strip in the electrical enclosure.
These connections shall be labeled and shall correspond to the electrical schematic
diagram.
2. To provide a ready source of power for test equipment, a ground fault protected 120
VAC duplex outlet powered by the control circuit shall be provided within the control
panel mounted on the hydraulic power unit (HPS).
TESTING, PAINTING, SPARE PARTS
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Conirol System
1 1295-9
A. Testing:
1. A detailed shop test procedure shall be submitted for approval during the initial
submittal process.
2. The hydraulic power unit and electrical controls shall be assembled and fully tested at
the valve manufacturer's facility to verify proper mechanical, electrical and control .
design and coordination.
3. A completed, dated and signed copy of the detailed test procedure shall be shipped
with each piece of equipment for verification of start-up settings.
B. Painting:
1. The power unit shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all traces of oil and grease prior
to painting.
2. The paint shall be Amerlock 400 medium grey, or equal. Apply two coats of 5 mils
minimum dry film thick (mdft) each, according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. SpareParts:
1. The following parts are the parts that shall be provided with the hydraulic power unit.
These spare parts shall be provided at the same time as the hydraulic power unit.
a. All spare parts shall be clearly tagged and labelled.
Two spare filter elements/canisters for each type of filter.
Two spare lamps shall be provided for each type and size of indicating light.
One spare, complete directional valve of each type and size shall be provided.
2.12 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hydraulic power system shall be manufactured by the following or approved equal:
1. Virginia Valves
2. Rodney Hunt Company
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hydraulic power systems and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Before installation, all piping components must be shipped to a pickling plant to undergo
the following cleaning process. Remove all extraneous materials, remove all oils or grease
in an alkaline bath, rinse with water, coat all vulnerable surfaces of valves, flanges, etc.,
Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System Mahr Reservoir Improvements
11295-10
I-
acid-pickle, dry, and inspect piping before closing cleaned pipes.
B. After installation, the piping shall be thoroughly inspected and cleaned, to remove all
foreign material, including mill scale, dirt, rust, oil, grease, weld spatter, and cutting chips.
Cleaning may be accomplished by hot oil flush or other approved method. All cleaning
shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. After installation, the hydraulic power system and piping shall be hydraulically tested to 150
percent of the maximum working pressure. The reservoir shall be tested for leakage by hot
oil or other approved method, prior to painting. Operational tests shall be performed on all
equipment and devices to demonstrate their proper function. Adjustable devices shall be
checked for range of adjustment and given final adjustment.
** END OF SECTION **
Mahr Reservoir Improvements H ydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
11295-1 1
Section 1 1347
SUBMERSIBLE EFFLUENT PUMP SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section specifies stainless steel submersible effluent pumps
complete with motor, pump mounting, pump flotation system, and accessories.
B. Type: Each pump shall be of the stainless steel, submersible, vertical shaft,
centrifugal nonclog type, suitable for pumping fluids containing solids.
Pumps shall be designed for continuous operation under submerged or
partially submerged conditions without damage to the pump or motor. Pumps
shall be capable of being attached and mounted to a pump flotation system.
C. Pump Equipment List:
Equipment No.
Recirculation Pump No. 1 P-101
Recirculation Pump No. 2 P- 102
D. Operating Requirements
1. General: The pump shall be specifically designed to pump unscreened
reservoir water and shall operate without clogging or fouling caused by
material in the pumped fluid at any operating condition within the range of
service specified. The pump and the driver shall be designed to operate
without cavitation or damaging vibration over the entire specified range of
flow and head conditions.
2. The complete pumping unit shall be designed to operate fiom a floating
pump support system. The pump line, power, and sensing lines shall be
connected from the flotation system to the shoreline pull boxes shown on the
drawings.
3. Pump Operatinn Condition: The pumps provided shall conform to the
following:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-1
The hydraulic system accumulator will have a pressure release valve on vessel for
emergency relief.
The system shall be designed to use a premium grade, FDA approved, hydraulic fluid.
Permanently installed lifting eyes shall be provided to facilitate the handling of the unit.
Additionally, it shall be constructed so as to allow lifting by fork truck.
All openings in hydraulic equipment shall be sealed prior to shipment.
All field connections points shall be clearly labeled.
Hydraulic control for each valve will include a solenoid valve for normal open-stop-close
operation
Hydraulic control for each valve will include a solenoid valve for fail-safe closure
Hydraulic control for each valve will include solenoid valves and a mini-reservoir to
allow pneumatic control
Hydraulic control for each valve will have speed controls to independently adjust open
and closing rates
Unit to be tested and operated with food-grade, vegetable-based, high-performance
hydraulic oil
2.3 PNEUMATIC PARAMETERS
Actuators (by others) to be double-acting with a volume of 507 cubic inches (332 cubic
inches on the rod end)
Actuator operating pressure to be 90 to 100 psi
Electrical power will be required for pneumatic operation of the valves
The system shall be provided with pneumatic accumulator to operate the pneumatic
actuators. The accumulator shall be sized based on 45-psi differential pressure and 9,000
cubic-inch of displaced volume. The accumulator shall be base mounted, epoxy coated,
vertical and maximum 4-feet tall. Accumulator shall be rated for 250 psi, with %-inch
drain and %-inch supply pipe. An adjustable pressure relief valve shall be provided.
Air to the 90-gallon receiver tank will be supplied by the screen backwash reciprocating
compressors alternating on starts.
Pneumatic control for each valve will include a solenoid valve for normal open-close
operation
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Hydraulic-Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
1 12954
Condition Equiument Number
P-101 P- 102
25 25 Capacity, gpm __
Total head, feet
pump speed, rpm
90 90
3,500 3,500
Notes:
Operating condition shall be taken as the rated, continuousduty operating
condition. Performance at the rated condition shall be guaranteed in accordance
with tolerances set forth in the Test Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, except
that any increase in heador capacity or both which results in a power
requirement greater than the pump motor's nameplate rating will be cause for
rejection.
Total head in the above tabulation is the algebraic difference between the
discharge head and suction head as defined in the standards of the Hydraulic
Institute.
4. Characteristics for Submersible Pumps: The equipment provided under this
section shall conform to the following:
Maximum sphere, capable of passing through pump
fkom inlet to discharge, inches diameter
Efficiency at rated condition, minimum, percent
Minimum discharge piping connection, inches
0.375
30
1.25
Motor
Speed, maximum rpm
Horsepower, maximum'
Voltage &
Phase
3500
314
11511
Notes:
The motor shall be non-overloading within the selection criteria set forth in the
Specifications. Pump selections which do not confm to ths requirement
without requiring a motor with a nameplate range greater than that listed are not
acceptable.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-2
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References: This section contains references to the following documents. They
are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between
the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference (Latest Edition)
ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and
Shapes
Hydraulic Institute Standards Standards of the Hydraulic Institute
NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall fbmish submittals in accordance
with Section 01 300, Submittals. Submittals are required for the following:
1. Certified shop and erection drawings for the pump floatation system.
2. Data, regarding pump and motor characteristics and performance:
a. Prior to fabrication and testing, provide guaranteed performance curves
based on shop tests of mechanically duplicate pumps, showing they meet
specified requirements for head, capacity, horsepower and pump
displacement, metering efficiency and repeatability. Include starting and
running torque at maximum speed specified and indicated.
(i) For units of same size and type, provide curves for a single unit only.
b. Provide catalog curves showing range of capacities and pressures
available for continuous and intermittent operation.
c. Results of certified performance test as specified.
d. Submit curves for guaranteed performance and certified tests as specified
on 8-1/2 inches by 1 1-inches (A4) sheets, one curve per sheet.
e. NotUsed
f. Shop drawing data for accessory items.
g. NotUsed
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
.11347-3
h. Manufacturer’s literature as needed to supplement certified data.
i.
j.
Operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists.
Listing of reference installations as specified with contact names and
telephone numbers.
k. Pump shop test results.
1. Motor shop test results.
m. NotUsed..
n. NotUsed.
0. Schematic control and power wiring diagrams.
p. Pump Bearing Life: Certified by pump manufacturer.
q. List of recommended spare parts other than those specified.
r. Special Tools.
s. Bearing temperature operating range for service conditions specified.
t. Shop and field testing procedures and equipment to be used.
B. Calculations: The CONTRACTOR shall submit calculations for the
following to be reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Calculations
submitted shall be for the pump flotation system and pumps manufactured for
this project. Calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a Registered Civil
Engineer in the State of California.
1.
2.
Buoyancy calculations of the entire system
Listing or overturning calculations for the system
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Pumps shall be Grundfos KP Series, EBARA EPD Pro Drainer Series, or
approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-4
a
A. Material employed for the construction of equipment provided under this
Specification shall be as follows:
Component
Pump and motor casing
Discharge Port
Impeller
Motor and pump shaft
Fasteners (Nut and Washer)
Externals bolts and nuts
Lifiing Handlemanger
Material
Stainless Steel, AISI Type 304
Stainless Steel, AISI Type 304
Stainless Steel, AISI Type 304
Stainless Steel, ASTM A276 Type
3 04
Stainless Steel, ASTM A276 Type
3 04
Stainless Steel, ASTM A276 Type
3 04
Stainless Steel, ASTM A276 Type
3 04
2.3 PUMP EQUIPMENT FEATURES
A. General: Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from the motor end of
pumps. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be
machined and fitted with nitrile O-rings. Pumps shall be fitted with dynamically
balanced nonclog impellers designed to pass solids of the size specified above.
1. Pumps shall be connected to the flotation system by both mounted pipe and
by a stainless steel cable system prior to lowering the pump into place.
Pumps shall be easily removable for inspection or service. The pump
housing shall not be directly fastened to the frame of the floatation system.
The stainless steel cable or chain shall be of adequate strength and length to
permit the raising and lowering of pumps for inspection and removal.
B. Pump Shaft: The shaft shall be designed with the same diameter along the
surface; no machined shoulders for bearings will be required or acceptable. A
surface finish with minimum roughness value of 12 micro-inches shall be
required.
1. The shaft shall not extend or overhang more than 2-1/2 times its diameter
below the bottom support bearing.
C. Bearings: Pump shafts shall be supported on two bearings; the upper bearing
shall be a single row ball bearing and the lower bearing a two-row angular
contact ball bearing. Bearings shall be heavy-duty, oil lubricated or permanently
greased, lubricated type double-shielded and factory sealed. Bearings shall be
designed for an L-10 rating life of at least 20,000 hours without additional
lubrication at maximum speed and operating load in continuous operation.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-5
D. Impeller: Impellers shall be dynamically balanced, nonclogging design capable
of handling specified solids and other matter found in normal reservoir
applications. Impellers shall be not less than two-vane design. Fit between the
impeller and the shaft shall be a sliding fit with a tamper-lock bushing pressed
by a screw which is threaded into the end of the shaft, or a slip fit onto the shaft
and drive key and fastened to the shaft by an impeller nut having cover for
protection from pumped fluid. A wearing ring system shall be designed for
abrasion resistance to Brinell hardness of 400 and also provide efficient sealing
between the volute and impeller.
E. Mechanical Seals: Pumps shall be provided with tandem carbon and ceramic
faced inner and silicon-carbide outer mechanical seals. The seals shall require
neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be easily replaceable. The
submersible pumps shall be capable of continuous submergence without loss
of watertight integrity to a depth of 65-feet.
F. Cable: Each pump shall be furnished with one or more pump power and control
cables as necessary for pump operation and protection. Each cable shall be
sheathed in a synthetic jacket suitable for submersible pump application and be
designed to prevent moisture f?om wicking through the cable assembly even if
cable jacket has been punctured. The power and control cables shall also be
sized according to NEC and ICEA Standards and also meet with P-MSHA
approval or equivalent. Adequate strain relief shall be provided for each cable to
preclude possible damage to the cable entry or cable entry seal due to
mechanical loads imposed on the power or control cables.
1. Cable ends shall be protected at all times from moisture. Exposure to
moisture shall result in rejection of the cable. The total cable length shall be
of sufficient length for direct connection to pump control and electrical
power system at the pull boxes shown on the drawings, including an extra
2-feet to be looped around cable supports in the pull boxes.
.
G. Cable Seal: The cable entry water seal design shall preclude specific torque
requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall
be comprised of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet having a close tolerance
fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and
compressed by the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate fiom
the function of sealing the cable. Adequate strain relief provisions shall be
provided to eliminate any mechanical loading of the cable entry seal. The cable
entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a stator lead sealing
gland or terminal board, which shall isolate the motor interior fi-om foreign
material gaining access through the pump top. Each individual conductor wire
shall be cast in resin in such a manner that any water leakage in motor through
capillary action, because of external cable damage or other causes, shall be
avoided.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
1 1347-6
H. Motor: The pump motor shall be a premium efficient, UL listed, submersible
explosion-proof motor, rated Class I, Division 1, Group C and D for
hazardous location, inverted duty, housed in an air-filled and oil filled
watertight chamber, NEMA B type. The stator winding and stator leads shall
be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation which shall be rated at
a temperature of 155 degrees C. The motor shall be designed for continuous
duty, capable of sustaining a minimum of 10 starts per hour. The temperature
rise of the motor shall not be in excess of that specified in NEMA MG-1 for
class B insulating materials when operating continuously under load. The
junction chamber, containing the terminal board, shall be hermetically sealed
fkom the motor. Connection between the cable conductors and stator leads
shall be made with threaded compressed type binding post permanently
affixed to a terminal board. The submersible electrical cable shall be of
sufficient length to reach the junction box.
I. Coolinn System: Each unit shall be provided with a cooling system and thermal
sensors shall be provided to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be
equipped with one thermal switch embedded in the end coils of the stator
winding. This switch shall be used in conjunction with external motor overload
protection and wired to the control panel.
J. Discharge Pipinp and Connection: Primary mounting of the pump to the pump
flotation system will be via the pump discharge piping. The pump discharge
piping shall be rigid stainless steel, Type 316. The discharge pipe shall be
capable of being connected to the pump flotation system and pump to provide
adequate support of the pump to the flotation system. The method of connection
to the pump discharge port shall be either by a flanged or threaded connection
(NPT). The discharge piping shall be supported from the flotation system by a
pipe hanger bolted into the fi-amework of the flotation system.
K. Liftinn ChaidCable: The pump shall be provided with a Type 3 16 stainless
steel safety chain or cable. The safety chain or cable shall provide adequate
mounting support of the pump in case of mounting failure by the discharge
piping. The cable or chain shall be connected to the lifting handle or hanger of
the pump with Type 316 hardware, and shall provide adequate support to ensure
the pump will hang from the pump floatation system device without failure. The
chain or cable shall be connected to the flotation system in a similar manner to
provide adequate pump support without failure.
2.4 FLOTATION SYSTEM DEVICE
A. General: Stainless steel submersible pumps shall be supported in the center of
the reservoir from a pump flotation system. Flotation system shall be a
modular pontoon float assembly which utilizes commercial grade marine dock
type pontoons and corrosion resistant frame system members. Flotation
system shall be secured to the shore line via rope as specified below, tied to a
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
1 1347-7
shoreline anchor system and to the floatation system for the raising and
lowering of pumps for inspection and removal.
B. Pontoons: Pontoons shall be manufactured of high impact W-inhibited
polyethylene material that will not rust, corrode, or deteriorate &om contact with
the reservoir. Pontoons shall either be supplied with flanges or other mechanism
to provide secure connections to the frame support system. Pontoons shall be
sized so that buoyancy and over turning of the entire system with the attached
pumps exceeds to total pump and flotation assembly weight by 500 lbs
minimum.
C. Frame Support System: Frame support system shall be comprised of corrosion
resistant frame system members. Applicable members include Flip beams,
structural steel with corrosion resistant coating per Section 09900, stainless
steel beams, or other corrosion resistant system as approved by the
ENGINEER. Frame system at a minimum shall include a boxed frame type
system, with two intermediate support members. Intermediate support
members shall be sized to properly support the weight of two pumps and
appurtenances as specified above. FRP or stainless steel grating, capable of
supporting 500 lbs/sf, shall be installed on top of the fiame support system
fiom each end member to the closest intermediate member. Grating shall not
be placed on top of the frame system between intermediate members to allow
operators ease of access to remove and lower pumps into place.
D. Connection Assemblies
1. Frame Support System to Pontoon Connection: All assemblies used to
connect the fiarne support system to the pontoons shall be Type 316
Stainless Steel. Fasteners shall be strong enough to support the entire load of
the grating, fiame.
2. Pump to Frame Support System Connection: Connection assemblies utilized
to connect the pump discharge piping and pump chaidcable to the kame
system shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. Where different metal materials
make contact, neoprene gasket material shall be placed between the contact
regions to prevent corrosion between dissimilar metals. Discharge piping
shall be connected to the kame type system with U-bolts or other
ENGINEER approved device. Pump chaidcable shall be connected at two
points on the fiame support system. To provide redundant emergency
support connection. U-bolts and pump chain/cable connection shall be sized
to provide adequate strength to support the entire pump assembly.
3. Pump Flotation System to Shoreline Anchor Connection: The entire pump
flotation system shall be connected to the shoreline via three connection
points as shown in the Drawings. The flotation system shall contain a
minimum of four (4) Type 3 16 Stainless Steel, two-inch diameter eyebolts,
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-8
2.5
2.6
2.7
one at each comer of the flotation system. Three shoreline anchor systems
are shown in the Contract Drawings. The flotation system shall be
connected to the shoreline anchor system with connection Wire rope as
specified below.
E. Connection Wire Rope: The connection wire rope shall be a minimurn of
%-inch diameter. Rope material shall be comprised of either polypropylene or
stainless steel cable. If polypropylene is used, a small stainless steel metal wire
shall be located in the center of the rope to provide additional strength upon
failure of the polypropylene material. A locking clip mechanism shall be placed
on each end of the wire rope to enable the rope to be clipped to the eyebolts on
the flotation system and shoreline anchor. The locking clip shall be Type 3 16
stainless steel and shall be sized large enough to clip around each eyebolt.
CONTROLS
A. The pump controls shall conform to the requirements of Section 16.
ACCESSORIES
A. The pump manufacturer shall provide all other accessories necessary to
complete the installation as specified. All metal accessories shall be Type 3 16
stainless.
SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each pump:
1. 2 sets--all gaskets
2. 2 sets41 bearings
3. 2 sets--mechanical seals
4. 2 sets--case wear ring
5. 2 sets--support chains or cables
B. Spare parts shall be individually packed and boxed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Pumps shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
1 1347-9
3.2 TESTING
A. After completion of installation, pumps shall be field tested to demonstrate
compliance with the performance requirements as specified.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Submersible Effluent Pump System
11347-10
SECTION 11435
INTAKE SCREENS AND AIR BACKWASH ASSEMBLY
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section specifies intake screens and automatic screen back wash assembly. The general requirements applicable to all mechanical equipment, as specified in Section 1 1000-1.01 A., are applicable to the equipment specified in this section.
B. TYPE:
The intake screen shall be of all-welded continuous slot construction to provide a maximum open area as specified here in. The intake assembly shall include an internal flow modifier to provide a low head loss uniform flow field over the entire screen surface.
The backwash assembly shall include but is not liniited to: air compressor, receiver unit, air dryer, pneumatically actuated ball valve and associated hoses and piping. Compressor shall be of the two-stage, air-cooled, belt-driven reciprocating, alternating type, assembled in a self-contained unit consisting of the compressors, motors, V-belt drives, and regulators, all skid mounted. Suitable piping between compressor, control, and receiver shall be provided. The air dryer shall cool, dry and remove oil aerosols and moisture fiom the compressed air.
C. EQUPMENT LIST:
Equipment No.
Intake Screens I/O 001-003
Air Compressor CP 001
Air dryer AD 001
Ball Valve BV 00 1-003
D. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
The air-cooled compressor and accessories shall be designed and selected for continuous duty operation and shall deliver air which at all times meets operating requirements listed in paragraph 1.01 E. of this section.
E. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND CHARACTERISTICS:
The package unit shall meet the following requirements:
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-1
I/O 0014003
Capacity, gpm Through slot velocity, $s Differential Hydrostatic Collapse Pressure, psi
CP 001 ,.
Inlet pressure, psig Maximum working pressure, psig Discharge pressure, psig Maximum rated motor, horsepower
AD 001
Rated capacity, scfin
Operating pressure, psig
Inlet air temperature, degrees F
8000 0.855 17.34
14.3 250 175 10
50
175
50
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This paragraph references the followin documents. They are a part of this section as
and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. specified and modified. In case of con fi ict between the requirements of this section
Reference Title
ASME Heat Exchanger Code
B. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY:
The Screen Manufacturer shall provide the entire package unit complete with air backwash system and control panel.
C. VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS:
The equipments shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 11021.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The air backwash assembly including the compressor, air dryer, receiver tanks, pneumatically controlled ball valves will be installed indoors in the operations building as indicated on the drawings. Ambient temperatures are expected to range between 32 and 110 degrees F.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 of this document. 0
The following submittals shall be provided :
1. Drawings showing equipment layout , screen diameter, length, outlet and air backwash connections, material of construction.
2. Certificate of Unit Responsibility Assignment attesting that the Contractor has assigned unit responsibility in accordance with the requirements of this Section and paragraph 1 1000- 1.02 C. No other submittal material will be reviewed until the certificate has been received and found to be in conformance with these requirements.
Manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation.
Manufacturer's catalog data including weight of each component.
Predicted performance curves developed for the specific application, including speed, capacity, pressure, power and efficiency as applicable.
Motor data form 1 1060-A per Section 1 1060.
Control panel layout, front elevation and schematic wiring diagram.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
Intake screens shall be Johnson Screens type T-27 or approved equal. Air compressor shall be Quincy, Ingersoll Rand or equal; modified as necessary to provide the specified features and to meet specified operating requirements. Air dryer shall be Hankison HIT50 or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
Materials of components shall be as follows:
Component Material
Intake Screens Air Back wash pipe Piston ringssteel Cylinders and countenveights Low pressure piston High pressure piston and heads Crankshaft Forged Steel Connecting rods Frame, intercooler, and manifolds Baseplates Fabricated steel Gaskets
Type 3 16 stainless steel Chlorobutyl tubing
Cast iron, ASTM, Class 30B Aluminum alloy, AIS1 S-132 Cast iron or cast aluminum
Forged Steel Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 20A
Asbestos
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-3
Valves Intercooler piping
2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES
A. INTAKE SCREENS:
Type 3 16 stainIess steel Copper
Intake screens shall be three 27-inch diameter as shown on construction drawings. The intake screen shall be manufactured of 316 SST material. The main outlet flange shall mate with a 18-inch flange with a flange pattern equal to AWWA C-207, table 1, Class D.
The intake assembly screen surface wire shall be Johnson Vee-Wire #63 or approved equal. The surface wire, support beam and stiffener structure shall be an all welded matrix designed to provide the specified strength with minimal interference with the through screen flow pattern. End plates and tee body shall be a minimum 0.15-inch thick. All structural butt welds shall be full penetration; structural fillet weld size shall be the thickness of the thinner component. The average through slot velocity shall be 90% or more of the maximum velocity. At this flow rate the pressure drop through the clean screen surface shall not exceed 0.140 psi. Pressure drop through the entire intake assembly shall be in the range of 1.1 1 lpsi of water at the rated flow.
B. BACKWASH ASSEMBLY:
The backwash assembly shall clean the screen at a regular automatic interval using water displaced by compressed air. The components that make up a complete system are receiver tank, compressor, air dryer and automatic valves. Each component is specified as under:
1. COMPRESSOR:
a. GENERAL: The compressor shall be horizontal two-stage type, with deep-ribbed construction for efficient heat dissipation. Valves shall be readily accessible. Connecting rods shall be of forged steel with babbit-lined crankpin bearings. The crankshaft shall be a balanced, single steel forging. Crankshaft bearings shall be Class L-10, (50,000 hr) designed for the radial and thrust loads imposed by the operating conditions specified. Lubrication shall be splash or pressure type. The interstage cooler shall be finned and of copper multitube construction. The interstage cooler shall have a pressure relief valve and an automatic condensate drain valve: Compressors shall automatically unload during shutdown. An ASME relief valve, set at 110 percent of the compressor's rated discharge pressure and sized for not less than the unit's maximum capacity, shall be provided on the compressor discharge. The crankcase shall be provided with a low oil level switch. The discharge of the compressor shall be provided with an adjustable high temperature discharge switch. The oil level and discharge temperature switches shall be SPDT rated 5 amps at 120 volts for use with the circuit shown on the electrical drawings. Vibration isolation shall be provided as specified in Section 11002. Inlet air shall be filtered with medium efficiency filter.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-4
b. DRIVE UNIT: The compressor shall be driven by a 1,750-rpm, 3-phase, 480-vo1t7 Type I1 energy-efficient motor in accordance with Section 1 1060.
c. BASE: The compressor and drive unit shall be mounted on a common base rigidly mounted on the receiver.
2. RECEIVER:
The horizontal receiver shall have a rated pressure of 200 psig and shall have a capacity of 400 gallons. Tank shall meet the requirements for SectionVIII, Division 1 or Division 2 of the ASME Boiler Code. The tank shall bear an ASME inspector's stamp, complete with design working pressure and date and place of manufacture. Pressure relief valves delivered under this specification shall bear the ASME stamp. The receiver shall be delivered with threaded or flanged bosses for inlet, outlet, relief valve and connection of control pressure sensors, pressure gage, and receiver drain.
3. SEPARATOR:
The moisture separator shall be of the centrifugal impingement type selected for airflows specified herein. Moisture separator shall be Wright-Austin, Adams, Basco, or equal. The trap size shall be as recommended by the separator manufacturer and shall be the automatic, float-actuated type.
4. INTAKE FILTER-SILENCER:
Each compressor shall be equipped with an inlet air filter and inlet silencer. The filter element shall be of the cleanable type. Each filter-silencer shall be provided with threaded or flanged connections and mounting brackets suitable for proper installation. Interior surfaces shall receive a rust-inhibitive coating and exterior surface shall be prime coated. Each filter-silencer shall be sized so that the back pressure produced will not adversely affect performance of the compressor to which it is connected. Minimum noise reduction by octave frequency band shall be as follows:
Octave band, Hz Attenuation. decibels
63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000
14 19 25 22 21 18 17 17
5. AIRDRYER:
Air dryers shall be Hankinson HIT 50 , Wilkerson or equal. The compressor for
each air dryer shall be driven by a 115-volt, single-phase, 60-hertz motor. Air
dryer shall be supplied with flexible plug and cord connection. Motors shall be 1-
114 horsepower, maximum, and shall comply with the requirements of
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-5
specification Section 1 1060. Air dryers shall be equipped with the following
accessories:
1. Refi-igerant flow control valves.
2. Refi-igerant compressor overload switch.
3. Refiigerant flter dryer.
4. High evaporator temperature light.
5. Air-cooled condenser.
6. Automatic drain solenoid valve.
6. BALL CHECK VALVE:
Non-clog ball check valves shall be Flygt HDL Type 2016, Golden Anderson
Figure 240, or approved equal, modified to meet specified requirements. Valve
body and cover shall be stainless steel. Flange drilling shall be according to ANSI
B16.1, Class 125. The valve ball shall be hollow steel with an exterior of nitrile
rubber. Valve shall be "fusion bonded" epoxy lined and Coated Minimum 12-
mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances.
The valves will be pneumatically operated. The pneumatic actuator shall be
mounted directly on the ball check valve and shall be included within the
packaged unit.
7. AIRBLOWLINE:
Air blow line for backwash shall be 3-inch diameter. The length of the air line
form the screen to the compressor is approximately 495-feet. Pipe material for
the exposed air blow line from the air compressor within the operations building
shall be 3 16 SST tubing. The buried air blow line shall be high-pressure brewery
discharge hose. Hose material shall be white chlorobutyl with multiple plies of
polyester yam reinforcement. The hose shall have protective abrasion resistance
outer covering. The temperature rating for the hose shall be -40' F to 225' F and
working pressure rating shall be 350 psi.
C. CONTROLS:
The system shall be provided with a local control panel. Provide a main disconnect switch with the handle accessible fiom outside the control panel door. The control panel shall have a NEMA4X nonmetallic enclosure. The control panel shall include the motor starter for the compressor. The control panel shall have a light for each alarm switch on the front of the panel door. The compressor shall be provided with a run time meter. Provide a HAND-OFF-AUTO switch with a spring return to "OFF" from the "HAND" position on the panel door.
Compressor shall be supplied with discharge air high temperature switch. Control devices shall conform to Section 11004 of these specifications and shall be housed in NEMA4 enclosures. Discharge air high temperature switch shall be manual reset type. Three pressure switches shall be supplied with the receiver. Provide a
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
11435-6
dry contact for a low pressure alarm for remote alarm indication. Pressure gage shall be provided.
The compressor shall monitor the high and low pressure switches. When the selector switch is in the "AUTO" position, the compressor shall run when the low- pressure switch is actuated. The compressor shall shut off when the high pressure switch is actuated. In the hand position, the compressor shall run until the high pressure switch is actuated. The compressor shall shut off when the high discharge temperature or the low oil switches are actuated.
The control system shall automatically start and stop the compressor to maintain pressure in the receiver between 150 and 175 psig. The control shall not load the compressor until it has reached full speed.
In addition , the control panel should indicate backwash cycle initiation, system pressure, automatic valve ON-OFF, valve open, fail , close.
2.04 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided:
1. Operation and maintenance information
2. Catalog cut sheets for control devices (pressure switch, temperature switch, level switch, pressure gage).
2.05 SPAREPARTS
The following standby components shall be furnished for the compressor:
1 - complete set of compressor bearings 1 - complete set of gaskets 1 - set of piston rings 1 - set of valve fingers, plates, and springs 2 - filterpads
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Equipment shall be provided and tested as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. In addition, equipment shall be installed and tested under the direction of installers who have been trained by the equipment manufacturer. These requirements, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of his overall responsibility for this portion of the work.
3.02 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING
Inspection, testing and certification shall be provided, and testing procedures and forms shall be submitted.
3.03 TRAINING
A minimum of 4 hours of training, scheduled at least 3 days in advance with the Owner, shall be provided by a qualified manufacturer's representative.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly 11435-7
3.04 PAINTING
Equipment shall be shop primed prior to shipment fiom the factory with a primer compatible with the field finish coating as specified in Section 09900.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Intake Screens and Air Backwash Assembly
1 1435-8
SECTION 11436
RECIPROCATING AIR COMPRESSOR
PART 1-GENERAL
1 .O 1 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section specifies a duplex reciprocating oil less air compressor and receiver suitable for reservoir mixing air supply. The general requirements applicable to all mechanical equi ment, as specified in Section 11000-1.01 A., are applicable to the equipment speci g ed in this section.
B. TYPE:
The compressor shall be of the duplex, air-cooled, belt-driven oil less reciprocating type, assembled in a self-contained unit consisting of the compressors, motors, V-belt drives, and regulators, all mounted on a common ASME Coded national Board air receiver. Suitable piping between compressor, control, and receiver shall be provided.
C. EQUIPMENT LIST:
Air Compressor
Equipment No.
AC-02
D. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
The air-cooled compressor and accessories shall be designed and selected for continuous duty operation and shall deliver air which at all times meets operating requirements listed in paragraph 1.01 E. of this section.
E. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND CHARACTERISTICS:
The compressor shall meet the following requirements:
Average Inlet pressure, psig 14.3
Maximum working pressure, psig 100
Maximum rated motor, horsepower 3
Discharge pressure, psig 50
Minimum capacity at rated discharge pressure, scfm 12.5
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
11436-1
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES: 0 This paragraph references the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference
ASME Heat Exchanger Code
B. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY:
The Contractor shall assign unit responsibility as specified in paragraph 11000- 1.02 C. to the air compressor manufacturer.
C. VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS:
The equipment shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 1 1021.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The compressor will ambient be installed indoors in a ventilated building at an elevation of 598.5 feet above sea level. Temperatures are expected to range between 60 and 100 degrees F, and the relative humidity will, at times, approach 100 percent.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be logged in accordance with details contained in section 01300 of this document. The following submittals shall be provided
1. Certificate of Unit Responsibility Assignment attesting that the Contractor has assigned unit responsibility in accordance with the requirements of this Section and paragraph 1 1000-1.02 C. No other submittal material will be reviewed until the certificate has been received and found 'to be in conformance with these requirements.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation.
Manufacturer's catalog data including weight of each component.
Predicted performance curves developed for the specific application, including speed, capacity, pressure, power and efficiency as applicable.
5.
6.
Motor data form 11060-A per Section 11060.
Control panel layout, front elevation and schematic wiring diagram.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPT-LE PRODUCTS
Air compressor shall be Gardner-Denver, Model H3MTOllO-8 or equal, modified as necessary to provide the specified features and to meet specified operating requirements.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
1 1436-2
2.02 MATERIALS
Materials of components shall be as follows:
Component Material
Piston rings Cylinders and counterweights Low pressure piston High pressure piston and heads Crankshaft Connecting rods Frame, intercooler, and manifolds Baseplates Gaskets Valves Intercooler piping Guide Rings
2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES
Steel Cast iron, ASTM, Class 30B Aluminum alloy, AIS1 S- 132 Cast iron or cast aluminum Forged Steel Forged Steel Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 20A Fabricated steel Asbestos Type 3 16 stainless steel Copper PTFE / GRAPHITE
A. COMPRESSOR:
1. GENERAL:
The compressor shall be either V-configuration or vertical two-stage type, with deep- ribbed construction for efficient heat dissipation. Valves shall be readily accessible. Connecting rods shall be of forged steel with babbit-lined crankpin bearings. The crankshaft shall be a balanced, single steel forging. Crankshaft bearings shall be Class M3, (50,OOOhr) designed for the radial and thrust loads imposed by the operating conditions specified. Lubrication shall be splash or pressure type. The interstage cooler shall be finned and of copper multitube construction. The interstage cooler shall have a pressure relief valve and an automatic condensate drain valve. Compressors shall automatically unload during shutdown. An ASME relief valve, set at 110 percent of the compressor's rated discharge pressure and sized for not less than the unit's maximum capacity, shall be provided on the compressor discharge. The discharge of the compressor shall be provided with an adjustable high temperature discharge switch. The discharge temperature switches shall be SPDT rated 5 amps at 120 volts for use with the circuit shown on the electrical drawings. Vibration isolation shall be provided as specified in Section 1 1021. Inlet air shall be filtered with medium efficiency filter.
2. DRIVEUNIT:
The compressor shall be driven by a 1,750-rpm7 3-phase7 480-volt, Type 2 energy- efficient motor in accordance with Section 1 1060.
3. BASE: The compressor and drive unit shall be mounted on a common base rigidly mounted on the receiver.
B. RECEIVER:
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
11436-3
The horizontal receiver shall have a rated pressure of 100 psig and shall have a
capacity of 80 gallons. Tank shall meet the requirements for SectionVIII,
Division 1 or Division 2 of the ASME Boiler Code. The tank shall bear an ASME
inspector's stamp, complete with design working pressure and date and place of
manufacture. Pressure relief valves delivered under this specification shall bear the
ASME stamp. The receiver shall be delivered with threaded or flanged bosses for
inlet, outlet, relief valve and connection of control pressure sensors, pressure gage,
and receiver drain.
C. SEPARATOR:
The moisture separator shall be of the centrifugal impingement type selected for air flows specified herein. Moisture separator shall be Wright-Austin, Adams, Basco, or equal. The trap size shall be as recommended by the separator manufacturer and shall be the automatic, floatiactuated type.
D. INTAKE FILTER-SILENCER:
Each compressor shall be equipped with an inlet air filter and inlet silencer. The filter element shall be of the cleanable type. Each filter-silencer shall be provided with threaded or flanged connections and mounting brackets suitable for proper installation. Interior surfaces shall receive a rust-inhibitive coating and exterior surface shall be prime coated. Each filter-silencer shall be sized so that the back pressure produced will not adversely affect performance of the compressor to which it is connected. Minimum noise reduction by octave frequency band shall be as follows:
Octave band, Hz Attenuation, decibels
63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000
14 19 25 22 21 18 17 17
E. CONTROLS:
Each compressor shall be provided with a local control panel. Provide a main disconnect switGh with the handle accessible from outside the control panel door. The control panel shall have a NEMA 4X nonmetallic enclosure. The control panel shall include the motor starter for the compressor. The control panel shall have a light for each alarm switch on the fkont of the panel door. The compressor shall be provided with a run time meter. Provide a HAND-OFF-AUTO switch with a spring return to "OFF" from the "HAND" position on the panel door.
Each compressor shall be supplied with discharge air high and temperature switch. Control devices shall be housed in NEMA4 enclosures. Discharge air high temperature switch shall be manual reset type. Three pressure switches shall be supplied with the receiver. Provide a dry contact for a low-low pressure alarm for remote alarm indication.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
1 1436-4
The compressor shall monitor the high and low pressure switches. When the selector switch is in the "AUTO" position, the compressor shall run when the low pressure switch is actuated. The compressor shall shut off when the high-pressure switch is actuated. In the hand position, the compressor shall run until the high pressure switch is actuated. The compressor shall shut off when the high discharge temperature or the low oil switches are actuated.
The control system shall automatically start and stop the compressor to maintain pressure in the receiver between 80 and 100 psig. The control shall not load the compressor until it has reached hll speed.
2.04 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided:
1. Operation and maintenance information.
2.
4. Performance Warranty
Catalog cut sheets for control devices (pressure switch, temperature switch, level switch, pressure gage).
2.05 STANDBY COMPONENTS
The following standby components shall be furnished for the compressor:
1 - complete set of compressor bearings 1 - complete set of gaskets 1 - set ofpiston rings 1 - set of valve fingers, plates, and springs 2 - filterpads
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Equipment shall be provided and tested within the tolerances recommended by the equipment manufacturer. In addition, equipment shall be installed and tested under the direction of installers who have been trained by the equipment manufacturer. These requirements, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of his overall responsibility for this portion of the work.
3.02 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING
Inspection, testing and certification shall be provided, and testing procedures and forms shall be submitted.
3.03 TRAINING
. A minimum of 4 hours of training, scheduled at least 3 days in advance with the Owner,
shall be provided by a qualified manufacturer's representative.
3.04 PAINTING
Equipment shall be shop primed prior to shipment from the factory with a primer compatible with the field finish coating as specified in Section 09900.
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
1 1436-5
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Improvements Air Compressor
1 1436-6
Section 13300
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Work of this Section
This Section presents the functional description for the operation and control of the algae
monitoring and control system (chlorination system) and the reservoir de-stratification
system (aeration system). This description aims to provide the CONTRACTOR with a
complete understanding as to how the proposed systems will operate, and a guide for the
provision of all instrumentation, controls, and programming required for the
implementation of these systems.
1.2 Related Sections
A. The Work of the following sections applies to the Work of this Section. Other
sections of the specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the
extent required for proper performance of the Work.
1. Section 1 1347 - Submersible Pump System
2. Section 16000 Electrical
1.3 Chlorination System
A. Overview- A Sodium Hypochlorite feed system is provided to aid in the
control of algae in the reservoir. The system is comprised of the following
items:
1. A recirculation system, which provides reservoir water for sampling and
chemical mixing;
2. Water quality analyzers to monitor and provide input to the algae control
system on reservoir water quality,
3. A Sodium Hypochlorite injection system, which provide the algaecide
agent.
4. An aeration system, which main purpose is to ensure reservoir de-
stratification (described in 1.4), will also aid for the mixing of the
chemical stream into the reservoir.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Functional Description 133 00- 1
B. Control System Operation
1. Recirculation system-
la) Description
Water is drawn from the reservoir by one of the two-submersible-
pump system mounted in a floating pontoon anchored near the middle
of the reservoir. The recycled water is pumped into a pipeline that
enters the Control Building and returns back to the reservoir where it
loops around the reservoir bottom. A series of nozzles mounted along
the pipe loop allows for an even distribution of the recycled water
stream with the injected chemicals into the reservoir.
1 b) Recirculation Pumps
i.
.. 11.
... 111.
Pump Selection- The local control panel shall have a two-
position manual selector to select the active (duty) pump and
inactive (stand-by) pump. Pump selection shall be reported to
the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).
Pump Controls- The recirculation pumps shall have
HancUOfVAuto (HOA) switches. The running status of the
pump and the position of HOA switches shall be reported to
the RTU. The “Hand” mode of operation shall bypass the RTU
and shall allow continued system operation in the event of
main control system failure or maintenance. The “Hand” mode
shall also bypass most pump protection features.
Pump Failure- In the event that high-temperature or moisture is
detected by the sensor devices built-in the pump motors a
“Pump Failure” alarm shall be displayed in the local control
panel and RTU. In the auto mode this event shall stop the
operating (duty) pump and call on operation the inactive
(stand-by) pump. The pump with a “Pump Failure” condition
will not rn in Auto mode until the “Pump Failure“ condition is
cleared, which shall only be achieved by manually
acknowledging the alann and turning the HOA switch to “Off’
and back to “Auto”. A “Pump failure” condition shall not stop
a pump operated in manual (“Hand”).
2. Water Quality Analyzers- An in line fluorometer and an in-line chlorine
residual analyzer shall be tapped in the recirculation line inside the
Control Building for water sampling and testing.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Functional Description 13300-2
i. Chlorine analyzer - A constant flow shall be diverted to the analyzer
as required by the instrument manufacturer to prevent fouling of the
cell electrodes. Analysis data shall be reported in regular
programmable intervals (initially set to 15 minutes) to the RTU for
monitoring and logging. Common alarm signal generated by the
instrument’ shall be reported to the control panel and RTU.
Sampling flow shall be drained to a floor sink mounted on a floor
drain.
.. 11. Fluorometer- A sample line shall tee off the recirculation line, run
through the fluorometer and return to the recirculation line. Ball
valves and check valves shall be installed as necessary in both the
sample and recirculation line that bypasses the fluorometer, to ensure
that the analyzer is fed with sufficient and continuous flow as
required by the instrument manufacturer. Analysis data shall be
reported in regular programmable intervals (initially set to 15
minutes) to the RTU for monitoring and logging. Common alarm
signal generated by the instrument shall be reported to the control
panel and RTU. An alarm will be reported whenever fluorometer
readings are above threshold levels.
3. Sodium hypochlorite system-
i. An electronic metering pump draws sodium hypochlorite fiom two
tanks and injects the solution in the recirculation line. The system is
provided with a back pressure sustaining valve on the pump outlet to
prevent flow by gravity through the vessels when the pump is off.
The pump has an HOA switch, and the status of the HOA switch and
the running status of the pump shall be displayed by the RTU
(control system). “Pump Failure” alarm shall also be displayed at the
RTU. In all modes of operation, the proportion of disinfectant drawn
from each tank shall be adjusted manually by throttling (or closing)
the isolation valve of each vessel. In the Auto mode of operation, the
ordoff status of the pump shall be governed by the RTU control
system.
ii. The control system shall operate to maintain the chlorine residual
above a programmable minimum level during algae blossoms.
When high algae biomass is detected - as determined by the
flurometer readings, and chlorine residuals are below the pre-
established threshold, chlorine shall be injected into the reservoir.
Both chlorine residual and algae biomass threshold levels shall be
available for modification by the operator. Initial set-points shall be
as follows:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Functional Description 13300-3
Algae biomass threshold = 1 Opg/L chlorophyll A
Chlorine Residual threshold = 2 mg/L;
With the initial values the control system shall operate as follows:
1 I If Chlorophyll A >=lOpg I And Cl2 <2 mg/l I And Cl2 >=2 mg/l
... 111. Interlocks -Chemical pump operation shall be interlocked with the
aeration system such that the aeration system shall be ON or turn ON
at the start of the chemical feed pump. If a fluorometer or chlorine
analyzer failure is reported to the RTU sodium hypochlorite injection
system shall shut off.
iv. The control system shall also accept and display a maximum run
time duration, varying between 0.0 and 48.0 hours. The actual run
time for each active duration shall also be displayed. In the Auto
mode, when the actual run time reaches the maximum run time
duration, an "Excessive Run Duration'' alarm will be displayed by
the control system, preventing further automatic operation of the
metering pump until manually reset as a function within the control
system.
1.4 Aeration System
Overview- An aeration system is provided to prevent the formation of reservoir
stratification and to assist with the mixing of the chlorine in the reservoir. A
rotary screw blower will feed air into a perforated pipe header that loops around
the bottom of the reservoir. The blower has an HOA switch, and the status of the
HOA switch and the running status of the blower shall be reported to and
displayed by the RTU. In the auto mode the system will operate for a pre-set
number of cycles per day. Both the time of day for starting the cycles and the
duration of the cycles shall be field adjustable by the operator. The control system
shall admit up to 10 time entries setting the time at which it shall start and a cycle
duration from 0 to 6 minutes. . When the cycle time is set to 0 the aeration system
shall only respond to the call fi-om the chlorination system. The call system
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Functional Description 13300-4
SECTION 15042
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
These specifications designate the requirements for field pressure and leakage testing of
all pressure piping. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials (including water),
tools, and equipment necessary to provide and complete field testing as specified. All
pipelines shall be tested for water tightness by subjecting each section to Hydrostatic
Pressure and Leakage Tests in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C
600 except as modified herein.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.01 TEST BULKHEADS
Design and fabricate test bulkheads per Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code. Materials shall comply with Part UCS of said code. Design pressure shall
be at least 2.0 times the specified test pressure for the section of pipe containing the
bulkhead. Limit stresses to 70% of yield strength of the bulkhead material at the
bulkhead design pressure. Include air-release and water drainage connections.
2.02 MANUAL AIR-RELEASE VALVES
Provide temporary manual air-release valves for pipeline test. Construct the pipe outlet
in the same manner as for a pemianent air valve and after use, seal with a blind flange,
pipe cap, or plug and coat equal to the adjacent pipe.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING AND DISINFECTION SEQUENCE
A. Perform required chlorination subsequent to hydrostatic testing, except when
pipeline being tested is connected to a potable waterline.
B. The test shall be conducted with valves open, and the open ends of pipes, valves,
and fittings suitably closed. Valves shall be operated and checked during to the test
period. No leakage shall be allowed when testing across any valves.
3.02 LENGTH OF TEST SECTION
The maxinium length ofpipe to be included in any one test shall be no more than 250 feet
or the distance between valves whichever is greater. The Contractor shall provide suitable
test bulkheads, blocking, and fittings to permit such sectionalizing.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
15042-1
.. 3.03
3.04
3 -05
3.06
3.07
INITIAL PIPELINE FILLING
Maximum rate of filling shall not cause water velocity in pipeline to exceed 1 fps. Filling
may be facilitated by removing automatic air valves and releasing air manually.
PRESSURE AND DURATION OF TEST
A. Pressure piping shall be tested at 200 psi.
B. When the system is pumped to the required test pressure, the pump shall be
disconnected and maintain the test pressure for a four hour duration.
C. Temporary or permanent thrust blocks shall be cast-in-place as required prior to
tests, and the Contractor shall provide all necessary braces, plugs, thrust blocks,
caps, flanges, and other materials to permit proper conduct of the pressure testing.
Concrete blocks shall be cast not less than 5 days before the test.
All concrete anchor blocks shall be allowed to cure a sufficient time to develop a
minimum strength of 2,000 psi before testing.
ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE
No leakage allowed.
REPETITION OF TEST
If the actual leakage exceeds the allowable, locate and correct the faulty work and repeat
the test. Restore the work and all damage resulting from the leak and its repair. All
visible leakage shall be eliminated.
BULKHEAD AND TEST FACILITY REMOVAL
After a satisfactory test, drain the water, remove test bulkheads and other test facilities,
and restore the pipe coatings.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
15042-2
Section 15063
POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section designates the requirements for the manufacture and installation
of polyethylene pressure pipe, to be furnished and installed by the
CONTRACTOR, at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Plans as herein specified.
B. Specifications for related work are as follows:
1. ASTMD2239
2. ASTMD2737
3. ASTMD3261
4. SSPWC 207-19
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall fbrnish submittals in accordance with Section
0 1300, Submittals. Submittals are required for the following:
B. Submit Shop Drawings, materials lists, manufacturer’s literature and catalog
cuts and other information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Polyethylene pressure pipe, 3-inch and smaller, shall be manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D2239 and ASTM D3261, SSPWC 207-19, shall be
DR17, and shall be of the sizes and pressure classes shown below. The pipe
shall have butt heat fusions welded joints in accordance with the ASTM
D326 1.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
15063-1
2.2
B. Polyethylene Schedule
Size of Pipe Minimum Working Minimum Test Pressure
Pressure
(inches) @si) (Psi) 1.25 50 100
FITTINGS
A. All fittings for polyethylene pressure pipe shall be manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D2683 AND ASTM D3261.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene pressure pipe shall be utilized for pumped lines from the
submersible pumps located in the reservoir to the puIl box indicated in the
Drawings. Length of polyethylene pipe installed shall be long enough to
accommodate for movement of the pump flotation system from the location
shown in the drawings to the shore, plus and additional ten (1 0) feet for other
movement and thermal expansion and contraction.
B. If polyethylene pipe supplied is in intermediate lengths, joints shall be butt
heat ksed per the requirements above and shall be tested per the requirements
above and manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Floatable buoys shall be placed around the outside diameter of the
polyethylene pipe every four (4) feet to ensure that the pipe, to which the
electrical and control cables will be attached, will float on top of the reservoir
at all times. Floatable buoys shall be adequately sized to maintain the
pipelines and cable bundle buoyancy.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
15063-2
SECTION 15064 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS
0 PART 1 -- GENERAL
1 .O 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes providing solvent-welded, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping as
indicated, including fittings and accessories as required for a complete and operable piping
system, up to and including 4-inch diameter pipe.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The WORK of the following Sections applies to the WORK of this Section. Other Sections
of the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this WORK.
1. Section 02200 Earthwork
2. Section 09900 Coating Systems
1.03 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the WORK of
this Section:
1. ASTMD 1599 Test Method for Short-Time Hydraulic Failure Pressure of
Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
2. ASTMD 1785 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40,80, and 120.
3. ASTMD2467 Specification for Socket-Type Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings showing dimensions and details of pipe joints, fittings, fitting specials,
valves and appurtenances.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings
15064- 1
1.05
A.
B.
1.06
A.
B.
2. Detailed layout, spool or fabrication drawings showing pipe spools, spacers, adaptors,
connectors, fittings and pipe supports not indicated in the Contract Documents.
3. Manufacturer's product data.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. Manufacturer's certification of compliance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Product Testing: PVC pipe shall be tested at the factory for compliance with the minimum
burst pressure requirements as specified in ASTM D 1785,-using the test method specified in
ASTM D 1599.
Filed Testing: Piping shall be pressure tested at the pressure indicated in the Piping Schedule
for not less than one hour without exceeding the leakage tolerances in the Piping Schedule.
Where pressures are not indicated the piping shall be subjected ta.2 times the maximum
working pressure.
1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or
other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories
connected to the line which would be damaged by the test pressure shall be
disconnected. Ends of branch lines disconnect points shall be plugged or capped as
appropriate during the test procedure.
2. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the piping shall be re-
tested until no leaks are found.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery of Materials: Piping materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages,
containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer.
Storage: Piping materials shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and
in an area that is protected from sunlight and other harmful elements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. PVC pipe carrying recycled water shall be purple in color with black letters, Tnemec
R-0581 Series 66 High Build Epoxline or approved equal. The stenciling shall
appear on both sides of the pipe with the marking "RECYCLED WATER" in 98-
inch letters repeated every 12 inches. Witness poles for recycled water lines, valves
and appurtenances shall be purple. Recycled water facilities, both above and below
PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
15064-2
grade, shall be housed in an approved lockable container colored purple. A sign
reading "CAUTION: RECYCLED WATER" shall be installed. The plastic warning
tape shall be an inert plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged underground
use and shall be prepared with black printing on a purple field having the words,
"CAUTION: RECYCLED WATER-LINE." Warning. The minimum thickness shall
be 4 mils and the overall width of the tape shall be 12 inches (for 8-inch pipe) and 6
inches (for 6-inch and smaller pipe). Witness maskers shall be installed over pipe in
unpaved areas, open space areas, at appurtenances, including but not limited to
valves, air releasehacuum breaks, dead ends, inflection points, tees, and at intervals
not greater than 200 feet. Witness markers shall be embedded into the soil at least
18-inches and shall be equipped with a barb or other such device to secure it in the
surrounding soil.
The following are the approved manufacturers for tapes
a. Griffolyn Company, Inc.
10020 Mykawa Road
P.O. Box 33248
Houston, TX 77033
Phone: (713) 943-0070 or (800) 231-6074
b. Ten-a Tape, Division of Reef
P. 0. Box 33310
Houston, TX 77233
Phone: (800) 231-2417
c. T. Christy Enterprises, Inc.
655 E. Ball Road
Anaheim, CA 92805
Phone: (714) 507-3300
B. Pipe and fittings for welded joints shall comply with the requirements of Subsections 212-
2.1.3 of SSPWC, and as indicated herein.
C. The approved pipe manufacturers are
1. J-M Manufacturing
2. Vinyltech
3. P W Pipe
4. Certainteed
2.2 PIPE
0 A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall conform to ASTM D 1785 - Schedule 80, suitable for
solvent weld joints.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings
15064-3
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be socket fittings conforming to ASTM D 2467 - Schedule 80.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General: PVC pipe shall be installed in accordance with Subsection 308-5.2.3 of SSPWC
and the manufacturer's instructions, using solvent weld joints.
B. For exposed piping, pipe supports shall be provided in compliance with the Contract
Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe.
C. For buried piping, trenching configuration pipe zone material, backfill and compaction shall
be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with
Section 02200. ** END OF SECTION **
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings
15064-4
SECTION 15067
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART I--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section specifies stainless steel pipe and fittings.
B. TYPES OF SERVICE:
Stainless steel piping specified in this section shall be used for inlevoutlet pipe
applications as shown on construction drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this
section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference
ANSI B 16.1-89 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes
25,125,250, and 800
ANSI B16.11.80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding arid
Threaded.
ANSI B31.1-89
ANSI B36.19M-85
Power Piping
Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME Section E (1 989) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and
Brazing Qualifications
a
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-1
Reference
ASTM A1 82/A182M-90
ASTM A1 93/A193M-90
ASTM A194/A194M-88
ASTM A240-90
ASTM A276-90
ASTM A3 12/A3 12M-89
ASTM A320/A320M-88
ASTM A403/A403M-90
ASTM A409/A409M-89
ASTM A4 8 O/A4 8 OM-9 0
ASTM A774/A774M-90
ASTM A778-90
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
- Title
Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-
Temperature Service
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure and High-Temperature Service
Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipes
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature
Service
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for
Corrosive or High Temperature Service
General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and
Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel
Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and
Moderate Temperatures
Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubular Products
Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-2
B. QUALIFICATIONS:
All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single
manufacturer who is experienced and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication of the
items to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be shop-fabricated and field-installed in
accordance with common industry wide practices and methods and shall comply with
these specifications.
Only weld procedures which have been qualified under ASME Section M and only
welders who have successhlly completed performance qualification tests per ASME
Section M on these qualified procedures shall be utilized.
C. TESTING:
Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A3 12, ASTM A409 HT-0, or
ASTM A778, depending on the size and type of stainless steel pipe provided in
accordance with conditions and directions in Section 01300 of this document.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The following information shall be provided:
1. Shop fabrication drawings showing details of materials, piping, fittings,
couplings, dielectric connections, joint locations and details, types and locations
of supports.
2. Other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping system to
these specifications.
3. A copy of this specification section with addenda updates, and all referenced
sections with addenda updates, with each paragraph check marked to show
specification compliance or marked to show deviations.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel piping 3 inches and larger shall be manufactured
fiom ASTM A240 annealed and pickled sheets and plates, Type 316, in accordance with
ASTM A778 or ASTM A409 HT-0. Only extra-low carbon (ELC) materials with .03 percent
maximum carbon shall be used. Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in
ANSI B36.19, Table 2:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-3
Nominal pipe Schedule
size, inches gage/plate
6 1
18 10
2.02 FITTINGS
Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel fittings, 3-inch and larger, shall be butt-welded
type manufactured in accordance with ASTM A774 of the same material and in the same
thickness as the pipe. Long radius elbows up to 24 inches in diameter shall be smooth flow.
All short radius, special radius, and reducing elbows and long radius elbows greater than 24
inches in diameter shall be of mitered construction. Reducers shall be straight tapered, cone
type. Tees, crosses, laterals, and wyes shall be shop-fabricated ftom pipe.
2.03 JOINTS
Stainless steel pipe fabricated into spool pieces shall have shop-welded circumferential butt-
weld joints or flanges. Unless otherwise specified, flanged joints shall be Van Stone joints
made up of stainless steel slipon type rolled-angle face rings and ductile iron back-up flanges
drilled to ANSI 16.1, Class 125 standard. The angle face ring thickness shall be at a
minimum of 2 gages thicker than the wall of the pipe or fitting to which it is welded, and it
shall be continuously welded on both sides to the pipe or fitting. The angle leg shall not
interfere with the flange boltholes. For submerged joints, back-up flanges shall be stainless
steel plate flanges.
2.04 COUPLINGS
A. GENERAL:
Fabricated stainless steel piping shall be shop-prepared for pipe couplings where
specified. Unless otherwise specified, couplings shall be arched-band or grooved type.
B. SLEEVETYPE:
Unless otherwise specified, sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be Rockwell
Type 41 1, Dresser Style 38, or equal, with the stop removed fiom the middle ring.
Reducing couplings shall be Rockwell Type 4 15, Dresser Style 62, or equal. Sleeve-type
flanged coupling adapters shall be Rochell Type 913, Dresser Style 128, or equal.
Insulating couplings shall be Rockwell Type 416, Dresser Style 39, or equal.
Bolts and nuts for submerged service shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel in
conformance with ASTM F593F and ASTM F594F. Bolts and nuts for buried service
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-4
shall be made of non-corrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the characferistics
specified in ANSVAWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating.
Pipe shall be plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth to ensure proper gasket
seating. For pressure pipelines, sleeve coupling joints shall be restrained by the use of
harness rods connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where
no adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness lugs shall be welded to the pipe to
receive the harness rods.
C. ARCHED-BAND TYPE:
Arched-band type couplings shall be stainless steel of the same material and wall
thickness as the pipe and shall be Depend-0-Lok type as manufactured by Brico or
equal. Couplings shall be Fixed-F x F, Expansion-E x E, or Fixed by Expansion-F
x E as specified or as required. The pipe shall be plain-end with external weld beads
ground smooth and with S.S. restraining rings shop-welded to the piping for fixed type
couplings.
D. GROOVED-END TYPE:
Grooved end flexible-type couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 100, Victaulic Style 77, or
equal. Grooved end rigid-type couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 120 Rigi-Grip, Victaulic
Style 07 Zero-Flex, or equal. Flexible-type couplings shall be used for all piping greater
than 12 inches in diameter; for pipe 12 inches in diameter and less in rack-mounted tunnel
piping applications; and for grooved joints adjacent to pump or blower suction and
discharge where grooved couplings are used for noise and vibration control. All other
applications for piping 12 inches in diameter and less shall utilize rigid-type couplings.
Grooved end flanged coupling adapters shall be either Gustin-Bacon 154, Victaulic Style
741, or equal. Snap-joint grooved end couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 115, Victaulic
Style 78, or equal. Cut grooves are not permitted on fabricated or lightwall pipe.
Unless otherwise specified, bolts and nuts shall comply with AWWA C606. Bolts and
nuts for submerged service shall be Type 3 16 stainless steel in confomance with ASTM
F593F and ASTM F594F. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be made of
noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the characteristics specified in
ANSYAWWA C11 UA21, regardless of any other protective coating.
Submerged couplings shall be the same material as the pipe. The pipe ends shall be roll-
grooved to the coupling manufacturer's specifications. Where roll grooving is
impractical, the pipe shall have heavy-wall machine-grooved pipe nipples or machined
ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. Nipples shall be taper-bored to the I.D. of
0 Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-5
the adjoining pipe to allow full-weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both sides
to the piping. Nipples and collars shall be of the same alloy as the piping.
E. EXPANSION TYPE:
Spool type expansion joints shall be of the resilient arch type and shall be standard or
tapered as specified.
Spool type expansion joints shall be constructed of multiple plies of woven fabric
impregnated with elastomer and reinforced with steel rings or wire embedded in the
body. Standard arch type expansion joints suitable for the specified temperature and
pressure shall be provided with retaining rings or backup rings. Retaining rings shall
be 3/8-inch thick steel, split, either galvanized or zinc shield coated. Expansion joints
shall be Mason Style EJBN, Garlock Style 204, Mercer Style 500, Goodall Style E-
1462, General Style 1025, or equal. High pressure couplings suitable for 240 degree F
operating temperatures shall be Mason Style EJBN-HD, Mercer Style 5 10, Garlock
Style 204-HP, Goodall Style E-1489, General Style 1015, or equal. Pipe flanges shall
be provided for these couplings.
2.05 THREADED CONNECTIONS
Threaded pipe, gage, or instrument connections shall be made using stainless steel, 150-
pound, threaded half-couplings conforming to ASTM A1 82 or ASTM A276, shop welded to
the pipe at the locations specified.
2.06 GASKETS
Gaskets designated in Section 15050 shall be as follows:
1. EPDM: ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer.
2. Neoprene: neoprene.
3. Nitrile: nitrile (Buna N).
4. Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder;
ASTM F104 (F712400), 2500 psi (ASTM F152), 0.2 MUHR LEAKAGE FUEL
A (ASTM F37).
5. Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and SBR binder;
ASTM F104 (F712400), 2500 PSI (ASTM F152), 0.1 mlh leakage -Fuel A
(ASTM F37).
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-6
2.07
2.09
2.10
6. Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style 3500,2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.22 ml/hr Fuel A
(ASTM F37).
7. Gylon gasketing, GarIock Style 3510,2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.04 mVhr Fuel A
(ASTM F37).
Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style 3504,2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.12 rnvhr Fuel A
(ASTM F37).
8.
9. TFE: noncreeping tetrafluoi-*ethylene (TFE) with insert filler.
10. TFE bonded EPDM: TFE bonded to EPDM in hll-face gasket having
concentric-convex molded rings.
For air lines, gaskets shall be neoprene or EPDM suitable for use at temperatures to
240 degrees F.
BOLTS
Bolts, nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies and stainless steel couplings
shall be the same material, conforming to ASTM A320 for low-temperature service and
ASTM A193 and ASTM A194 for high-temperature service. Bolts, nuts and washers for
other couplings shall be as specified in referenced paragraphs for the couplings.
PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Unless otherwise specified, all hangers, rods, structural attachments, and other components of
support systems for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as the pipe and conform
to Section 15096.
FINISH
After all shop operations have been completed, pipe and fittings shall be pickled and
passivated in manufacturer's plant, and scrubbed and washed until discoloration and possible
iron picked up fiom manufacturing process are removed. The standard finish for 16-gage
through 8-gage material shall be No. 1 or 2B per ASTM A480; 3/16-inch and heavier plate
material shall be No. 1 mill finish or better per ASTM A480.
PRODUCT DATA
The following information and data shall be provided.
1. Certifications specified in the following documents:
ASTM A403, paragraph 14.1
ASTM A774, paragraph 14.1 a Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-7
ASTM A778, paragraph 14.1
ASTM A409, paragraph 17.1 0
2. Test results specified in paragraph 15067-1.02 C.
3. Names and qualification records of proposed welders.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING, AND JOINTING
Pipe cutting, threading, and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. All
pipe threads shall be lubricated with Teflon tape.
3.02 WELDING
A. GENERAL:
Piping with wall thickness up to 1 1-gage (0.120-inch) shall be welded with the TIG
(GTAW) process. Unless otherwise specified, heavier walls shall be properly beveled and
have a root pass with the TIG (GTAW) process followed by subsequent passes with the
TIG (GTAW), MIG (GMAW), or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process. Filler wire of ELC
grades only shall be added to all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or
greater than the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed and
have a crown of no more than 1/16-inch on the LD. and 3/32-inch on the O.D. of the
piping. Concavity, undercut, cracks, or crevices shall not be allowed. Butt welds shall
have full penetration to the interior surface, and inert gas shielding shall be provided to the
interior aild exterior of the joint. Excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter, and projections
shall be removed by grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall be ground smooth.
B. FIELD WELDING:
Field welding shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible by use of couplings and
prefabrication of pipe systems at the factory. Pipe butt welds may be performed at the job
site, providing the but welds are performed only with an inert gas shielded process and
that other applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered to.
All residue, oxide, and heat stain is to be removed from any type of field weld and the
affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless steel wire brushes, followed by cleaning
with an agent such as Eutectic Company's "Eucleen" or equal, followed by complete
removal of the agent.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings a
15067-8
C. PREPARATION OF SURFACES TO BE WELDED:
Surfaces of joints to be welded shall be fiee fiom mill scale, slag, grease, oil, paint, rust,
and other foreign material. Joints to be welded shall be wire-brushed with stainless steel
wire brushes and precisely fitted before welding.
D. WEATHER CONDITIONS:
Welding shall be done only when the surfaces are completely free of any moisture.
Welding of the pipe shall not be done during periods of high winds or rain unless the
areas being welded are properly shielded.
E. TACK WELDS, CLIPS, AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS:
Nicks, gouges, notches, and depressions in the base metal in the area of the joint shall be
repaired before the joint weld is made. Tack welds, clips, and other attachments shall be
removed and defects repaired, except where the tack welds occur within the weld area and
these tack welds do not exceed the size of the completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall
be removed. Areas to be repaired shall be ground to clean metal and then repaired by
building up with weld metal. The repaired areas shall be ground smooth to form a plane
surface with the base metal.
.
F, DEFECTS AND REPAIRS:
Welds with cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, undercutting, incomplete penetration, or
which are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to any provisions of these
specifications shall be removed by chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean
base metal. Calking or peening of welds to correct defects shall not be done. Welds
found deficient in dimension but not in quality shall be enlarged by additional welding
after thoroughly cleaning the surface of previously deposited metal and the adjoining
plate. Weld deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into the interior of the pipe shall
be removed by grinding.
3.03 MAFXING, SHIPPING, AND STORAGE
All pipe, fittings, and fabrications shall be properly marked with type, gage, and heat number.
All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage andor
transport after fabrication. All fabricated piping shall be piece-marked with identifying
numbers or codes which correspond to the contractor's layout and installation drawings. The
marks will be located on the spools at opposite ends and 180 degrees apart. Pipe spools shall
0 Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-9
be loaded and blocked and lagged as necessary to ensure protection fiom damage during
shipping. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation.
Dents, gouges, and scratches in stainless steel pipe and fittings are not acceptable and are
reason for rejecting pipe and fittings.
3.04 FABFUCATION/INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The piping supplier during manufacturing, fabricating and handling stages, and the contractor
during handling and instaIlation stages, shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any
ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall
be used for stainless steel piping only. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be nonfmous
or stainless steel or rubber-lined. Nylon slings or straps shall be used for handling stainless
steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the
piping walls. After installation, the contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from
the piping surface. All welded joints shall be treated with a pickling solution, brushed with
stainless steel wire brushes and rinsed clean. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the
contractor shall pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS or equal, scrub with
stainless steel brushes, and rinse clean. ,
3.05 COATINGS
After installation, the contractor shall paint all steel or iron flanges, couplings, and
appurtenances in accordance with Section 09900. Painting of the stainless steel pipe is not
required. However, the contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing the
stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface. Identifjmg spool piece marks shall be
removed with paint thinner or solvents and the entire stainless steel surface shall be washed
with detergent and hot water and rinsed clean. '
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Stainless Steel Pipes and fittings
15067-10
SECTION 15096
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART l--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
This section specifies hangers and supports for all piping systems. This section does not
include pipe supports for fue sprinkler systems, pipe anchors, guides or seismic restraints.
B. OPERATING CONDITIONS:
The hangers and supports specified in this section are provided to resist pipe loads
occurring primarily in the downward (gravity) direction. For the purpose of pipe hanger
and support selection, this section establishes pipe support classifications based on the
operating temperatures of the piping contents. Pipe support classifications are as follows:
1. Hot Systems
A - 1. 120 degrees F to 450 degrees F
A - 2. 451 degrees F to 750 degrees F
A - 3. Over 750 degrees F
2. Ambient Systems
B. 60 degrees F to 119 degrees F
3. Cold Systems
C - 1. 33 degrees F to 59 degrees F
C - 2. -20 degrees F to 32 degrees F
C. HANGER AND SUPPORT SELECTION:
The Contractor shall select pipe hangers and supports as specified in the project manual.
Selections shall be based upon the pipe support classifications specified in this section,
and any special requirements, which may be specified in the project manual.
The Contractor shall review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and
adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the type of support to be used at each
hanger point.
Malu Reservoir Remedial Improvements Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096- 1
0 Hangers and supports shall withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of
loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. As a minimum,
consideration shall be given to the following conditions:
1. Weights of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger
components, and normal fluid contents.
2. Weight of hydrostatic test' fluid or cleaning fluid if normal operating fluid
contents are lighter.
3. Reaction forces due to the operation of safety or relief valves.
4. Wind, snow or ice loadings on outdoor piping.
Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where
specified, the outside diameter of insulation.
Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers shall be used for
~&mqwhereverpra&cakForpipirrgsappurted hm befow, bases,%rackets or
structural cross members shall be used.
Hangers for the suspension of size 2 1/2 inches and larger pipe and tubing shall be capable
of vertical hanger component adjustment under load.
The supportingsystemsshall provide for and control the fiee or intended movement of the
piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment.
Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger
components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod
shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees.
There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar
metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use
of copper-plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support
components. ____ - __~
Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new
piping. Unless otherwise specified, pipe support components shall not be attached to pressure vessels. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical.
1.02 REFERENCES
This section contains references to the following docuhents. They are a part of this section
as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and
those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Pipe Hangers and Supports Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
15096-2
Reference
AISC Manual of Steel
Construction
American Institute of Steel
9th Edition
Construction, Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design -
MSS SP-58-88
MSS SP-69-83
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
FEDSPEC
WW-H- 17 1 e-78
Hangers and Supports, Pipe
MFMA- 1-84 Metal Framing Standards Publication
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01 300:
1. Shop drawings showing dimensions and details of pipe hangers and supports
2. Manufacturer’s product data.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Manufacturer’s certification of compliance
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
Standard pipe supports and components shall be manufactured by B-Line, Carpenter &
Patterson, =-Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Pipe Shields Incorporated, Superstrut, Unistrut, or
equal. Pipe support components shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-69 and
FEDSPEC WW-H- 17 1 e. Pipe support materials shall conform to the requirements of MSS
SP-58. Metal framing system components shall conform to the metal framing manufacturers’
Association Standard MFMA-I .
2.02 MATERLALS
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements 0 Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-3
A. GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified, pipe hangers and supports, structural attachments, fittings
and accessories shall be hot-dip or mechanically galvanized aRer fabrication. Nuts,
bolts and washers may be zinc-plated except for those subject to moisture or corrosive
atmosphere shall be type 304 stainless steel.
B. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
1. TYPE 1 - DOUBLE BOLT PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamp shall be carbon steel, with
configuration and components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 3.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3144, hell Fig. 295, or equal,
with insulation shield. Insulation shield is optional for hot and ambient
systems.
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell Fig. 295, or
equal.
c. Copper pipe (insulated only) - shall be B-Line B3 144, Grinnell Fig. 295, or
equal, with insulation shield.
2. TYPE 2 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamps shall be steel with
galvanized finish and material thickness as listed below:
a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - Pipe size 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch shall be 16 gage;
3/4 inch through 1 1/4 inches shall be 14 gage; 1 1/2 inches through
3 inches shall be 12 gage; 3 1/2 inches through 5 inches shall be 11 gage;
6 and 8 inches shall be 10 gage; Michigan model 431 , Powerstrut PS 1100,
Unistrut P 1 109 series, or equal.
b. Steel pipe (insulated) - Pipe clamp shall be as described in paragraph
15096-2.02 B.6.a with insulation shield.
3. TYPE 3 - U-BOLT: U-bolts shall be carbon steel with configuration equivalent to
MSS and FEDSPEC Type 24.
a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3.188, or
equal.
b. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be hell Fig. 137, B-Line B3 188, or equal,
with insulation shield.
Plastic pipe - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137C, Michigan model 151, B-Line c.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-4
B3 188 Cy or equal.
4. TYPE 4- PIPE STANCHION SADDLE: Saddles and yokes shall be carbon steel
and coniply with MSS Type 37 and FEDSPEC Type 38.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line
B3090, or equal, with insulation shield.
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line
B3090, or equal.
C. Plastic pipe - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line 33090, or
equal.
5. TYPE 5 - OFFSET PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamp shall be carbon steel with
configuration and components as specified and shall be of standard design
manufactured by a pipe hanger component manufacturer.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or equal,
with insulation shield.
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or
equal.
c. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3 148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or equal.
Vertical pipe support applications shall be as specified above except that
insulation shields shall not be used for insulated pipe.
6. TYPE 6- RISER CLAMP: Riser clamp shall be carbon steel with configuration and
components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 8.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261, or equal.
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261, or
equal.
c. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261c, or equal.
7. TYPE 7 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE STRAP: Pipe strap shall be carbon steel,
with configuration equivalent to MSS Type 26.
a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS
3 126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-5
b. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS
3 126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation shield.
Plastic pipe - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS 3126, Kin-
Line No. 477, or equal.
c.
C. RACK AND TRAPEZE SUPPORTS:
1. GENEW Unless otherwise specified, trapeze and pipe rack components shall
have a minimum steel thickness of 12 gage, with a maximum deflection 1/240 of
the span.
2. TYPE 20 - TRAPEZE PIPE SUPPORT: Trapeze pipe support cross members
shall be fiaming channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Flat plate
fittings shall be 1 5/8-inch square carbon steel of standard design manufactured
by fhning channel manufacturer, Unistrut P2471 , B-Line B202-2, or equal.
3. TYPE 21 - PIPE RACK SUPPORT: Post and cross members shall be framing
channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Pipe rack fittings shall be
carbon steel, of standard design manufactured by fiarning channel manufacturer.
90-degree fittings shall be gusseted Unistrut P2484, B-Line B844, or equal. Post
base fittings shall be as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 D.5.
D. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS:
1. TYPE A - FRAMING CHANNEL POST BASE: Post bases shall be carbon
steel, of standard design manufactured by fiaming channel manufacturer. Single
channel: Unistrut P2072A, B-Line B280, or equal. Double channel: Unistrut
P2073A, B-Line B28 1 , or equal.
2. TYPE B - WELDED STEEL BRACKET: Bracket shall be carbon steel and
comply with MSS Type 32 and FEDSPEC Type 33 for medium welded bracket.
Heavy welded bracket shall comply with MSS Type 33 and FEDSPEC Type 34.
3. TYPE C - DOUBLE CHANNEL BRACKET: Wall channel shall be single
channel framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Cantilever
bracket shall be a carbon steel double framing channel assembly, Unistrut P2542
through P2546, B-Line B297-12 through B297-36, or equal.
4. TYPE D - SINGLE CHANNEL BRACKET: Wall channel shall be single channel
fiaming channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Cantilever bracket
shall be a carbon steel single fiaming channel assembly, Unistrut P2231 through
P2234, B-Line B198-6, B198-12, B196-18 and B196-24, or equal.
5. TYPE E - WALL MOUNTED CHANNEL Wall channel shall be single channel
Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-6
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
hming channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5.
6. TYPE F - PIPE STANCHION FLOOR ATTACHMENT: Baseplate shall be
carbon steel with 1/2 inch minimum thickness. Anchor bolt holes shall be 1/16
inch larger than the anchor bolt diameter. The space between the baseplate and
the floor shall be filled with nonshrink grout.
E. ACCESSORIES:
1. FRAMING CHANNEL: Framing channel shall be 1 518 inches square, roll formed,
12-gage carbon steel. Channel shall have a continuous slot along one side with in-
turned clamping ridges. Single channel: Unistrut P1000, B-Line B22, or equal.
Double channel: Unistrut P1001, B-Line B22A, or equal. Triple channel: Unistrut
P1004A, B-Line B22X, or equal.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads
such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum
span lengths specified in the project manual to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected
by concentrated loads.
At least one hanger or support shall be located within 2 feet fiom a pipe change in direction.
The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment,
tanks, etc., are substantially free fiom loads transmitted by the piping.
Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, piping assembly, etc., that will require
removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary
supports shall not be necessary for this procedure.
Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging ofthe pipe between supports
caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Hanger components shall not be used for purposes other than for which they were designed.
They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes.
The Contractor shall install items to be embedded before concrete is poured.
embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is poured.
Fasten
0 Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-7
Embedded anchor bolts shall be used instead of concrete inserts for support installations in
areas below water surface or normally subject to submergmg.
Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp
edges.
0
Finished floor beneath Type N structural attachments and hing channel post bases shall be
roughed prior to grouting. Grout between base plate and floor shall be free of voids and
foreign material.
Base plates shall be cut and drilled to specified dimensions prior to welding stanchions or
other attachments and prior to setting anchor bolts.
Plastic or rubber end caps shall be provided at the exposed ends of all framing channels that
are located up to 7 feet above the floor.
3.03 ADJUSTMENTS
The Contractor shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation.
Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions
shall be adjusted prior to grouting their base plates.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements a Pipe Hangers and Supports
15096-8
SECTION 15 100
VALVES AND ACTUATORS
PART 1-GENERAL
I .O 1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies valves and actuators required under this contract document.
1.02 REFERENCES
This section contains reference to the following documents. They are part of this section
as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and those on the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference (Latest Edition) Title
ANSI B16.1
ASTM A276
ASTM B61
ASTM B62
ASTM B98
ASTM B127
ASTM B164
ASTM B 194
ASTM B584
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars
and Shapes.
Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
Standard Speoification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Shapes.
Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400)
-Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Wire.
Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate, Sheet,
Strip, and Rolled Bar.
Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applicati ons.
Reference (Latest Edition) Titie
ASTM D429 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates.
ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Viny1 Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
Required Pressure Backflow-Prevention Assembly.
Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates.
Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
AWWA C504
AWWA C511
AWWA (2540
AWWA C550
AWWA C606
AWWA C800
a
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Valves and Actuators
15 100-1
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
SECTION 11295
SECTION 15 104 Butterfly Valves
Hydraulic Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of the latest version of SSPWC.
A. Shop Drawings
1.
2.
3. Operation and maintenance manual.
4.
Product data sheets for make and model.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identification of materials of construction.
Provide 5-year product warranty for continuous submerged operation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Actuator to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a
lower quality than specified.
B. Size actuator to operate valve for the full range of pressures and velocities.
C. Factory mount actuator and accessories.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Brass and bronze valve components and accessories that have surfaces in contact
with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent
aluminum.
B. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations
1. B6 1, B62, B98 (Alloy UNS No. C65 I 00, C65500, or C66 I 00), B 139
(Alloy UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B
164, B 194, and B 127.
Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze. 2. '
2.03 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Epoxy Lining and Coating
1.
2.
In accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise specified.
Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except
only heat-activated material if specified as "fusion" or "fusion bonded"
epoxy.
Minimum 12-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve
operating tolerances.
3.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Valves and Actuators
15100-2
2.04 ACTUATORS
Hydraulic and pneumatic actuators shall be supplied by single manufacturer to ensure
mounting plate and drive shaft compatibility.
A. Hydraulic Actuator
The hydraulic actuator shall be the primary actuator to control the butterfly valve
operation. Actuator shall be double acting for underwater operation. The actuator
shall be rated for an operating pressure of 1,500 pound-square-inch gage pressures
(PSIG). Torque developed shall be more than or equal to 12,000 inch-pound at
1,500 PSIG. Hydraulic piston displacement shall be 50 cubic-inch in both
directions. Hydraulic actuator shall be provided with “go” switches indicating
end of rotation. The switch shall be rated for continuous submerged conditions.
The actuator shall indicate externally the position of the valve disk.
Hydraulic actuators shall be Dantorque, Parker, Automax or approved equal. The
hydraulic actuator shall be mounted on the pneumatic actuator. Manufacturer shall
coordinate with butterfly valve manufacturer for mounting plate details prior to
shipping product at the project site. Hydraulic actuator shall be capable of
operating at a minimum submergence of 45-feet of recycled water with zero
leakage.
B. Pneumatic Actuator
Pneumatic actuators shall be double acting rack and pinion type suitable for
continuously submerged condition upto 45 feet submergence with recycled water
and corrosive environments. The actuator shall provide 500 cubic-inch of
clockwise displacement and 3 50 cubic-inch of counter clockwise displacement.
The actuator shall be capable of providing 12,000 inch-pound of torque. The
actuator shall be rated for 150 PSIG. Operating condition are from 20’ F up to
110’ F
The pneumatic actuator is a back-up control system and shall be mounted directly
on the butterfly valve. Pneumatic actuator manufacturer shall be Dantorque,
Parker, Automax or approved equal. Actuator manufacturer to coordinate with
valve and hydraulic actuator manufacturer for mounting plate details and drive
shaft compatibility prior to shipping product to project site. The actuator shall
indicate the position of the valve disk.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. FlangeEnds
1.
2.
Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe.
Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts progressively
and uniformly.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Valves and Actuators
15100-3
3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A.
B.
Actuator may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.
Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any
discrepancies with manufacturer’s data.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Valves and Actuators
15100-4
SECTION 15 104
BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. The WORK of this Section.includes providing butterfly valves and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The WORK of the following Section applies to the WORK of this Section. Other Sections
of the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this WORK.
1.
2. Section 15 100 Valves and Actuators
Section 1 1295 Hydraulic Pneumatic Power and Actuator Control System
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall comply with the requirements of Sections 15100 and 01300 in this
document.
1.4 FACTORY TESTING
A. Valves shall be tested in compliance with AWWA C 504 and Section 15100.
B. Proof-of-design tests reports shall be submitted in compliance with Section 15100 and
AWA (2504.
1.5 OWNER'S MANUAL
A. The OWNER'S Manual shall be submitted in compliance with Section 15 100.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES (AWWA)
A. General: Butterfly valves shall conform to ANSYAWWA C504 and shall be lug type,
flanged, of the size and class indicated on contract drawings. Flanged valves shall
have 150-lb flanges complying with ANSI B.16.5, or 250-lb where so indicated, and
may be either short-bodied or long-bodied except as otherwise indicated. Valve seat
shall be both self and pressure energized with an elastomeric core. The self-energizing
member shall be isolated form the line media. Valves shall be retained top and bottom
low fiiction bearings. Shaft shall be single or dual piece. Retainer rings must be
recessed in the body so that the line gasket prevents any potential external leakage.
Valves shall have internal stop to prevent disc over travel.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Butterfly Valves
15104-1
Seating and unseating torque for the valves at 150 PSIG pipe pressure shall not exceed
7000 inch-pound Valve body shaIl be rated for non-shock working pressure of 275
PSI with in the temperature range of 20 OF - 100°F
B. Material: Butterfly vales shall be 3 16 stainless steel. Valve Body sball be ASTM
A182 Gr. F3 16 or A351 Gr. CF8M. Disc shall be ASTM A182 Gr. F3 16 or A351
Gr. CF8M. Shafts shall be ASTM A564 type 630 H 1150 or 316 SS.
C. Actuator Mounting: Valve manufacturer shall supply actuator-mounting plate through
taps, compatible with actuator body mounting threaded taps. Valve shaft size and
geometry shall match actuator drive or adaptor shall be supplied. Contractor to ensure
valve manufacturer coordinates mounting details with actuator manufacturer.
D; Pneumatic and Hydraulic Operators: Operators shall comply with Section 15 100.
E. Valve actuator shall indicate the valve disk position
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Butterfly valves shall be manufactured by one of the following (or equal):
Crane Company
De Zurik Corporation
Henry Pratt Company
Grinnell
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Exposed butterfly valves shall be installed to permit removal of valve assembly without
dismantling the valve or operator.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with Section 15 100.
** END OF SECTION **
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Butterfly Valves
15104-2
..
SECTION. 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies drains, piping, appurtenances and general requirements for plumbing
systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following document. It is a part of this section
as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and those of the listed document, the requirements of the listed document shall prevail.
Reference - Title
UPC (1 988) Uniform Plumbing Code 0 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings showing dimensions and details of floor drains and type 11 cleanouts
2. Manufacturer’s product data.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Manufacturer’s certification of c omp 1 i anc e
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANOUTS
A. GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified, cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe connected.
Cleanouts shall be provided with clamping collars where waterproofing membranes are
located in the floor. Cleanouts located inside buildings shall be provided with bronze
covers. Bronze plug with tapered thread shall be provided for cleanouts on pressurized
systems. Cleanouts on chemical waste or drain lines shall be of the same material and
type of joint as the pipe.
B. TYPE LI CLEANOUT:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Plumbing
1 5400- 1
Unless otherwise specified, Type II cleanouts shall be Josam series 56010(12), J. R.
Smith series 4140, or equal.
2.02 DRAINS
A. FLOORDRAINS:
1. GENERAL:
waterproofmg membranes are located in the floor.
Floor drains shall be provided with clamping collars where
2. TYPE II, III, AND IV FLOOR DRAINS: Unless otherwise specified, Type lI, III,
and N floor drains shall be Josam series 32120, J. R. Smith series 2220, or
equal.
C. CONDENSATE DRAINS:
Unless otherwise specified, condensate drains shall be as specified for piping system 24
in Section 15050.
2.03 COUPLINGS, NIPPLES AND UNIONS
Couplings and nipples shall be of the same material as the pipe on which they are used.
Unions 2 inches and smaller shall be ground joint screwed pattern unions. Unions larger than
2 inches shall be flanged. Unions shall be packed with 1/16-inch thick rubber packing.
Dielectric unions shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.04.
2.04 HOSE BBBS
Hose bibbs shall be Acorn No. 8126, Chicago 387-LFY Josam Series 71700 , Zurn Series
138S013 90or equal.
2.05 SLEEVES
Sleeves shall be 22-gage sheet metal.
2.06 WALL MOUNTED HOSE RACKS
Wall mounted hose racks shall be installed at locations indicated. Racks shall be of all-
welded steel construction, minimum %” sheet steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and
shall have a capacity to hold 100 feet of 3/4 -inch or 1 - 112 inch hose. Where racks are located
in open locations, racks shall be supported from two 2’’ x2”~1/4’~ galvanized steel angle
posts, and shall be set in a concrete base.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Plumbing
15400-2
2.07 HOSES AND NOZZLES
A. The work includes the following quantities of the lengths indicated 2-50-foot sections of
1 ” diameter hose with nozzles.
B. Hose shall include male and female connectors and nozzle and shall be seamless,
extruded rubber with Dacron cotton exterior and shall be designed for a working pressure
of at least 200 psi.
C. Nozzles shall be capable of complete shut-off and shall produce a solid straight stream
and up to a 90 degree conical fog. Nozzle material shall be brass with polished finish, and
nodes shall include rubber bumper.
2.06 PRODUCT DATA
Brochures of plumbing equipment, including catalog data and installation information, shall
be provided
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 LNSTALLATION
A. GENERAL:
Work shall be in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code.
Plumbing shall be provided to avoid obstructions, allow 7.5 feet minimum headroom,
and keep openings and passageways clear.
No holes shall be made in structural members.
Tom and pierced waterproofing shall be repaired.
Fixtures, fittings, valves, and copper and brass items shall be wrapped with burlap or
building paper. Wrapping shall be removed at completion of the work.
B. VALVES AND ACCESSORIES:
Valves shall be provided upstream of branches, apparatus and fixtures.
Valves on branch lines and at distribution points shall be provided with a 2-inch heavy
brass disc, stamped and stenciled with 1/4-inch high letters, stating portion of system
controlled by valve. The
Contractor shall provide a chart of location and use of main valves.
Valve locations shall be shown on record drawings.
Adjustable shaft valve boxes shall be provided for underground valves.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Plumbing
15400-3
DIELECTR INS: C.
D.
Dielectric unions shall be provided at connections between pipe or fittings of different
materid.
PIPING:
Piping shall be carried in chases or recesses where provided in walls, through floors
and partitions, and over ceilings. Unless otherwise specified, piping shall not be run in
floor slabs. Pipes shall not be supported by plumbing fixtures or equipment. Changes
in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of bushings is not acceptable.
Where galvanized steel pipe is calked into a cast iron hub, a soil pipe adapter shall be
provided on the calked end of the steel pipe.
Unless otherwise specified, underground piping outside buildings shall have a
minimum cover of 24 inches. Piping under buildings shall have aminimum clearance
fiom structure of 12 inches.
**END OF SECTION**
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Plumbing
15400-4
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 . GENERAL .............................. .................................................................................... 1
1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................... 1
1.3
1.4
GENEW DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 1
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................ ; ........................................................ 3
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.1 1
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
EXAMINATION OF SITE ..................................................................................... ; ... 4
CODES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 4
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS ................................................................................ 5
COORDINATION OF WORK ................................................................................... 5
COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...................................................... 6
EQUIPMENT. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................ 6
SUBMITTALS i ........................................................................................................... 7
QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 9
GROUNDING ........................................................................................................... 10
CLEANUP ................................................................................................................ 11
GUARANTY ........................................................... i ................................................ 11
DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................... 11
PART 2 . PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 13
4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 13
4.2 CONDUIT ................................................................................................................. 13
4.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS. OUTLET AND PULLBOXES ........................................... 13
4.4 UNDERGROUND PULLBOXES AND MANHOLES ........................................... 14
4.5 .WIRE AND CABLE ................................................................................................. 2 5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.1 1
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
MOTORS .................................................................................................................. 15
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER ................................................................................ 17
POWER DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................................ 19
CABINETS AND PANEL EQUIPMENT ............................................. .; ................. 21
UNINTERRUPTDBLE POWER SUPPLIES ............................................................. 24
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER ......................................................... 25
PLC START-UP ................................................................................. ; ..................... 29
REMOTE TELEMETRY UNIT ............................................................................... 30
LEVEL TRANSMITTER ......................................................................................... 30
CHLORINE ANALYZER ........................................................................................ 31
FLUOROMETER ..................................................................................................... 31
PROCESS TUBING ................................................................................................. 31
IDENTIFICATION TAGS ........................................................................................ 31
SPARE PARTS ......................................................................................................... 32
PART 3 . EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 33
3.1
3 -2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 33
RACEWAYS ............................................................................................................ 34
BOXES AND FITTINGS .......................................................................................... 35
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .............................................................................. 35
MOTORS AND CONTROLS .................................................................................. 36
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ............................................................. ............. 36
SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................... 37
SEISMIC ANCHORING RESTRAINTS ................................................................. 37
HANDHOLES AND PULLBOXES ......................................................................... 37
CHECKING. ADJUSTING AND TESTING ........................................................... 37
CLEANUP ................................................................................................................ 3 9
PART 4 . SYSTEM CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................ 41
4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 41
4.2 RELATED SECTIONS ............................................................................................. 41
4.3 COMMON CONTROL AND MONITORING LOOPS ........................................... 41
. 4.4 CHLORWE/FLUOROMETER MONITORING AND CONTROL ........................ 42
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The electrical work generally consists of procurement, fabrication, installation,
implementation and start-up of an Electrical, Instrumentation and Control system
for a Inputloutput facility. The work shall include all site electrical and
instrumentation as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Major electrical work consists of:
1. Furnishing and installing a utility transformer pad or slab box, pull-boxes,
conduit and conductors fiom a location approximately as shown on the
Furnishing and installing utility metering, main disconnect, and
distribution switchgear as shown on the drawings.
Furnishing and installing all conduit, wire, pull boxes and appurtenances
to connect the Control Building electrical and instrumentation equipment
to the InpudOutput structure as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
Furnish and install new instrumentation, communications and controls
necessary to provide a complete and operable facility.
Furnish all Remote Telemetry Unit equipment as specified and deliver to
the OWNER for configuration by the OWNER’S SCADAConsultant.
Upon receipt of configured equipment, install as shown on the drawings
and as coordinated with the OWNER’S SCADA Consultant.
Furnish, configure and install the PLC panel specified herein. The PLC
shall provide local control and shall communicate with Vallecitos Water
District’s SCADA system via spread spectrum RF link.
Provide qualified personnel for the coordination of installation and provide
testing, start-up and training services for complete system commissioning
of the pump station electrical, instrumentation and control system.
plans.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment shown on the drawings to
provide electrical service to the site. The WORK shall include a new SDG&E
approved transfonner slab box at the site shown on the drawings, all conduit from
the utility service connection to the transformer and conduit from the transformer
to the Control Building. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 1 6000 - 1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
coordinate with SDG&E to assure compliance with utility company requirements.
The Contractor shall furnish and install telephone company approved pull boxes
and conduit fiom the telephone company termination location to the Control
Building. The Contractor shall coordinate with the telephone company to assure
compliance with the utility’s requirements.
The Contractor shall furnish the Switchboard and Process Control Panel (PCP)
complete and factory tested as integral components, and all field instrumentation as
shown on the drawings, The Contractor shall install all equipment provided’by
process equipment suppliers in the approximate locations shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the process equipment
suppliers to assure final equipment positions and adequate conduit capacity and
conductor counts to meet the supplier’s requirements.
The Contractor shall furnish all Remote Telemetry Unit components as specified
herein and shall deliver such components to the Owner for integration into the
Owner’s SCADA system. Once configured by the Owner’s SCADA consultant,
the Contractor shall mount equipment in the control room as shown on the
drawings and shall coordinate with the Owner’s SCADA consultant for proper
wire terminations .
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place into service the operating process
instrumentation, control systems, and all appurtenant work, all in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall have full responsibility for the complete operation of all
instrumentation and control systems. The Contractor shall perform all engineering
and coordination necessary in order to select, furnish, install and connect, calibrate,
and place into operation all sensors, instruments, alarm equipment, control boards
and panels, accessories and all other equipment as specified herein. Furthermore,
the Contractor shall calibrate and demonstrate the operability of said system in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall provide all engineering work and installation drawings to
produce a complete instrumentation system. If it is necessary for the Contractor to
produce additional drawings in order to complete its work, the cost of the drawings
shall be included in the Contract bid price and is considered a part of the scope of
work.
The Contractor shall examine all drawings, specifications, and details to become
fully acquainted with the method of construction and to evaluate the quantity of
Work to be performed. In case of conflicting or incomplete technical information,
the Contractor shall include costs in its lump sum bid to coordinate resolution of
these conflicts and deficiencies with the Owner’s Representative at no additional
cost to the Owner. Resolution of these discrepancies shall be obtained from the
Owner’s Representative by the Contractor prior to purchasing of the instrument
item.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 2
I. The Contractor shall coordinate and direct all testing and start-up efforts for the
complete system. 60 days prior to start-up and commissioning, a commissioning
plan shall be submitted for review.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General
All field equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient
environmental conditions of 0°C to 60°C dry bulb and 5 to 95 percent relative
humidity, noncondensing. Instrumentation and control elements shall be rated for
continuous operation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure,
humidity, and vibration conditions specified or normally encountered for the
installed location. Where installed out of doors, sensors shall be capable of
operating between -30°F and 122°F and of being saturated by ambient weather
conditions without suffering damage or affecting their calibration.
B. Overvoltage and Surge Protection
All components shall be protected fiom the effects of overvoltage and surge as
follows:
1. Power Line Surge Protection
All equipment connected to AC circuits shall be protected fiom power line
surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62.41.
Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.
Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection
All digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges
induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The
inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode
using the following two waveforms:
a.
2.
A 1 0-microsecond by 1,000-microsecond waveform with a peak
voltage of 1,500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
An 8-microsecond by 20-microsecond waveform with a peak
voltage of 1,000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.
b.
Fuses shdl not be used for surge protection.
3. Communications Circuits Surge Protection
All communication equipment shall be protected against surges induced
on its communications circuits. Where not protected by the telephone
Utility, all cables and conductors which serve as communications circuits
fiom SCS to PLCs, and between PLCs or other field hardware shall have
surge protection installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at
equipment and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the
application on each communications circuit shall be installed within 3 feet
of the building cable entrance. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in
both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 3
a. A 1 0-microsecond by 1,000-microsecond waveform with a peak
voltage of 1,500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
An 8-microsecond by 20-microsecond waveform with a peak
voltage of 1,000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.
b.
Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.
1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Bidders shall visit the sites at the time scheduled by the Owner. Bidders shall
make allowance in the bid proposal for existing site conditions as related to the
work that is to be performed.
1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All the equipment and materials shall conform to the latest revision of the
following standards. The publications listed below form a part of this specification
to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI X3.64 (1 979) Additional Controls for Use with American
National Standard Code for Information Interchange
2. Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
a. EIA 232-D (Jan. 1987) Interface Between Data Terminal
Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing
Serial Binary Data Interchange
Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced Multipoint System
b. EIA RS-485 (1983) Standard for Electrical Characteristics of
3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
FCC Part 68 (Jul 1986) Connection of Terminal Equipment to
the Telephone Network
a.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
a.
4.
IEEE No. 100 (1 988) IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and
Electronic Terms
b. IEEE C57.13 (1978) Instrument Transformers
C. IEEE C62.4 1 (1 980) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits
d. IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection
(CSMNCD)
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
a. NEMA 250
Electrical Equipment
(1985; Incl. Rev. 1 and 2; ICs-6) Enclosures for
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 4
B.
C.
D.
b. NEMA ICs 1 (1988) General Standards for Industrial Controls
and Systems
6. Undenvri ters’ Laboratories (UL)
7.
8.
9. National Electrical Code (NEC)
Insulated Power Cable District’s Representatives Association (IPCEA)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
All electrical equipment and materials, and the design, construction, and
installation thereof, shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Federal
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), State Building Standards, and
applicable local codes and regulations.
Where the Plans or these Specifications call for equipment and workmanship to be
of better quality or higher standard than required by the above codes, standards,
rules, and regulation, then said Plans and Specifications shall prevail. Nothing on
the Plans or in these Specifications shall be construed to permit work in violation
of the above codes, standards, rules, and regulations and the Contractor shall be
held responsible for any work which is not acceptable.
In case of differences between the building codes, specifications, state law, local
ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, fire insurance carrier’s
requirements, and the contract documents, the most stringent shall govern. The
Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of such
differences.
1.7 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The drawings show the installation as it shall be installed with the minimum
requirements of the codes above as a base, and all cost incident thereto shall be
included in the Electrical Contractor’s Bid. The Electrical Contractor shall obtain
all permits, licenses required by the local ordinances and shall include the cost of
all such permits required for this installation in his bid. Upon completion of the
work, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish the Owner’s Representative a
certificate of final inspection and approval fiom the local Electrical Inspection
Department.
1.8 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Electrical apparatus on all equipment shall be handled, set in place, connected,
checked out, serviced, and placed in readiness for proper operation to the
satisfactions of the Owner and Owner’s Representative all within the scope of
work intended under this section.
B. Before any work is started, the Contractor shall verify, with the equipment
manufacturers, that equipment dimensions and arrangements will allow for
equipment installation in the spaces provided for on the Plans for motor control
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 5
line-up, and that the installation indicated will provide for all required ventilation,
clearances, access, and work space.
1.9 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A.
B.
C.
The Contractor shall verify all actual equipment and motor full-load and locked-
rotor current ratings. The necessary minimum equipment, wire, and conduit sizes
are shown on the Plans. If the Contractor furnishes equipment of different ratings,
the Contractor shall coordinate the actual current rating of equipment furnished
with the branch circuit conductor size, the controller size, the motor starter, and the
branch circuit overcurrent protection. The branch circuit conductors shall have a
carrying capacity of not less than 125 percent of the actual full-load current rating.
The size of the branch circuit conductors shall be such that the voltage drop from
the overcurrent protection devices up to the equipment shall not be greater than 2
percent when the equipment is running at full load and rated voltage.
The motor running overcurrent protection devices shall be rated or selected to trip
at no more than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating for motors
marked to have a temperature rise not over 40 degrees C or motors marked with a
service factor not less than 1.15, and at no more than 115 percent for all other types
of motors. The motor controller fiame size shall be coordinated to the current
rating and horsepower size of the installed motor but in no case shall the controller
fime size be less than Size 1.
The motor branch circuit overcurrent protection device shall trip open in 30
seconds or less on locked-rotor current of the motor. This device shall also protect
the motor branch circuit conductors and the motor control apparatus against
overcurrent due to short-circuits or grounds. The motor control circuits shall have
overcurrent protection of the type indicated on the Plans.
1.10 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
It is the intent of these Specifications and of the Plans, to secure high quality in all
equipment and materials, and to require first-class workmanship, in order to
facilitate trouble free operation and minimum maintenance of the electrical system.
All equipment and materials shall be new, listed by UL, and bear the UL label,
unless exception to this requirement is inherent to an individual item specified
herein, or exception is otherwise granted by the Owner’s Representative.
Equipment and materials shall be products of reputable, experienced
manufacturers. Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same
manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade and standard of
construction, shall be of sturdy design and manufacture, and shall be capable of
long, reliable, trouble-free service.
All work, including installation, connection, calibration, testing and adjustment,
shall be done by qualified, experienced personnel who are technically skilled in
their trades, are thoroughly instructed, and are competently supervised. The
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 6
resulting complete installation shall reflect professional quality work, employing
industrial standards and methods. Any and all defective material or inferior
workmanship shall be corrected immediately to the Satisfaction of the Owner’s
Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are described herein. See product equipment specifications for
additional submittal requirements specific to that product.
B. Shop Drawings, General
1. Shop drawings shall include, as appropriate:
a. product specific catalog cuts.
b. a drawing index.
C. a list of symbols.
d. a series of drawings for each cabinet or console using
abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature, and identifiers as shown on
the contract drawings.
e. a complete materials list.
Drawings submitted for review shall include fiont views, sections, and
anchoring details to meet seismic requirements. Separate drawings shall
be submitted for elementary control and wiring diagrams. Wiring
diagrams shall be complete for all electrical equipment furnished except
lighting. Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation of
equipment, the proposed correction, field changes found necessasy, shall
be noted on the drawing and submitted for review again. All shop
drawings shall be checked by the Contractor before submittal for review
by the District’s Representative and the Contractor shall certify that the
submittals are in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Primary
shop drawings to be submitted
a. Motor Control Center.
b.
2.
Pump Control Panel layout, interface and communication
diagrams.
C. Record Drawings
Prior to the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner’s
Representative with two (2) sets of Electrical Plans marked with any changes,
deviations or additions to any part of the electrical work.
Delivery of Project Submittals and Manuals
All items of technical data which is specifically identified in this specification, will
be delivered strictly in accordance with the following requirements. All data
delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph
D.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 7
against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall be organized as described
herein. Two copies of specified number of submittals shall be returned to the
Contractor for record, unless otherwise noted herein.
E. Group I Technical Data Package
The Group I Technical Data Package shall include complete system descriptions
and calculations used in sizing equipment required by these specifications.
Descriptions and calculations shall show how the equipment will operate as a
system to meet the performance requirements of this specification. A complete
data package shall be delivered for all equipment and materials, including
instrumentation hardwarehoftware, support hardware, and field equipment. The
data package shall include the following 51s a minimum:
1. Submittal Data and System Drawings (eight copies). Submit system data
and drawing sections as a complete package at one time within 30 days
after the Notice to Proceed.
a.
b.
Detailed Bill of Materials including complete manufacturers name
and model number, and quantities.
Manufacturers cut sheets and manuals for all hardware and
software to be provided. Each item shall be prefaced with an ISA
style data sheet showing manufacturer name, model number,
location of equipment, input/output characteristics, power
requirements, range (if applicable), device tag (if applicable), and
equipment supplier information (name, address, and telephone
number). Provide data sheets for each individual equipment item
with one cut sheet or manual covering all identical uses of that
item.
Single Line diagram and pump controls.
Details of connections to power sources.
C.
d.
e. Miscellaneous details.
f. Loop interconnection wiring diagrams for the PCP showing all
control equipment, instrumentation, electrical equipment,
component wiring, termination numbering, wire color, and routing
for all control equipment provided under this contract, other
concurrent contracts, or existing. Loop and interconnection
drawings shall be prepared in accordance with ISA Standards (S5.3
and S5.4).
Discrete wiring diagrams prepared in accordance JIC-style ladder
diagrams and field device installation diagrams. g.
Updated System Submittal (eight copies):
The Group I technical data package shall be updated upon completion of
the in-house verification and testing and prior to installation by the
Contractor. The submittal shall consist of completely updated hardware
2.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 8
and software information and drawings for use during field installation,
start-up and testing. One set of the updated submittal shall remain in the
Owners facility at all times and shall be continuously updated to reflect as-
built conditions.
Group I1 Technical Data Package F.
The Technical Data Package shall consist of the operation and maintenance
manuals. Final copies of the manuals, bound in hardback, loose-leaf binders, shall
be delivered to the Owner’s Representative within 30 days after successfully
completing the final field testing. The draft copy used during site testing shall be
updated with any changes required prior to final delivery of the manuals. Each
manual’s contents shall be identified on the cover. The manuals shall include the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each supplier of equipment and
systems, and of the nearest service representatives for each item of equipment and
each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. Tab
sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the
beginning of each appendix. The final copies delivered after completion of the test
shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
The manuals and quantities to be delivered shall include:
1. Hardware Manual (eight copies)
The hardware manual shall provide detailed data describing all equipment
furnished, including:
a. General description and specifications.
b. Complete materials list.
C. Installation and checkout procedures.
d.
e.
f. Alignment and calibration procedures.
g.
h. Interface definition.
Equipment electrical schematics and layout drawings.
System schematics and I/O wiring lists.
Manufacturer’s repair parts list indicating sources of supply.
1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with printed
recommendations of the manufacturer which have been approved by the Owner’s
Representative. The installation shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in this
type of work and installation shall be coordinated in the field with other trades so
that interference’s are avoided.
The Contractor shall provide adequate means for and shall fully protect all finished
parts of the materials and equipment against damage fiom any cause during the
progress of the work and until accepted by the Owner’s Representative.
B.
Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 - 9
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
C. All materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, shall be
covered in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or
splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint, and all moving parts shall be kept
clean &d dry.
D. The Contractor shall replace or have refinished by the manufacturer, all damaged
materials or equipment, including face plates of panels and switchboard sections,
at no expense to the Owner.
The Contractor shall perform the tests described hereinafter and any other tests that
may be required by the Owner’s Representative or other authorities having
jurisdictions. The entire electrical installation shall be tested, adjustments made,
and defects corrected as an obligation under the work of this section. The
Contractor shall furnish all necessary replacement parts and labor necessary due to
damage resulting from damaged equipment or from test and correction of faulty
installation. The following testing, as a minimum, shall be accomplished:
1. Insulation resistance tests
2.
E.
Continuity test of all wiring
3. Test for proper grounding
4.
5.
6. Participate in site start-up
Test for short circuits in system
Complete operational test on all equipment
F. After each electrical installation is complete, it shall be tested thoroughly to
demonstrate that the entire system is in proper working order and in accordance
with the Plans and Specifications. In no case shall the tests be less than those
outlined hereinafter.
G. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner’s Representative and
shall be subject to his approval. The Owner’s Representative shall be notified
three (3) calendar days prior to the date upon which the test is to take place, and no
testing shall be started without the approval of the Owner’s Representative.
The project will be subject to continued inspection during construction. The
Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner’s Representative and shall provide
assistance at all times for the inspection of the electrical work. He shall remove
covers, operate machinery, or perform any reasonable work that, in the opinion of
the Owner’s Representative, will be necessary to determine the quality and
any time and shall be updated as the work progresses.
H.
’ adequacy of the work. The “Record Drawings” shall be subject to inspection at
1.13 GROUNDING
A. A grounding system shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical
Code and all state and local codes and regulations. The grounding system shall
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
10
Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 -
bond together and effectively ground all exposed non-energized metal surfaces
containing energized parts, devices or conductors.
1.14 CLEANUP
A. Exposed parts shall be clean of all materiars, and all oil and grease spots shall be
removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefully
wiped and all cracks and comers scraped out.
During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall clean up after his men and
shall leave the premises and all portions of the site in which he is working free
fkom debris and surplus materials.
B.
1.15 GUARANTY
A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, the Contractor shall
guaranty his work against any defects in materials ad workmanship for a period of
one year fiom the date of final inspection. This guaranty shall be in written form
and acceptable to the Owner’s Representative to whom it shall be delivered before
final acceptance and payment is made. Any latent defects in Contractor-furnished
material or workmanship which are discovered during the time of this guaranty
shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the District. The Contractor shall
respond in a professional manner to a notification of defect or failure. Services
shall be performed within five (5) calendar days after notification by the District or
within a time period as mutually agreed to by both parties.
1.16 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are definitions of terns that may be used in this Section:
1. “AS DIRECTED”: As directed by the Owner’s Representative
2. , “AS REOUIRED”: As needed to obtain successful operation and conform
to governing codes, regulations, safety requirements and the intent of the
Contract Plans and these Specifications.
“CONCEALED”: Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed
behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches,
underground or in drawl spaces.
3.
4. “CONTMCTOR’: The general Contractor and his Sub-Contractors.
5.
6.
“EXPOSED”: Not installed underground or “CONCEALED” as defined
above.
“FURNISH’ or “PROVIDE”: To supply, install and connect complete
and ready for safe and regular operation particular work referred to unless
specifically indicated or specified otherwise.
“INDICATED” or “SHOWN”: As indicated or shown on Plans and/or in
the Specifications.
7.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 -
11
a.
9.
“INSTALL”: To erect, mount and connect complete with all related
accessories, wiring, conduit, etc., necessary and required.
“MOUNT”: To erect and connect coniplete with all related accessories.
10.
11.
“NOTED”: As indicated on Plans and/or specified.
“SIMILAR’ or “EOUAL”: Equal in kind, materials, weight, design and
efficiency of performance as approved by the Owner’s Representative.
“SUPPLY”: To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with all
related accessories necessary or required.
“WIRING”: Conduit, fittings, wire, junction and outlet boxes, switches,
cutouts and receptacles and all necessary or required in connection with or
related thereto.
“WORK”: All labor, materials, wiring, equipment, apparatus controls,
accessories, and other items customarily furnished and/or required for
proper and complete installation.
12.
13.
14.
B. All symbols, definitions, and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in information
displays and program printouts shall conform to the designations shown in the
drawings and with ISA standards
--End of Section -
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
12
Electrical, instrumentation and control
PAGE 16000 -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4.1 GENERAL
A. Except as may be specifically indicated otherwise, materials furnished under this
Section shall be new and in accordance with industry standards and as herein
specified. Equipment used for the same purpose shall be of the same make.
Outdoor equipment, fixtures and wiring devices shall be of approved weatherproof
construction or shall be in weatherproof enclosure or as noted in the plans.
B. Standard Products
Materials and equipment submitted for approval shall be the cataloged products of
companies regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, shall be the latest
standard design that conforms to the Specification requirements and shall
essentially duplicate material and equipment that has been in satisfactory use for at
least 2 years. Replacement parts shall be stocked locally within a radius of two
hundred (200) miles from jobsite.
C. Approved Manufacturers
Wherever on the plans or in the Specifications, materials or equipment are
identified by the names of one or more manufacturers, it is intended only to
indicate an acceptable standard for quality.
0 4.2 CONDUIT
A. Rigid metal conduit shall be in accordance with ANSI C80.01 and shall be hot
dipped galvanized.
Electric metallic tubing shall not be used.
Flexible metal conduit shall be constructed of interlocking steel strips with
continuous zinc coating.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduits shall be constructed of galvanized interlocking
steel strips with a smooth moisture and oil-proof, abrasive-resistant neoprene
jacket.
Nonmetallic conduit shall be Type 11, Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride rated for 90
degrees C.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. Jacketed steel conduits shall conform to Federal specification WW-C58 1-d, ANI
rigid steel conduit specification C80.1 and to UL specification UL-6. The zinc
surface inside and outside shall remain intact. A 40 mil thickness PVC coating
shall be bonded to the outside of the conduit. A PVC coated coupling shall be
furnished with each length of conduit. A PVC sleeve equal to the outside diameter
of the conduit shall extend 1 %-inches fkom each end of the coupling.
Minimum conduit size shall be %” unless otherwise noted on Plan Drawings. G.
4.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS, OUTLET AND PULLBOXES
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
1 6700- 1 3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Conduit fittings shall be cast or malleable of a non-ferrous metal.
Jacketed fitting shall have a 40 mil thickness PVC coating bonded to the outside
body of the fitting. A PVC sleeve equal to the trade diameter of the conduit
opening shall extend 1 1 %-inches beyond each threaded opening.
Expansion joints shall be OZ type "AX" Crouse-Hinds type "XT" or equal and shall
be complete with bonding jumper.
Flashing for conduits through roof shall be Stonemen Strometile No. S 10-4,
Semco or equal.
Outlet boxes shall be galvanized or sheadized, one piece pressed steel, knockout
type.
Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be cast of non-ferrous metal with threaded conduit
entry and gasketed covers FS or FD type.
Insulated bushings shall be malleable iron with insulating bushing and ground lug.
Conduit hubs shall be Appleton type HUB, Myers "Scru-titellor equal.
Explosion-proof fitting shall be approved for the area classification and hall be as
manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or equal.
Explosion-proof seals shall be Crouse-Hinds type "Eys" or equal.
Sealing bushings shall be provided on the ends of Exterior underground conduits
that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall consist of a neoprene
sealing ring secured between two compressing metal plates. When the conduit
sealing bushing is in place it shall effectively form a watertight seal at the conduit
ends.
Wall and floor seals shall be provided to completely seal the areas around conduits
that pass through concrete walls and floors. Seals shall be furnished with an outer
sleeve body enclosing a neoprene grommet compressed between two pressure
rings tightening the rings. Provide a watertight seal on the outer surface of the
entering conduits.
Pullboxes shall be code gauge steel with removable covers secured with machine
screws. The pullbox shall be painted with two (2) coats of primer and one (1)
finished coat of light gray enamel, ANSI No. 61. Pullboxes shall meet all code
requirements as to size for number and size of conduits terminating.
Weatherproof pull boxes shall be hot dip galvanized with two (2) coats of primer
paint and one (1) coat of enamel, ANSI No. 61 Grey. Covers shall be gasketed and
made boxes completely watertight.
4.4 UNDERGROUND PULLBOXES AND MANHOLES
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvenmts Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-1 4
A. Pullboxes and manholes shall be precast type designed and manufactured for heavy
traffic loading with heavy duty, cast iron, traffic type covers. Pullboxes for utility
conduits shall be as required by the serving utility.
B. All pullboxes shall have bolt-down covers complete with fiber gaskets for a
weathertight fit.
All joints between'precast sections shall be sealed.
Box and manhole covers shall be'permanently identified as follows:
1. Telephone service -"T"
C.
D.
2.
3.
Electrical Systems 600 volts and less - "E"
Electrical Systems above 600 volts -"High Voltage"
4.5 WIREANDCABLE
A. 600 Volt Conductors
4.6
1.
2.
All conductors shall be soft-drawn copper, 97% conductivity minimum.
All conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be type "THHW" 600 volt
insulation unless otherwise noted on drawings.
All conductors No. 4 and larger shall be stranded.
120 volt power wiring shall be No. 12 AWG and control wiring shall be
No. 14 AWG stranded with type "THWN" 600 volt insulation or as noted
on the Plans.
3.
4.
B. Instrumentation Cable - Shielded
1. Instrumentation cable shall be single shielded pairs. Conductors shall be
No.18 AWG copper, unless otherwise noted on Plan Drawings.
2. Insulation shall be PVC 60°C rated, 300 volts. Each conductor shall be
color coded, and each pair shall be number or color coded.
The assembled pairs shall have an ahmindpolyester shield with a tinned
copper drain wire over it.
The assembly shall be covered with PVC jacket.
The instrumentation cable shall be #8760 as manufactured by Belden or
equal.
C. Control Cable
3.
4.
5.
1. Shall be similar to instrumentation cable, except without shield.
MOTORS
A. Motors shall be suitable for the application and shall conform to ASTM C 50 AND
ALL APPLICABLE NEMA standards. The motor shall be supplied by the
manufacturer of the driven equipment.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
1 6700- 1 5
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be 3 phase, unless otherwise specified,
squirrel-cage, NEMA B induction type. Motors shall be suitable for across-the-
line, full voltage starting except where noted part winding or reduced voltage
starting.
All 3-phase motors shall be suitable for operation on 460-voltY 3-phaseY 60-hertz
power as indicated. Motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be single-phase,
capacitor start, and shall be suitable for operation on 1 15-volt, single phase, 60
hertz power. Single-phase motors shall be equipped with 3-wire grounded cable
provided with plug when located indoors and with cable connection to
weatherproof junction box utilizing a rubber cord grip seal at box when located
outdoors.
Except where otherwise specified in these Standard Specifications, motors
installed outdoors shall have NEMA weather-protected, Type 1 enclosures with
bird, insect, and rodent screens. Motors installed indoors shall have open splash-
proof enclosures. All motors 25 horsepower and larger and all other motors shown
on the plans with space heaters shall be provided with 120-volt strip heaters to
prevent condensation. Space heaters shall be wired to an off-auto selector switch
through a normally closed starter contact so that space heater is energized when
motor is not operating.
Unless otherwise specified in these Specifications, the horsepower rating of said
motor shall be such that it will continuously drive the load developed at the motor
rated speed without exceeding the nameplate ratings and without benefit of the
service factor ratings.
It is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer and of the Contractor to
furnish motors, electrical circuits, and equipment of ample horsepower capacity
and efficiencies to operate the equipment without overloading, exceeding the rated
full-load current with service factor, or overheating at full-load capacity under the
specified operating conditions of this equipment.
Motors rated at 10 horsepower or over shall be constructed to limit inrush currents
to not more than those permitted by NEMA MGl , Code G. Motor rated at 3
horsepower or over shall be designed for continuous duty under rated full-load
conditions with a service factor of 1.15 and for ambient temperature at 40 degrees
C. Motors shall be constructed with NEMA MG1 , Class F insulation and shall
limit the maximum temperature rise over the above-stated design ambient
temperature to the values listed in NEMA MGl for Class B insulation system.
Motors 150 HP and larger shall be provided with a 5 KV class power conduit
termination box.
Vertical motors shall be hollow or solid shaft as required to accommodate driven
equipment and shall be equipped with cast-iron mounting base of adequate height
to permit access to the coupling between the motor and pump shaft. The diameter
of the mounting base shall be at least as large as the diameter of the motor.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instnimentation and Control Systems
16700-1 6
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
The vertical motors shall be equipped with thrust bearings designed to carry the
weight of the rotating parts of motor and pump including the unbalanced hydraulic
thrust of the pump impeller under any operating condition. The bearings shall be
oil or grease lubricating without disturbing the bearing housing. The bearings shall
be self-cooled and shall be sealed against entrance of dirt and loss of lubricant.
Motors 100 HP and larger shall be provided with upper and lower or fiont and rear
bearing temperature sensors and winding temperature sensor for each phase shall
be provided to monitor the temperature. Motors smaller than 100 HP shall be
supplied with noted sensors as shown on the contract drawings. Platinum RTD
sensors shall be installed. Coordinate the interfacing requirements with the VFD
supplier .
Horizontal motors shall be equipped with either anti-friction or sleeve-type
bearings on each end of the motor. If the motor is equipped with anti-fiiction
bearings, the bearings shall be designed for the maximum thrust of the driven
equipment.
The Contractor shall refer to the specification on the driven equipment for
additional specific requirements and operating conditions.
Submittal for motors 50 horsepower and larger shall contain:
1. Efficiency - 1/2 load Power Factor - 1/2 load
2. Efficiency - 3/4 load Power Factor - 3/4 load
3. Efficiency - 4/4 load Power Factor - 4/4 load
Motors to be installed indoors, inside buildings, or covered pipe galleries out of the
weather shall receive standard manufacturer' finish. All other motors shall be shop
primed and field painted in accordance with the Section on painting, lining, and
coating in these Specifications.
Motors driven by Variable Frequency Drives shall be high efficiency type and
constructed for use with a PWM variable frequency drive with an adjustable carrier
fiequency of up to 15,000 Hz, and shall be indicated on the motor nameplate.
Motor shall meet NEMA Premium eficiency standard.
4.7 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the motor control centers as specified
herein and as shown on the contract drawings. The Motor Control Centers and all
components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
latest applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI and UL 845. The MCC and Service
Entrance shall be 600-volt class suitable for operation on a three-phase, 60-hertz
system. The system operating voltage and number of wires shall be as indicated on
the drawings. The MCC shall be rated NEMA 12 approximately dimensioned as
show in the Contract drawings.
B. Motor Control Center(s) shall be supplied in accordance with the contract single
line and elevation drawings. MCC line up including Service Entrance Equipment
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-1 7
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
and Control Section shall be housed in a NEMA 12 structure. MCC and
Distribution Busses shall be braced for 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Each
interior shall be equipped with a fluorescent lamp, 120-volt switch and one 20-
ampere duplex outlet minimum.
Structures shall be totally enclosed deadfront, free-standing assemblies. They shall
be 90 inches high and 21 inches deep for front-mounted units. Structures shall
contain a horizontal wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus and shall
be readily accessible through a hinged cover. Adequate space for conduit and
wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference.
’
Compartments for mounting control units shall be incrementally arranged such that
not more than six (6) size 1 starters for front mounted only can be mounted within
each vertical structure. Guide rails shall be provided. Motor control compartments
shall be constructed of proper width to house later retrofit of 60 horsepower, size
4, VFDs or SSMCs.
A vertical wireway with minimum of 35 square inches of cross sectional area shall
be adjacent to each vertical unit and shall be covered by a hinged door. Wireways
shall contain steel rod cable supports.
All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 shall be of the drawout type.
Draw-out provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to
absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall
have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to
these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. Interior of all units shall be
painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with side-mounted,
positive latch pull-apart type control terminal blocks rated 600-volts. Knockouts
shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. In addition, a master
terminal block, when Type C wiring is specified, shall be drawout and shall be
located in the bottom wireway, readily accessible through a hinged cover. All
control wire to be 14 gauge.minimum.
All drawout units shall be secured by a spring-loaded quarter turn indicating type
fastening device located at the top front of the unit. Each unit compartment shall be
provided with an individual front door.
An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each
starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent
access unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. A defeater shall be provided to
bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent
inadvertent closing of the disconnect. A second interlock shall be provided to
prevent removal or re-insertion of the unit while in the ON position. Padlocking
facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the OFF position
with fiom one (1) to three (3) padlocks with the door open or closed. In addition,
means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn position with
the stabs free of the vertical bus.
Each structure shall contain a main horizontal copper tin-plated bus, with
minimum ampacity of 600 amperes. The horizontal bus shall be rated at 50 degrees
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-1 8
J.
K.
C temperature rise over a 40 degree C ambient in compliance with UL standards.
Vertical busses feeding unit compartments shall be copper and shall be securely
bolted to the horizontal main bus. All joints shall be front accessible for ease of
maintenance. The vertical bus shall have a minimum rating of 300 amperes for
front mounted units.
Isolation of the vertical bus compartment from the unit Compartment shall be by
means of a full height insulating barrier. This barrier shall be a single sheet of glass
reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus.
Provide snap-in covers for all unused openings.
Combination starter units shall be full-voltage non-reversing, unless otherwise
shown, and shall utilize type MCP Motor Circuit Protectors.
1. Each combination unit shall be rated 65,000 AIC symmetrical at 480V.
The MCP shall provide adjustable magnetic protection and be provided
with pin insert to stop magnetic adjustment at 1300% motor nameplate full
load current to comply with NEC requirements. All HMCP combination
starter units shall have a “tripped” position on the unit disconnect and a
push-to-test button on the MCP. Type MCP motor circuit protectors shall
include transient override feature for motor inrush current.
Each starter compartment shall be equipped with a fused control power
transformer, two indicating lights, HOA selector switch, and two NO
contacts, unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings. Device panel to
have space to accommodate six oil-tight pilot-control devices or indicating
ammeters, voltmeters, or elapsed time meters.
Motor starters shall be electrically operated, electrically held, three-pole
assemblies with arc extinguishing characteristics and shall have silver-to-
silver renewable contacts. They shall have provisions for a total of eight
(8) NO or eight (8) NC auxiliary contacts. The overload relay assembly
shall be of the thermal bimetallic ambient compensated type. Overload
relays shall be reset fiom outside the enclosure by means of an insulated
button. The overload relay shall have a built-in push-to-test button,
electrically isolated NO-NC contacts and single phase sensitivity delay.
2.
3.
4.8 POWER DISTRIBUTION
A. The power distribution and utility metering equipment shall be provided as a single
pedestal unit that shall comply with all required codes and be approved by the
serving utility. The pedestal shall be mounted securely to a concrete pad as shown
on the drawings. The metering and distribution pedestal be 48” high, 12.5” wide
and 16.5” deep. The pedestal shall consist of two primary sections, one section for
utility inconling wiring fiom the utility transformer and the utility meter and the
other section for main disconnect breaker. The metering pedestal shall be model
20-OOOLB as manufactured by Tesco Controls, Inc or approved equal.
’
B. Main feeder and shall be supplied and sized as indicated within the contract plans.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-19
C. The Feeder Breaker shall be a molded case, 100 ampere, 480 volt, 3 pole GFI type
with a minimum short circuit rating of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
Assembly shall be complete with ground fault sensor connected to trip the main
breaker.
D. Circuit Breakers shall be provided with independently adjustable Long Time
Setting, Long Time Delay, Short Time Setting, Short Time Delay and
Instantaneous settings for coordination with both upstream and downstream
protective devices.
All wiring in this and any other section shall be neatly arranged and securely
clamped, to prevent movement, breaking, and protected against contact with any
sharp edges. Wiring clamps, supports, or other means, at hinge transition points,
shall be furnished to prevent chafing due to doors being opened or closed. Metal
clamps, if used, shall be equipped with insulating inserts between wiring cables
and clamps.
E.
F. The following equipment shall be mounted in separate compartments and isolated
from each other:
1. The power distribution transformer shall be equivalent to Sorgel Electric
Division, Square D company "Quiet Quality", General Electric Company
"QHT," or approved equal. Transformer shall be mounted as
recommended by the manufacturer. The primary winding of the
transformer shall be rated as shown on the Contract drawings, 480 volts,
1 -phase as indicated. The secondary winding of the transformer shall be
120/240 volts, 1 -phase. A primary circuit breaker and secondary circuit
breaker of the sizes indicated shall be fiunished and installed.
Transformer insulation shall conform to NEMA TRl , Class B or Class H
insulation systems. The transformer shall be UL listed and labeled.
G. A lighting and power panel board shall be provided as a wall mounted unit. . The
panelboard shall be flush mounted . Panelboard shall be a NEMA PB 1, Type 1
enclosure, fkont cover with a door. The panelboard finish shall match the finish of
motor control center. The ground and neutral buses of panelboard shall be copper,
with minimum interruptible short circuit rating of 10,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical for 120/240 Volts AC.
H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1 FS W-C-375; bolt-on type thermal
magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide
circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A
ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
I. Surge protection devices are to be used for the protection of all AC electrical
circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching
transients and internally generated transients resulting fiom inductive andor
capacitive load switching. The surge protectors shall be tested in accordance with
the requirements of ANSYIEEE C62.41 standards for Categories A, B, and C
environments and shall be a UL 1449 listed component.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-20
J. The surge protection device shall be sized for voltage and phase requirements
listed on the contract plans and shall provide independent phase-phase, phase-
neutral, and neutral-ground surge protection. Surge protection shall be installed at
the locations shown on the contract plans. Surge protection Components shall be
as manufactured by Leviton, Hubbell or Liebert.
@
4.9 CABINETS AND PANEL EQUIPMENT
A. Process Control Panel
1. The pump control panel (PCP) shall be floor mounted, stand-alone
structure, pre-wired and tested at the factory.
The interior shall be provided with a formed 12-gauge steel subpanel for
attaching surface-mounted components. All components shall be attached
with screws and the subpanel threaded. Rivets or back of panel nuts shall
not be allowed. The interior shall be painted with two coats of white
paint. The pump control panel indicators and hand switches shall be
arranged in accordance with the details provided in the drawings.
The panel interior shall be equipped with a fluorescent lamp, 120-volt, one
20-ampere duplex outlet minimum, and three single pole 120-volt, 20-
ampere circuit breakers minimum, as indicated on the Contract drawings.
2.
3.
B. Panel Control Circuit Devices and Components
1. General
All components, except those mounted on the cabinet door, shall be
mounted behind on fmed or swing-out panels; terminal blocks for field
connections shall be mounted fixed channels located near the bottom of
the cabinet but clear of the conduit entry area. Fixed panels shall be
located so as not to prevent access within the cabinets to other
components, wiring, and terminals.
2. Control Relays and Timers
Control relays and timers shall have either 24-volt d-c or 120-volt a-c coils
and have form C contacts (a normally open and normally closed contact).
Control relays and timers shall be 10-ampere, 300-volt, pin or blade style,
plug-in type with dust cover, LED “on” and applicable “timeout”
indication, and sockets: All relays shall be provided with a minimum of
one spare contact. Timers shall be adjustable with indication of the full
time range and of the time setting.
Relays and Timers shall be as manufactured by Idec, timers type RTE or
equal.
3. Wire Marking
Each signal and circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point
shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on all
shop drawings. The numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every
Mahr Reservoir’Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-21
4.
5.
6.
7.
terminal using Raychem Shrinkmark heat shrinkable printer identification
sleeve or equal. Self-laminated markers shall not be used.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers
and box lug terminals and shall be rated 25 amperes at 300 volts. Provide
a minimum of 10% spare terminals.
White marking strips , fastened securely to the molded sections shall be
provided with printed wire numbers or circuit identifications. Terminal
block manufacturer shall be Phoenix Contact with mounting rack or equal.
D-C Power Supplies
Provide d-c power supplies as required for analog loops and d-c circuits.
Each power supply shall be enclosed and include internal short-circuit
protection. Current requirements shall not exceed 75% of manufacturer
maximum rating.
Receptacles
Duplex receptacles shall be molded composition, ivory (utility power) or
orange (UPS power) with matching colored covers, specification grade.
Duplex receptacles for 120-volt, single-phase, 3-wire service to be rated
20 amperes, 125 volts, back or side wired, NEMA Type 5-20R. Arrow-
Hart No. 6739-1, Bryant No. 5362-1, Hubbell No. 5362-1, or equal.
Nameplates
Nameplates for panel mounted devices shall be laminated plastic, black on
white, with engraving through the black surface to form 3/16-inch high
white letters. Relays and other devices mounted inside the control panels
shall be identified with permanent nonferrous metal tags. All tags shall
match device numbers shown on all shop and as-built drawings.
C. Panel Control Circuit Wiring
1. Wire Type and Size
Instrumentation signal cables shall be of the type used for process control
with shielded pairs or triads with polyvinyl jacket and overall shield over
the multiple pairs or triads. The instrumentation cable shall be rated 300
volts at 90 C or better. The size of the instrumentation cable shall be AWG
No. 18 minimum, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. All
instrumentation cables shall meet all the requirements of IPCEA S-61-402
and shall be UL listed.
Control wiring shall be AWG No. 14 THHN. Inner panel control wiring
may be AWG No. 14 MTW. Main power (120-volt a-c) to the panels and
inner panel utility shall be wired using color coded AWG No. 12 T"N.
A-C power to all system power supplies, CRTs, printer, and disk drives,
shall be accomplished using molded 3-wire plug cords. Wires shall be
color coded in accordance with the following table:
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-22
a. Black L1 (hot)
b. White L2 (neutral)
C. Red a-c control circuits
d. Blue d-c circuits
e. Yellow Interlock control circuits, Foreign Voltage
f. Green Equipment ground
All interfacing between the cabinets and the field shall be accomplished at
a terminal strip (TB). No internal panel wiring shall be connected to
terminals on the "field side" of TB. Likewise, no field wiring shall be
connected to terminals on the "panel side" of TB.
Precision (1%) 250-ohm resistors shall be installed at the field wiring
terminal strip; each incoming analog signal shall be converted to a voltage
signal (1 to 5 volt d-c) where required.
Wiring run from components on a swing-out panel to other components on
a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These shall be tied with
nylon wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge
loop" so that conductors are not strained at terminals.
Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at
short intervals and secured to the inside face of the panel using Panduit
adhesive mounts with Eastman No. 9 10 adhesive. Wiring to rear terminals
on panel-mount instruments shall be run in plastic wireways secured to
horizontal brackets run above or below the instruments in about the same
plane as the rear of the instruments.
Conformance to the above wiring installation requirements shall be
reflected by details shown on the shop drawings for the Owner's
Representative review.
Signal conditioners and control interface relays shall be provided wherever
proper instrument interfacing dictates use of these components. Each
auxiliary device shall be assigned a tag number and shall appear on the
panel shop loop drawings.
All electrical devices within the panel shall be identified by tag number,
machine printed on a label visible from the panel interior. Labels shall be
laminated plastic with an adhesive backing. The labels shall be consistent
in size throughout the panel.
When input connections are made to existing circuits, the Contractor shall
verify the control voltage. Provide power for the existing circuits
compatible with the existing controls for dry contact inputs, powered
outputs, and analog circuits as required.
D. Panel Indicators and Hand switches
1. General
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-23
All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label
of the Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or
equivalent where standards have been established and label service
regularly applies.
2. Indicators
Panel mounted indicators shall be 4 inch vertical 101 segment LED
bargraph with a four-digit digital display suitable for flush mounting. The
indicator shall display a 4 to 20 ma signal in the designated District's
Representativeing units. The unit shall be 120 volt a-c powered with a +/-
0.1 % accuracy.
3. Hand Switches
New back panel mounted, non miniature, hand switches shall be the
indicating rotary hand switch type. The unit shall be industrial quality,
oiltight grade with 10-ampere contacts. Switch function shall be as
indicated on the instrument drawings.
Replacement hand switches shall match existing manufacturer type and
size, and meet the functions noted on the Plan Drawings.
4.10 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES
A. General
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install unintermptible power supplies as
shown on the drawings and specified herein. There are two UPSs required
to be furnished for this project, a single phase UPS shall be installed in
both the the PCP and RTU, UPS-2 shall be a stand-alone device that shall
supply three phase, 240 VAC to the HPU.
B. UPS (Single Phase)
1. Provide a line interactive UPS to protect equipment from line
disturbances, subcycle power losses, and power outages. In normal
operation, the a-c power shall be rectified to d-c power. The d-c power
from the charger shall maintain the batteries at full charge. When line
power fails, the inverter shall change the battery d-c power back to a-c
while it regulates and provides a sine wave power to the load. The load
shall automatically transfer to the inverter a-c line in less than 10
milliseconds. The UPS shall be complete with power indication, inverter
circuit breaker protection, power fail, and low battery alarm relay contacts.
These alarm contacts shall be wired to the PLC. Batteries shall be sealed
leakproof and maintenance free mounted internal to the UPS. UPS shall
come complete with connecting cables. The UPS shall be sized to power
the PLC and DC power supplies 2 hours minimum.
2. S ys tem Requirements
The UPS system shall have the following requirements:
a. InpuUOutput Voltage: 120-volt a-c, single phase, 60 Hz.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-24
b.
c.
d. Frequency Stability: +/- 0.5%.
Minimum Output Rating: 650 va.
Output Harmonic Distortion: 5% maximum at full load.
e.
f.
g.
h.
The UPS system shall be American Power Conversion or equal.
Overload Capacity: 125% for 10 minutes.
Maximum Charge Rate With Load: 20 amperes.
Minimum Run Time: 35 minutes at half load.
Minimum Recharge Time: 8 hours.
C. UPS-2 (3-Phase, 240 VAC)
1. Provide a 3-phase UPS to protect equipment fiom line disturbances,
subcycle power losses, and power outages. In normal operation, the a-c
power shall be rectified to d-c power. The d-c power from the charger
shall maintain the batteries at full charge. When line power fails, the
inverter shall change the battery d-c power back to a-c while it regulates
and provides a sine wave power to the load. The load shall automatically
transfer to the inverter a-c line in less than 10 milliseconds. The UPS shall
be complete with power indication, inverter circuit breaker protection,
power fail alarm relay contacts, and low battery alarm relay contacts.
These alarm contacts shall be wired to the PLC. Batteries shall be sealed
leakproof and maintenance free mounted internal to the UPS. UPS shall
come complete with connecting cables. The UPS shall be sized to power
the HPU panel 1 hour minimum upon failure of commercial power.
2. System Requirements
The UPS system shall have the following requirements:
1.
j.
Input/Output Voltage: 480 VAC 3-phase/240 VAC 3-phase, 60 Hz.
Minimum Output Rating: 4 KVA.
k.
1. Frequency Stability: +/- 1%.
m.
n.
0.
p.
Output Harmonic Distortion: 5% maximum at full load.
Overload Capacity: 1 10% for 10 minutes.
Maximum Charge Rate With Load: 20 amperes.
Minimum Run Time: 30 minutes at half load.
Minimum Recharge Time: 8 hours.
4.1 1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
1. General
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-25
The Contractor shall furnish, install, program, test, calibrate, fully configure and
place into operation Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) as specified herein.
The Contractor shall provide specified PLC, as standardized by Vallecitos Water
District, to match existing equipment.
The Contractor shall furnish the PLC panel and field instrumentation configured as
a distributed processing network of control and monitoring functions as shown on
the P&ID and described in the control descriptions in Part 4 SYSTEM CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS. The PLC shall be provided with all of the functions described
in this section. Distributed PLC panel, housing the PLC, shall manage all control
and monitoring functions as specified. Sensed data shall be obtained by the PLCs,
using instruments and controls interfaced to mechanical, utility systems, and other
systems as shown and specified.. Every connected analog output (AO), analog
input (AI), digital output (DO), digital input (DI), pulse accumulator (PA) input
and all other input and output devices and calculated software values in the system
shall represent a “point” where referred to in this specification. All control and
monitoring installations shall be connected to the system as specified. The
Contractor shall provide all hardware configured and sized to support all functions,
including future expansion.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary interconnecting cables, all accessories,
and all appurtenances as indicated herein or as required for proper operation of the
system. All major components of the system shall be of the same manufacturer.
All equipment shall be capable of tolerating and capable of riding through a power
interruption of 8 milliseconds or less without interruption of normal operation.
D. Construction
The PLC central processing unit (CPU) shall be of solid-state design. All CPU
operating logic shall be contained on plug-in modules for quick replacement.
Chassis wired logic is not acceptable. The controller shall be capable of operating
in a hostile industrial environment (i.e., heat, electrical transients, RFI, vibration,
etc.) without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering (up to 60 degrees C and
95 percent humidity).
E.
F.
Design
The PLC shall be furnished with J/O (input/output) modules suitable for the
interface with the new and existing field devices. The VO’s shall be 4-20 mA
signals for analog inputs and analog outputs and shall be 24 VDC and/or 120 VAC
signals for discrete inputs and discrete outputs. The PLC shall provide internal
fault analysis with a fail-safe mode and a dry contact output for remote location
alarming, and a local indicator on the PLC frame in the event of a fault in the PLC.
Central Processor
The central processor shall contain all the relays, timers, counters, number storage
registers, shift registers, sequencers, arithmetic capability, and comparators
necessary to perform the specified control functions. It shall be capable of
interfacing sufficient discrete inputs, analog inputs, discrete outputs, and analog
outputs to meet the specified requirements plus an additional 25 percent. excess
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-26
capacity. The power supply shall contain capacitors to provide orderly shutdown
in the event incoming power does not meet specifications. If this occurs, the
processor shall cease operation, forcing all outputs off. The processor shall have a
key type memory protect switch to prevent unauthorized program changes. The
central processor shall be 32-bit, minimum.
G. Memory
The programmable controller memory shall be Complementary Metal Oxide Semi-
conductor (CMOS) based memory with battery backup or Erasable Programmable
Read-only Memory (EPROM) based memory. The CMOS memory shall be a
minimum of 64K with sufficient battery backup to retain the program during
power interruptions of up to 1 year. An indicator shall show the status of the
batteries. A reference shall be available through the discrete outputs to alarm the
operator that the batteries should be changed.
The PLC shall be supplied with sufficient memory to implement the specified
control function plus a reserve capacity of 25 percent of the total provided. This
reserve capacity shall be totally free from any system use. The memory shall be
programmed in a multi-node configuration with multiple series or parallel contacts,
counters, timers, and arithmetic functions.
H. Controller
The controller shall be programmed in "ladder diagram" language. It shall be
easily reprogrammed with a portable programming unit. Two documented copies
of the operating program shall be furnished which shall allow direct, step-by-step,
reloading of the system program. Copies of this program shall be furnished in the
format used in the contract diagrams for conventional relay control systems. The
PLC shall be a 16-bit programmable logic controller microprocessor-based stand-
alone device. It shall be a process and logic controller designed for industrial
environments. It shall be capable of a mix of logic, timing, counting, computation,
library of preprogrammed subroutines, and PID loop control capabilities necessary
for the unit process application. The PLC shall utilize a
"prepackaged"/"preprogrammed" approach to functionality to allow its use by
personnel who have no formal training in digital equipment, digital
communications, or software programming.
I. Power Supply
The PLC power supply shall operate at the following:
1)
2)
3)
120V ac RMS plus or minus 15 percent continuously.
120V ac RMS plus or minus 30 percent maximum 30 seconds.
120V ac RMS plus or minus 100 percent maximum milliseconds.
Line spikes at 1 OOOV ac (5000 micro-seconds duration; 0.05 percent maximum
duty cycle).
J. Inputloutput Modules
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instmmentation and Control Systems
16700-27
K.
All I/O housings and I/O modules shall be of rugged construction with modules in
place. Sufficient input and sufficient output modules shall be provided with the
PLC to implement the specified control functions plus a reserve capacity of 25
percent of the total provided. PLC chassis shall be sized to accommodate the PLC
I/O specified plus a additional slots for expansion. I/O modules shall be the type
shown on the drawings.
1. Discrete Input Modules: Defined as dry contact closure inputs from
devices external to the programmable logic controller module. Input
modules shall be shielded fiom short time constant noise and 60-Hz
pickup. Individual inputs shall be optically isolated for low energy
common mode transients to 1500 volts peak from user's wiring or other
I/O Modules. The modules shall have LED lights to indicate individual
discrete input status. Discrete input module shall be Allen Bradley Model
Discrete Output Modules: Defined as contact closure outputs for ON/OFF
operation of devices external to the programmable logic controller module.
The output modules shall be fused (typically 5-amp at 1 15V ac) with
blown fuse indicator lights. The output modules shall be optically isolated
from inductively generated, normal mode and low energy, common mode
transients to 1500 volt peak. All output modules shall have LED lights to
indicate that the controller has cycled the output ON. Discrete output
module shall be Allen Bradley 1746-OW 16.
Analog Input Modules: Defined as analog inputs for 1 to 5 VDC or 4 to
20 mA dc signals, where an analog to digital conversion is performed and
the digital result is entered into the processor. New inputs shall be
provided for every scan. Analog inputs shall utilize 14 bit resolution with
a digital filter that is user adjustable. A unique filter value shall be tunable
on a channel-by-channel basis. The analog input module shall be Allen
Bradley 1746-N18
Analog Output Modules: Defined as analog output for 1 to 5 VDC or 4 20
mA dc signals, where a digital to analog conversion is performed and the
analog result is produced as an output. New outputs shall be produced on
every scan. Analog outputs shall utilize 14 bit resolution minimum. The
analog output module shall be Allen Bradley NO4 1.
1 746-N 16.
2.
3.
'
4.
Ratings and Specifications
The PLC and associated hardware shall have the following ratings:
Operating Temperature 0°C to 60°C
Humidity 5% to 95% relative (noncondensing)
q.
r.
The PLC shall meet the following specifications:
S. Operating Voltage 120 volts, 60 Hz
t. Maximum Scan Time 5.0 ms per 1K of ladder logic
The PLC shall be Allen Bradley SLC 503.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-28
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
PLC System Alarm
The PLC processor shall monitor the internal operation of the PLC system for
failures. If a failure is detected, the system shall shut down and freeze all inputs
and outputs in their last states until the error is cleared. As a minimum, the
following failures shall cause the PLC to shut down:
a. Memory failure.
b. Memory parity error.
c. UO cycle failure.
d. Operating system error.
PLC Software
Software shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide program to
meet the control descriptions contained herein. Contractor is responsible for
coordination with the Owner,Owner’s Representative and Vallecitos Water District
Representative to assure compliance with the control logic required to deliver a
complete and operatable , integrated control system.
Human Machine Interface (HMI)
The system shall include a touch screen, LCD interface that will provide a means
for the operator of the system to access, modify and provide additional control
capability through a password accessible operator interface. The HMI shall be of
the same manufacturer of the PLC specified herein. Complete and accurate
programming of the HMI shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be
coordinated by the Contractor with the Owner, the Owners Representative, and
Vallecitos Water District Representative.
The HMI shall be Allen Bradley Panelview 550.
Communications:
The PLC shall be equipped to communicate with a 900 Mhz Spread Spectrum
radio transceiver via DH Serial communications. The Contractor shall provide and
install the transceiver within the PCP and route antenna mast conduit fiom the PCP
to a wall mounted 2” rigid steel antenna mast. The transceiver shall be a UiliNeta
Series I1 WR as manufactured by Cellnet.
a
Antenna:
The Contractor shall provide and install a wall mounted exterior antenna. The
antenna shall be a 3dB gain omni-directional as manufactured by Antenex (Model
FG9023). Antenna coaxial cable shall be LMR 600 as manufactured by Times
Microwave.
4.12 PLC START-UP
Each PLC shall have start-up software that causes automatic commencement of operation
without human intervention, including start-up of all connected UO functions. A restart
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-29
prograrn based on detection of power failure shall he included in the software. Upon
restoration of power, the program shall restart all equipment and restore all loads to the
state at time of power failure, or to the state as commanded by time programs or other
overriding programs. The restart program shall include start time delays between
successive commands to prevent demand surges or overload trips. The start-up software
shall initiate operation of self-test diagnostic routines. If the data base and application
software are no longer resident or if the clock cannot be read, the PLC or SCS
conununications shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated
until the necessary repairs are made. If the database and application programs are
resident, the PLC and SCS communications shall resume operation after an adjustable
time delay of from 0 to 600 seconds. The sw-up sequence for each device shall include
a unique time delay setting when system operation is initiated.
4.13 REMOTE TELEMETRY UNIT
A. General
1. The Contractor shall furnish the Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU)
components specified herein. Such components shall be delivered to the
Owner for configuration by the Owner’s SCADA Consultant. The
Contractor shall provide specified RTU, as standardized by the Owner, to
match existing equipment. The Contractor shall mount the configured
equipment into the PCP upon receipt of the configured components and
shall make all field termination in cooperation with the SCADA
Consultant.
B. RTU components shall be manufactured and supplied by Opto 22 and shall include
as a minimum:
1.
2.
Qty 1- SNAP PS24 Power Supply (25 VDC to 5 VDC)
Qty 1- SNAP B8MC (8 channel Rack)
3. Qty 1- SNAP B3000 (Brain Board)
4. Qty 6 -SNAP ODC5 (DC Input Module)
5. Qty 2 -SNAP ODC5-I (4 channel isolated DC Output Module)
6. Qty 3 -SNAP AIMA-I (2 channel isolated Input Module)
The quantities listed above are minimum. The Contractor shall provide the
InputIOutput components required bv the plans with a minimum of 20 percent
spare for Digital Inputs and Outputs and 10 percent spare for Analog Inputs and
outputs.
4.14 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
A. Submersible Transducer Level Measuring Systems: The level measurement
system shall consist of a submersible transducer, electronic transmitter, support
cable, and interconnecting cable. The submersible transducer shall be the strain
gage type suitable for sensing pressure equivalent to the liquid level range
indicated. The transducer shall have titanium process wetted parts and shall be
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-30
furnished with a waterproof interconnecting cable. A corrosion resistant cable as
supplied by the manufacturer shall suspend the transducer from the pull box at the
top of the Input/Output structure. The cable shall be continuous, without splices
from the above referenced pull box to the transducer. The installation shall allow
easy removal of the transducer and cable assembly for maintenance purposes. The
electronic level transmitter shall be remote mounted and shall produce a 4-20 mA
DC signal linearly proportional to the level range indicated. The unit shall be
suitable for operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122 degrees Fahrenheit
with an accuracy off 0.5 percent of span. The transmitter shall be supplied with
Vent tube shall be fitted with a maintenance fiee aneroid bellows to prevent
moisture buildup within the vent tube. The submersible level transmitter shall be
Druck PTX Series, KPSI series 71 0 or equal.
0
- ____ FG-EEiSKcXres ~- - - supplieTteEnation enclosure with veXt7.E exposed. The
4.15 TT€LOR.INE ANALYZER
A. The Chlorine Residual Analyzer shall be an amperometric-based instrument with
field adjustable monitoring range from 0-0.1 to 0-20 mg/l. Analyzer shall be
capable of continuous sampling for Free Chlorine, Total Chlorine, Chlorine
Dioxide, and other oxidants. The analyzer shall be provided with a 4-20 mA
output, two relay cmtaets rated at 10 A each, 24 Vdc. Analyzer shall be equipped
with the ability to accept a 4-20mA input and a dry contact input to initiate
volumetric control of dosage. The Analyzer shall be as manufactured by Severn
Trent Service, Capital Controls model 1870E or approved equal.
- - ._ 4.16 FLUOROMETER ________ __ __ ~__ -
A. The Fluorometer shall be a microprocessor based instrument capable of
continuously monitoring concentration of chlorophyll in micrograms per liter by
means of a photodiode. The analyzer shall be capable of being powered by 120
VAC and shall be provided with an isolated 4-20 mA output relative to process
measurement. The Fluorometer shall be as manufactured by Turner Designs
model 6500-000 or approved equal.
4.17 PROCESS TUBING
A. Process tubing and associated connections shall be 3 16 SS. Tubing shall be a
.. - minimum _- . of __ 3/8 - inch O.D. All fittings and connections - __ shall - be threaded. - ~~-
4.18 IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. All primary sensors and field instruments shall have an identification tag meeting
the following requirements:
1. Tag numbers for primary sensors and field instruments shall be as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or embossed onto
a stainless steel tag which shall be fastened to the device housing with
stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws of appropriate size.
2.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-3 1
3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be
permanently attached to the device by a circlet of 1/16-inch. diameter
Part Description
a. Control Relavs
stainless-steel wire rope.
All primary sensors and field instruments mounted on or within panels 4.
Ouantity
4 each
shall have the stainless-steel identification tag installed so that the
numbers are easily visible to service personnel.
b. Fuses
C. Chorine Analyzer Buffer Solution
4.19 SPAREPARTS
2 each of each size and type
90 day supply
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-32
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the wiring installations and equipment installations, including connections
and interconnections as indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all
equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the plans.
1. Excavations and Backfills
a. Except where specifically provided to the contrary, the Contractor
shall perform all excavation necessary for the completion of the
Contract. This shall include without classification, the removal of
all materials of whatever nature encountered, including all
obstruction of any nature that would interfere with the proper
execution and completion of the work. Any and all excess or over-
excavation performed by the Contractor for any reason, except as
ordered in writing by the Owner or Owner’s representative,
whether or not due to fault of the Contractor, shall be at the
expense of the Contractor, Fill and compacting of fill for such
excess or over-excavation shall be placed and compacted at the
expense of the Contractor under the requirements of these
specifications.
Unless otherwise shown or prohibited by Federal or State safety
regulations, excavations for conduit shall be open-cut trenches.
The bottom of the trench shall have a minimum width equal to the
outside diameter of the conduit plus 6 inches. All conduit shall be
placed at a minimum depth of eighteen (1 8) inches. The
Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and material required
to cut, trench, backfill, and replace any concrete or asphalt
surfaces. Refer to Specification Section 025 1 1 and drawing C-3
for pavement replacement requirements.
Trenches shall be backfilled with select soil, fkee of solid materials
in excess of one half inch in diameter. Trenches shall be
compacted to 90 percent.
b.
C.
2. Concrete: Concrete shall be provided for electrical equipment
foundations, support foundations and conduit encasements as indicated, as
specified in the Section on Concrete.
3. Painting: Painting shall be provided for installations having unfinished
surfaces as specified in the Section on Painting. Field damaged factory
frnishes on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal in
quality and color to the original factor finish.
4. Existing Wiring
The Contractor shall remove existing abandoned electrical wiring
installations as necessary or required for existing conduit re-use for new
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-33
power wiring. Provide necessary conduit systems, wire, and connections
for a complete and operable system.
B. Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified factory-trained servicemen to
assist in the installation of the instrumentation and control system equipment when
required.
C, Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Locate devices, including accessories,
where they shall be accessible from grade, except as shown otherwise.
Mount equipment so that each device is rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in
such a manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation &om
heat, shock, and vibration; and freedom fiom interference with other equipment,
piping, and electrical work.
D.
E. Install equipment after heavy construction work adjacent to the equipment location
has been completed to the extent that there shall be no damage to the equipment,
primary sensor, or field instrument.
All items shall be mounted and anchored using stainless-steel hardware unless
otherwise noted. All mounting support hardware, straps, anchor bolts, etc., shall
be sized for equipment installations to meet seismic requirements.
F.
G. Conform to all applicable provisions of the NEMA standards, NEC and local,
state, and federal codes when installing the equipment and interconnecting wiring.
3.2 RACEWAYS
A. Provide all the cable tray and conduit installations, including outlet bodies, boxes,
gaskets, covers, fittings and supports to complete the raceway systems as shown on
plans and as required. Install ground conductors in all nonmetallic conduits.
1. Underground Installations: Conduits shall be schedule 40 PVC. All
conduit stub-ups and vaultlwet installations shall be PVC jacketed steel.
Exposed Installations: Outdoor installations shall be completed with PVC
coated rigid steel conduits with wrench tight connections. Indoor
installations shall be completed with rigid steel conduits with wrench tight
connections.
Flexible Conduits: Flexible conduits shall be liquidtight with fittings for
short tight connections (30-inches maximum) in equipment. A separate
ground conductor shall be installed in flexible conduit that does not have
the internal copper bonding conductor included by the manufacturer.
Threads: All steel conduit threads shall be coated with a corrosion
resisting lubricant, and the connections shall be made watertight. The
lubricant shall maintain the grounding continuity.
2.
3.
4.
5. Locknuts and Bushings: Locknuts and bushings shall be installed on the
threads of steel conduits that enter through close-fit openings in
enclosures.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-34
6. Sealing Bushings: The bushings shall be installed on the ends of exterior
conduit that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall provide a
watertight seal inside the conduit.
Penetrations: Penetrations through concrete for sleeves and conduits shall
be approved by the Owner. Submit the sizes, location and method for all
penetrations.
Tool Marks: Conduits and fittings that have tool marks shall be smoothed
and finished with paint that matches the original finish.
Furnished Equipment: Provide conduit installations as shown on the plans
and specified in other sections of the specification for furnished
equipment.
7.
8.
9.
3.3 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Outlet bodies, boxes, gaskets, covers, fittings and supports shall be installed as
indicated, specified and required.
1. Cast Metal: Cast metal outlet bodies, boxes, gasket covers and fittings
shall be connected to exposed galvanized steel conduits.
2. PVC Coated: Outlet bodies, boxes, gasketed covers and fittings shall be
PVC coated and connected to rigid plastic and PVC coated steel conduits.
3. Sheet Steel: Sheet steel boxes shall be provided with close-fit holes for
steel conduit connections. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided with
interchangeable conduit hubs for steel conduit connections as indicated.
Interchangeable Hubs: The hubs shall be installed in NEMA 3R
enclosures for rigid steel conduit connections. Cut close fitting holes in
the sheet steel enclosure and place the interchangeable hub in the opening.
Connect the hub on the conduit and make a tight connection to the
enclosure.
4.
3.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General
Conductors shall be completely installed and connected. Apply wire lubricant to
ease the pulling of conduits in conduits. Recommended pulling tensions shall not
be exceeded. Cable and wire pulls shall be continuous fiom end-to-end. Splicing
shall only be performed where required. Spliced and terminal connections shall be
made tight with spring and compression connectors. The connectors shall be
crimped with a tool that provided uniform and tight connections. Include all the
required wiring interconnections.
B. Splice Insulation
All splice connections shall be insulated as required with tight wraps of plastic
tape to prevent moisture intrusion and corrosion. Apply insulation putty to fill
irregularities and voids in splices. High and medium voltage cable splices shall be
completed as instructed by the cable manufacturer.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Jnstrumentation and Control Systems
16700-35
C.
D.
Furnished Equipment
Provide wiring installations a shown on the plans and specified in other sections of
the specifications for furnished equipment.
Fiber Optic Cable
The fiber optic cable shall be installed without field splices. Cable shall be run
continuously between connection centers. All new conduit runs shall be installed
as to not exceed the maximum bending radius of the fiber optic cable, as dehed
by the cable manufacturer. The manufacturers maximum bending radius and
tension strength shall be strictly observed through existing conduits/pull boxes.
3.5 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A.
B. Motors
Install all the wiring and control equipment as indicated, specified and required.
1. Motors shall be provided with the driven mechanical equipment.
C. Wiring
1. The wiring installations shall be complete. Include all the required wiring
interconnections between the motor magnetic starters, and between the
starters and the instrument control panels. Provide motor frame conduit
connection boxes as required. Be certain that all wiring connections
provide the proper motor rotation.
Provide power, control, alarm and grounding installations for all motors as
indicated and required.
Record the full load current to each motor, and the overload relay rating in
each motor starter for the certified data submittal.
2.
3.
4. Provide the wiring for heaters in the motor frames and the required control
to de-energize the heater when the motor operates.
Provide the required wiring for all control equipment that shall be
furnished and installed by other sections of the specifications.
5.
D. Relays
1. Provide control relays as required to prevent simultaneous start-up of
motors after power failure.
3.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Install all the overcurrent protective equipment as indicated, specified and
required.
B. Metal Enclosures
The enclosures for individual equipment shall be constructed to satisfy the
condition in the location where they shall be installed.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-36
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
C. Thermal and Magnetic Trip Settings, for circuit breakers shall assure the required
circuit protection with thermal magnetic trip settings.
D. Fuses
Provide fuses that have the current and voltage ratings to protect the circuits shown
on the drawings.
SUPPORTS
A. Install the required structural channels, brackets, stanchions, U-bolts, clamps,
anchors, hangers, fittings and other hardware to securely attach and support all the
equipment and conduits.
SEISMIC ANCHORING RESTRAINTS
A. All electrical equipment shall be securely anchored. Anchoring shall have the
capability of withstanding seismic forces per the 1989 California Code of
Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Section 2312, Seismic Zone 4, with 2~0.4, Cp=l .O,
and 1~1.5. Cp may be two-thirds of the value specified for components mounted
on foundations at grade or on floor slabs on earth grade.
Install equipment anchors in accordance with the final shop drawing and
manufacturer's recommendations. Properly torque all bolts to the required values.
B.
HANDHOLES AND PULLBOXES
A. Precast concrete handholes and pull boxes shall be installed in excavations as
shown on the drawings and as required.
B.
C.
Accessories shall be installed, which include pull eyes and required hardware.
Covers shall be installed on all handholes and pull boxes.
CHECKING, ADJUSTING AND TESTING
A. Provide the required labor and equipment, and all checking, adjusting, and testing
operation on the electrical installation in accordance to Section 12, Startup and
Field Testing.
B. Manufacturer' Supervision and Field Installation Check
1. Where specified or required, electrical equipment manufacturer shall
furnish the services of an authorized representative especially trained and
experienced in the installation of his equipment to (1) supervise the
equipment installation in accordance with the approved submittals and
manufacturer's instruction, (2) be present when the equipment is first put
into operation, (3) inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and approve the
installation, (4) repeat the inspection, checking, and adjusting until all
trouble or defects are corrected and the equipment installation and
operation are acceptable, and (5) prepare and submit the specified
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-37
Manufacturer' Certified Report. Include all costs for representatives
services in the Contract Price.
C. Wiring Check
1. All wire terminations shall be checked to assure tight connections.
D. Adjust
1. Adjust all time delay relays and other devices so the controls shall operate
in the indicated or specified sequence.
E. WiringTests
1. Wiring tests shall be performed to detect wrong connections, short circuits,
continuity and ground. Insulation tests shall be made with a hand crank
test instrument on all cables and conductors. Power feeders and branch
conductors shall be tested phase to phase and phase to ground. Phase to
ground tests on shielded cable shall mean "conductor to shield". Voltage
shall be applied and removed in a low, even manner, and the conductors
shall be grounded for at least one minute after the voltage is removed to
insure that no charge remains. Test voltage and application time for the
various cables and conductors shall be submitted to the owner. Correct
any defects in the wiring systems.
F. Motor Test
1.
. 2.
Perfom tests as indicated, specified and required.
Factory test all motors 100 HP and larger complete, including but not
limited to the following tests and submit certified data.
a. No load running current.
b. Locked rotor current.
C. Full load heat run.
d. High potential test.
e. Winding resistance.
f. Bearing inspection.
g-
h. Service factor heat run.
1. Percent slip.
j- Breakdown torque.
k. Locked rotor torque.
1.
m.
n.
Locked and idle saturation curves.
Efficiency at full, 314 and 112 load.
Power factor at full, 314 and 112 load.
Balanced to 0.001 inches total amplitude.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-38
0. Noise test.
p. Tests (except locked rotor current) shall be made at full voltage
and rated frequency.
G. Equipment Tests
1. Equipment tests shall be performed on all equipment as indicated and
directed by the manufacturer.
H. Supply Voltage Tests
1. Test the supply voltage while the normal plant loads are operating, if the
voltage is not within normal limits (plus or minus one percent, notify the
power company and requires a voltage correction.
I. Operational Demonstrations
1. Operational demonstrations shall be in accordance with Section 12.
J. Final Operation Tests
1.
2. Testing Materials
Final operational tests shall be in accordance with Section 12.
Furnish instruments, recorders, gauge, materials, and power for tests.
3. Testing Methods -
Operate systems continuously 24 hours a day under constant inspection of
trained operators. Induce simulated alarm and distressed operating
conditions, and test controls and protective devices for correct operation in
adjusting system functions or causing system shutdown. Perform other
final operation tests as may be required under other sections of the
specifications.
4. Defects
Immediately correct all defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests. Use
new ports and materials as required and approved. Add the interruption
time for corrective work to the specified total test period.
5. Test Records
Furnish approved instruments, gages, chart recorders, and other devices as
required. Continuously record all function and operation parameters
during entire test period.
3.11 CLEANUP
A. Remove all rubbish from site that has resulted from the electrical work. Work
areas shall be kept clear of rubbish as work progresses.
B. Exterior and interior surfaces of fixtures and equipment shall be vacuumed and
wiped clean. Use special cleaning solvent if necessary to restore finishes to
original condition.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements 'Jnstrumentation and Control Systems
16700-39
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements
-- End of Section -
Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-40
PART 4 - SYSTEM CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
4.1
4.2
4.3
GENERAL
A. The control descriptions and drawings comprise the functional design criteria of
the control system. The Contractor shall coordinate all installation and testing with
the Owner, Owner’s Representative, and Process Eq~pment Suppliers to
completely verify all manual and automatic modes of operation.
B. The following control descriptions narratively describe the control logic and
monitoring capabilities to be configured. The RTU and RTU communications
shall be configured by the Owner’s SCADA Consultant. The individual control
descriptions are grouped by like controls established in the drawings,
RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Work of the following sections applies to the Work of this Section. Other
sections of the specifications, not referenced below shall also apply to the extent
required for proper perfonnance of the Work.
1.
2.
Section XXXX - Chlorination equipment
Section 13300 - Functional Description
COMMON CONTROL AND MONITORING LOOPS
A#
B.
C.
D.
E.
General
1. The following loops are commonly used throughout the System. The
Contractor shall verify the Contract Drawings to verify applicable loops.
Level Monitoring
1. The new level transmitter shall provide an analog signal to be scaled and
displayed on the front of the PCP. The level signal shall be also
transmitted to the RTU as a 4-20 current loop.
Power Monitoring
1.
2.
A station power fail signal received from each UPS shall be transmitted to
the the associated PCP or RTU.
A low battery / UPS fault status signal generated by either UPS shall be
transmitted to the RTU.
Valve Position Monitoring
1. Each valve shall be equipped with prove opened and prove closed limit
switches which shall be transmitted to the PCP and RTU via the HPU.
HPU and HydroBurst Control Monitoring
1. Failure alarms shall be generated by the HPU and HydroBurst control
panels and shall be transmitted to the PCP and RTU for SCADA
monitoring.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-41
4.4
F. Compressor Monitoring
1. Compressor status shall be monitored (running, off or failed) and shall be
transmitted to the PCP and RTU for SCADA monitoring.
CHLORINELFLUOROMETER MONITORING AND CONTROL
Part 1 General
1.1 Work of this Section
This Section presents the functional description for the operation and
control of the algae monitoring and control system (chlorination system)
and the reservoir de-stratification system (aeration system). This
description aims to provide the CONTRACTOR with a complete
understanding as to how the proposed systems will operate, and a guide
for the provision of all instrumentation, controls, and programming
required for the implementation of these systems.
1.2 RRlated Sections
A. The Work of the following sections applies to the Work of this Section.
Other sections of the specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply
to the extent required for proper performance of the Work.
1.3 Chlorination System
A. Overview- A chlorine feed system is provided to aid in the control of algae
in the reservoir. The system is comprised of the following items:
a. A recirculation system, which provides reservoir water for sampling
and chemical mixing
b. Water quality analyzers to monitor and provide input to the algae
control system on reservoir water quality,
c. A sodium hypochlorite injection system, which provide the algaecide
agent. An aeration system, which main purpose is to ensure reservoir
de-stratification (described in 1.61, provides for the mixing of the
chemical stream into the reservoir.
B. Control System Operation
1. Recirculation system- Water is drawn from the reservoir by a two-
submersible-pump system mounted in a floating pontoon anchored
near the middle of the reservoir. The recycled stream is pumped into a
pipeline that enters the Control Building and returns back to the
reservoir where it loops around the reservoir bottom. A series of
nozzles mounted along the pipe loop ensures an even distribution of
the recycled stream into the reservoir.
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-42
2.
3.
Recirculation Pumps
1.
.. 11.
... 111.
Pump Selection- The local control panel shall have a two-
position manual selector to select the active (duty) pump and
inactive (stand-by) pump. Pump selection shall be reported to
the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU).
Pump Controls- The recirculation pumps shall have
Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) switches. The running status of the pump
and the position of HOA switches shall be reported to the PCP
and RTU. The “Hand” mode of operation shall bypass the RTU
and shall allow continued system operation in the event of main
control system failure or maintenance. The “Hand” mode shall
also bypass most pump protection features.
Pump Failure- In the event that high-temperature is detected by
the sensor devices built-in the pump motors a “Pump Failure’’
alarm shall be displayed in the local control panel, the PCP and
RTU. In the auto mode this event shall stop the operating (duty)
pump and call on operation the inactive (stand-by) pump. The
pump with a “Pump Failure” condition will not run in Auto
mode until the “Pump Failure” condition is cleared, which shall
only be achieved by manually acknowledging the alarm and
turning the HOA switch to “Off and back to “Auto”. A “Pump
failure” condition shall not stop a pump operated in manual
(“Hand”).
Water Quality Analyzers - An in line fluorometer and an in-line
chlorine residual analyzer shall be tapped in the recirculation line
inside the Control Building for water sampling and testing.
i.
.. 11.
Chlorine analyzer - A constant flow shall be diverted to the
analyzer as required by the instrument manufacturer to prevent
fouling of the cell electrodes. Analysis data shall be reported in
regular intervals (initially set to 15 minutes) to the PCP and
RTU for monitoring and logging. Common alarm signal
generated by the instrument shall be reported to the control
panel and PCP and RTU. Sampling flow shall be drained to a
20-gallons drum fitted with a high level switch. High water
alarm shall be annunciated at the control panel and PCP and
RTU. The setting of the high water level shall be set as to
provide the continuous operation of the analyzer for over 48
hours without spilling.
Fluorometer- A sample line shall tee off the recirculation line,
run through the fluorometer and return to the recirculation line.
Ball valves and check valves shall be installed as necessary in
both the sample and recirculation line that bypasses the
fluorometer, to ensure that the analyzer is fed with sufficient
and continuous flow as required by the instrument
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
1670043
manufacturer. Analysis data shall be reported in regular
intervals (initially set to 15 minutes) to the PCP and RTU for
monitoring and logging. Common alarm signal generated by the
instrument shall be reported to the PCP and RTU
i. An electronic metering pump draws sodium hypochlorite from
two tanks and injects the solution in the recirculation line. The
system is provided with a back pressure sustaining valve on the
pump outlet to prevent flow by gravity through the vessels when
the pump is off. The pump has an HOA switch, and the status of
the HOA switch and the running status of the pump shall be
displayed by the SCADA control system. In all modes of
operation, the proportion of disinfectant drawn from each tank
shall be adjusted manually by throttling (or closing) the
isolation valve of each vessel. In the Auto mode of operation, the
odoff status of the pump shall be governed by the control
system.
ii. The control system shall operate to maintain the chlorine
residual in the reservoir within two distinct ranges depending
on the fluorometer readings. If the fluorometer reading is below
the selected threshold, indicating low algae biomass, the
chlorine residual shall be kept within the lower range, starting
to inject chlorine when the chlorine residual falls below the
range and stopping if it rises above. Similarly, if high algae
biomass is detected, the reservoir chlorine residual shall be kept
in the higher range, injecting chlorine as the chlorine residual
falls below the upper range and stopping when it reaches its
upper limit. All these set-points shall be available for
modification by the operator. Initial set-points shall be as
follows:
4. Sodium hypochlorite system-
Algae biomass threshold = 100pgLchlorophyll A
Lower Chlorine Residual range: Lower bound= 1 mg/L; Upper
bound = 2 m&
Upper Chlorine Residual range: Lower bound= 2 mgL; Upper
bound = 3 mg/L
With the initial values the control system shall operate as
follows:
- ~~ ~~ Chemical Pump Status ON OFF
If Chlorophyll A <lOOpg
If Chlorophyll A >=lOOpg
And Clz <=1 mg/l
And Clz <=2 mg/l
And Clz >=2 mg/l
And Clz >=3 mg/l
iii. Interlocks -Chemical pump operation shall be interlocked with
the aeration system such that the aeration system shall be ON
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements Instrumentation and Control Systems
16700-44
or turn ON at the start of the chemical feed pump. If a
fluorometer or chlorine analyzer failure is reported the system
shall shut off.
iv. The control system shall also accept and display a maximum
run time duration, varying between 0.0 and 48.0 hours. The
actual run time for each active duration shall also be displayed.
In the Auto mode, when the actual run time reaches the
maximum run time duration, an "Excessive Run Duration"
alarm will be displayed by the control system, preventing
further automatic operation of the metering pump until
manually reset as a fimction within the control system.
1.4 Aeration System
Overview- An aeration system is provided to prevent the formation of reservoir
stratification and to assist with the mixing of the chlorine in the reservoir. A
duplex reciprocating blower will feed air into a perforated pipe header that loops
around the bottom of the lake. The blower has an HOA switch, and the status of the
HOA switch and the running status of the blower shall be reported to and displayed
by the PCP and RTU. In the auto mode the system will operate under a timer
adjustable from 0 to 24 hours and a clock. The control system shall admit up to time
entries setting the time at which it shall start. When the timer is set to 0 the
aeration system shall only respond to the call from the chlorination system. If set to
24 hours, it shall run continuously. Any blower failure shall be reported to the PCP
and RTU.
-- End of Section --
Mahr Reservoir Remedial Improvements lnstrumentation and Control Systems
16700-45
-
STATE WATER RESOURCES CONTROL BOARD
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
1 - STATE WAGE RATE CLAUSES (Facilities Plan Approval after June 18, 1998, Federal Wage Rates are
not required)
Pursuant to Sections 1720 et seq., and 1770 et seq., of the California Labor Code, the successful bidder shall pay
not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of the California Department of
Industrial Relations for public works projects of more than one thousand dollars ($1,000). Copies of such
prevailing rate or per diem wage are on file at lCitv of Cralsbad), which copies shall be made available to any
interested party on request. The successful bidder shall post a copy of such determinations at each job site.
The successful bidder intending to use a craft or classification not shown on the prevailing rate determinations
may be required to pay the rate of the craft or classification most closely related to it.
2- LABOR CODE SECTION 1776
COMPLETE PAYROLL RECORDS; CERTIFIED AND AVAILABLE
(a) Each contractor and subcontractor shall keep accurate payroll records, showing the name, address, social
security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual
per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by him or her in
connection with the public work. Each payroll record shall contain or be verified by a written declaration that it is
made under penalty of perjury, stating both of the following: (1) The information contained in the payroll record is
true and correct. (2) The employer has complied with the requirements of Sections 1771,18 1 1, and 18 15 for any
work performed by his or her employees on the public works project.
-
(b) The payroll records enumerated under subdivision (a) shall be certified and shall be available for inspection at
all reasonable hours at the principal office of the contractor on the following basis: (1) A certified copy of an
employee's payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to the employee or his or her
authorized representative on request.
hished upon request to a representative of the body awarding the contract, the Division of Labor Standards
Enforcement, and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations.
(3) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available upon request by
the public for inspection or for copies thereof. However, a request by the public shall be made through either the
body awarding the contract, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards
Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided pursuant to paragraph (2), the requesting
party shall, prior to being provided the records, reimburse the costs of preparation by the contractor, subcontractors,
and the entity through which the request was made. The public shall not be given access to
the records at the principal office of the contractor.
(2) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available for inspection or
(c) The certified payroll records shall be on forms provided by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement or
shall contain the same information as the forms provided by the division.
(d) A contractor or subcontractor shall file a certified copy of the records enumerated in subdivision (a) with the
entity that requested the records within 10 days after receipt of a written request.
(e) Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or any
public agency by the awarding body, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards
.-
BP-14
Issue Date: November 7,2003
c
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated to prevent disclosure of an individual's name, address, and social
security number. The name and address of the contractor awarded the contract or the subcontractor performing the
contract shall not be marked or obliterated. Any copy of records made available for inspection by, or furnished to, a
joint labor-management committee established pursuant to the federal Labor Management Cooperation Act of 1978
(Section 175a of Title 29 of the United States Code) shall be marked or obliterated only to prevent disclosure of an
individual's name and social security number. A joint labor management committee may maintain an action in a
court of competent jurisdiction against an employer who fails to comply with Section 1774. The court may award
restitution to an employee for unpaid wages and may award the joint labor management committee reasonable
attorney's fee and costs incurred in maintaining the action. An action under this subdivision may not be based on the
employer's misclassification of the craft of a worker on its certified payroll records. Nothing in this subdivision
limits any other available remedies for a violation of this chapter.
(0 The contractor shall inform the body awarding the contract of the location of the records enumerated under
subdivision (a), including the street address, city and county, and shall, within five working days, provide a notice of
a change of location and address.
(g) The contractor or subcontractor shall have 10 days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of a written notice
requesting the records enumerated in subdivision (a). In the event that the contractor or subcontractor fails to
comply within the 10-day period, he or she shall, as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf
the contract is made or awarded, forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each
worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the
Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due. A
contractor is not subject to a penalty assessment pursuant to this section due to the failure of a subcontractor to
comply with this section.
(h) The body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract stipulations to effectuate this section.
(i) The director shall adopt rules consistent with the California Public Records Act, (Chapter 3.5 (commencing with
Section 6250), Division 7, Title 1, Government Code) and the Information Practices Act of 1977, (Title 1.8
(commencing with Section 1798), Part 4, Division 3, Civil Code) governing the release of these records, including
the establishment of reasonable fees to be charged for reproducing copies of records required by this section.
3- LABOR CODE SECTION 1777.5
EMPLOYMENT OF PROPERLY REGISTERED APPRENTICES
(a) Nothing in this chapter shall prevent the employment of properly registered apprentices upon public works.
(b) Every apprentice employed upon public works shall be paid the prevailing rate of per diem wages for
apprentices in the trade to which he or she is registered and shall be employed only at the work
of the craft or trade to which he or she is registered.
approved by the Chief of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and who are parties to written apprentice
agreements under Chapter 4 (commencing with Section 3070) of Division 3 are eligible to be employed at the
apprentice wage rate on public works. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance with
either of the following:
(c) Only apprentices, as defined in Section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeship standards that have been
(1) The apprenticeship standards and apprentice agreements under which he or she is training.
(2) The rules and regulations of the California Apprenticeship Council.
(d) When the contractor to whom the contract is awarded by the state or any political subdivision, in performing
any of the work under the contract, employs workers in any apprenticeable craft or trade, the contractor shall employ
apprentices in at least the ratio set forth in this section and may apply to any apprenticeship program in the craft or
trade that can provide apprentices to the site of the public work for a certificate approving the contractor under the
apprenticeship standards for the employment and training of apprentices in the area or industry affected. However,
the decision of the apprenticeship program to approve or deny a certificate shall be subject to review by the
Administrator of Apprenticeship. The apprenticeship program or programs, upon approving the contractor, <-
BP-15
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
shall arrange for the dispatch of apprentices to the contractor. A contractor covered by an apprenticeship program's
standards shall not be required to submit any additional application in order to include additional public works
contracts under that program.
"Apprenticeable craft or trade," as used in this section, means a craft or trade determined as an apprenticeable
occupation in accordance with rules and regulations prescribed by the California Apprenticeship Council. As used
in this section, "contractor" includes any subco.rrtractor under a contractor who performs any public
works not excluded by subdivision (0).
information to an applicable apprenticeship program that can supply apprentices to the site of the public work. The
information submitted shall include an estimate of journeyman hours to be performed under the contract, the number
of apprentices proposed to be employed, and the approximate dates the apprentices would be employed. A copy of
this information shall also be submitted to the awarding body if requested by the awarding body. Within 60 days
after concluding work on the contract, each contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the awarding body, if
requested, and to the apprenticeship program a verified statement of the journeyman and apprentice hours performed
on the contract. The information under this subdivision shall be public. The apprenticeship programs shall retain
this information for 12 months.
(e) Prior to commencing work on a contract for public works, every contractor shall submit contract award
(0 The apprenticeship program that can supply apprentices to the area of the site of the public work shall ensure
(g) The ratio of work performed by apprentices to journeymen employed in a particular craft or trade on the public
equal employment and affirmative action in apprenticeship for women and minorities.
work may be no higher than the ratio stipulated in the apprenticeship standards under which the apprenticeship
program operates where the contractor agrees to be bound by those standards, but, except as otherwise provided in
this section, in no case shall the ratio be less than one hour of apprentice work for every five hours of journeyman
work.
(h) This ratio of apprentice work to journeyman work shall apply during any day or portion of a day when any
journeyman is employed at the jobsite and shall be computed on the basis of the hours worked during the day by
journeymen so employed. Any work performed by a journeyman in excess of eight hours per day or 40 hours per
week shall not be used to calculate the ratio. The contractor shall employ apprentices for the number of hours
computed as above before the end of the contract or, in the case of a subcontractor, before the end of the
subcontract. However, the contractor shall endeavor, to the greatest extent possible, to employ apprentices during
the same time period that the journeymen in the same craft or trade are employed at the jobsite. Where an hourly
apprenticeship ratio is not feasible for a particular craft or trade, the Chief of the Division of Apprenticeship
Standards, upon application of an apprenticeship program, may order a minimum ratio of not less than one
apprentice for each five journeymen in a craft or trade classification.
upon the issuance of the approval certificate, or that has been previously approved for an apprenticeship program in
the craft or trade, shall employ the number of apprentices or the ratio of apprentices to journeymen stipulated in the
applicable apprenticeship standards, but in no event less than the I-to-5 ratio required by subdivision (g). 6) Upon proper showing by a contractor that he or she employs apprentices in a particular craft or trade in the state
on all of his or her contracts on an annual average of not less than one hour of apprentice work for every five hours
of labor performed by journeymen, the Chief of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards may grant a certificate
exempting the contractor from the 1-to-5 hourly ratio, as set forth in this section for that craft or trade.
(k) An apprenticeship program has the discretion to grant to a participating contractor or contractor association a
certificate, which shall be subject to the approval of the Administrator of Apprenticeship, exempting the contractor
from the 1-to-5 ratio set forth in this section when it finds that any one of the following conditions is met:
(1) Unemployment for the previous three-month period in the area exceeds an average of 15 percent.
(2) The number of apprentices in training in the area exceeds a ratio of 1 to 5.
(3) There is a showing that the apprenticeable craft or trade is replacing at least one-thirtieth of its journeymen
annually through apprenticeship training, either on a statewide basis or on a local basis.
(4) Assignment of an apprentice to any work performed under a public works contract would create a condition
that would jeopardize his or her life or the life, safety, or property of fellow employees or the public at large, or the
specific task to which the apprentice is to be assigned is of a nature that training cannot be provided by a
journeyman.
(1) When an exemption is granted pursuant to subdivision (k) to an organization that represents contractors in a
specific trade from the 1-to-5 ratio on a local or statewide basis, the member contractors shall not be required to
submit individual applications for approval to local joint apprenticeship committees, if they are already covered by
the local apprenticeslup standards.
-
(i) A contractor covered by this section that has agreed to be covered by an apprenticeship program's standards
-
BP-16
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
(m) (1) A contractor to whom a contract is awarded, who, in performing any of the work under the contract,
employs journeymen or apprentices in any apprenticeable craft or trade shall contribute to the California
Apprenticeship Council the same amount that the director determines is the prevailing amount of apprenticeship
training contributions in the area of the public works site. A contractor may take as a credit for payments to the
council any amounts paid by the contractor to an approved apprenticeship program that can supply apprentices to the
site of the public works project. The contractor may add the amount of the Contributions in computing
his or her bid for the contract.
Council shall distribute training contributions received by the council under this subdivision, less the expenses of the
Division of Apprenticeship Standards for administering this subdivision, by making grants to approved
apprenticeship programs for the purpose of training apprentices. The funds shall be distributed as follows:
area for which the training contributions were made to the council, a grant to that program shall be made.
geographic area for which the training contributions were made to the council, the grant shall be divided among
those programs based on the number of apprentices registered in each program.
expenses of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards.
Training Contribution Fund, which is hereby created in the State Treasury. Notwithstanding Section 13340 of the
Government Code, all money in the Apprenticeship Training Contribution Fund is hereby continuously
appropriated for the purpose of carrying out this subdivision and to pay the expenses of the Division of
Apprenticeship Standards.
The stipulations shall fuc the responsibility of compliance with this section for all apprenticeable occupations with
the prime contractor.
-
(2) At the conclusion of the 2002-03 fiscal year and each fiscal year thereafter, the California Apprenticeship
(A) If there is an approved multiemployer apprenticeship program serving the same craft or trade and geographic
(B) If there are two or more approved multiemployer apprenticeship programs serving the same craft or trade and
(C) All training contributions not distributed under subparagraphs (A) and (B) shall be used to defi-ay the future
(3) All training contributions received pursuant to this subdivision shall be deposited in the Apprenticeship
(n) The body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract stipulations to effectuate this section.
(0) This section does not apply to contracts of general contractors or to contracts of specialty contractors not
c- bidding for work through a general or prime contractor when the contracts of general contractors or those specialty
contractors involve less than thirty thousand dollars ($30,000).
(p) All decisions of an apprenticeship program under this section are subject to Section 308 1.
4- LABOR CODE SECTION 18 10
DEFINITION: A LEGAL DAY'S WORK
Eight hours labor constitutes a legal day's work in all cases where the same is performed under the authority of any
law of this State, or under the direction, or control, or by the authority of any ofticer of this State acting in his official
capacity, or under the direction, or control or by the authority of any municipal corporation, or of any officer thereof. A
stipulation to that effect shall be made a part of all contracts to which the State or any municipal corporation therein is a
Party-
5- LABOR CODE SECTION 18 13
PENALTY FOR OVERTIME ON ANY PUBLIC WORK CONTRACT
The contractor or subcontractor shall, as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the contract
is made or awarded, forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25) for each worker employed in the execution of the contract by
the respective contractor or subcontractor for each calendar day during which the worker is required or permitted to
work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the
provisions of this article. In awarding any contract for public work, the awarding body shall cause to be inserted in
the contract a stipulation to this effect. The awarding body shall take cognizance of all violations of this article
committed in the course of the execution of the contract, and shall report them to the Division of Labor Standards
Enforcement.
BP-17
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
6- LABOR CODE SECTION 18 15
c MINIMUM OVERTIME PAY
Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 18 10 to 18 14, inclusive, of this code, and notwithstanding any stipulation
inserted in any contract pursuant to the requirements of said sections, work performed by employees of contractors in
excess of 8 hours per day, and 40 hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon public work upon compensation
for all hours worked in excess of 8 hours per day at not less than one and one-half (1.5) times the basic rate of pay.
7- LABOR CODE SECTION 1860
CONTRACT PROVISION
The awarding body shall cause to be inserted in every public works contract a clause providing that, in accordance
with the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code, every contractor will be required to secure the payment of
compensation to his employees.
8- LABOR CODE SECTION 18 6 1
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION TO LABOR CODE SECTION 3700
Each contractor to whom a public works contract is awarded shall sign and file with the awarding body the following
certification prior to performing the work of the contract: “I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor
Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake
self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before
commencing the performance of the work of this contract.‘’
9- CULTURAL RESOURCES
In accordance with the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966, (16 U.S.C. 470), and State statutes regarding - the unexpected discovery of human remains, the following procedures are implemented to insure historic
preservation and fair compensation to the Contractor for delays attendant to cultural resources investigations.
In the event potential Historical, Archeological, or Cultural Resources (herein after cultural resources) are
discovered during subsurface excavations at the site of construction, the following procedures shall be instituted:
1) The Engineer shall issue a “Stop Work Order” directing the Contractor to cease all construction operations at
the location of such potential cultural resources find. If the find includes human remains, the County Coroner must
be contacted immediately.
2) Such “Stop Work Order” shall be effective until such time as a qualified archeologist can be called to
evaluate the importance of these potential cultural resources and make recommendations to the State Water
Resources Control Board Cultural Resources Officer (CRO). Any “Stop Work Order” shall contain the following:
a) A clear description of the work to be suspended;
b) Any instructions regarding issuance of hrther orders by the Contractor for material services;
c) Guidance as the action to be taken on subcontracts;
d) Any suggestions to the Contractor as to minimization of his costs;
e) Estimated duration of the temporary suspension.
If the archeologist in consultation with the SWRCB CRO determines that the potential find is an important resource
and warrants further investigation and/or mitigation, the Engineer shall extend the duration of the “Stop Work
Order” in writing, and the Contractor shall suspend work at the location of the find.
Equitable adjustment of the construction contract shall be made in the following manner:
1) Time Extension
If the work temporarily suspended is on the “critical path”, the total number of days for which the suspension is in
effect shall be added to the number of allowable contract days.
IC
,
BP-18
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
If a portion of work at the time of such suspension is not on the “critical path”, but subsequently becomes work on
the critical path, the allowable contract time will be computed fkom the date such work is classified as on the critical
path.
-
2) Additional Comuensation
If, as a result of a suspension of the work, the Contractor sustains a loss which could not have been avoided by his
judicious handling of forces, and equipment, or redirection of forces or equipment to perform other work on the
contract, there shall be paid to the Contractor an amount as determined by the Engineer to be fair and reasonable
compensation for the Contractor’s actual loss in accordance with the following:
a) Idle Time of Equipment
Compensation for equipment idle time will be determined on a force account (time and materials) basis, and shall
include the cost of extra moving of equipment and rental loss. The right-of-way delay factor for each classification
of equipment shown in the California Department of Transportation publication entitled, Eauiument Rental Rates
and the General Prevailing Wage Rates, will be applied to any equipment rental rates.
b) Idle Time of Labor
Compensation for idle time of workers will be determined by the Engineer as “Labor” less any actual productivity
factor of this portion’ of the work force.
c) Increased Costs of Labor and Materials
Increased costs of labor and materials will be compensated only to the extent such increase was in fact caused by the
suspension, as determined by the Engineer.
Compensation for actual loss due to idle time of either equipment or labor shall not include markup for profit.
The hours for which compensation will be paid will be the actual normal working time during which such delay
condition exists, but will in no case exceed eight hours in any one day.
The days for which compensation will be paid shall be full or partial calendar days, excluding Saturdays, Sundays,
and legal holidays, during the existence of such delay.
-
Issue Date: November 7,2003
BP-19
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilelplate
/I
10 - COMPLIANCE GUIDELINES FOR SRF LOAN PROGRAM MBE/WBE
CONTRACT PROVISIONS OF THE
STATE WATER RESOURCES CONTROL BOARD (SWRCB)
DIVISION OF FINANCIAL, ASSISTANCE
RELATIVE TO THE UTILIZATION OF
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE) AND
WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (WBE)
ON CLEAN WATER PROGRAM CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS IN CALIFORNIA
This document and attachments shall be included by the owner as a contract provision for all construction contracts
exceeding $10,000.
Compliance with the requirements of this document and attachments satisfies the MBE/WBE requirements of the U.
S. Environmental Protection Agency and the SWRCB. This document supersedes any conflicting requirements.
Failure to take the five (5) affirmative steps listed under Requirements, Section A, prior to bid opening and to submit
“Minority Business EnterpriseNomen Business Enterprise Information” (Form 4) with the bid shall cause the bid to
be rejected as a non-responsive bid.
Table of Contents
Section Description
1
r
Approval to Award (ATA) Process .................................................................. BP-21
2 Prime Contractor & Recipient Responsibilities ................................................ BP-2 1
3 “Good Faith” Effort Process ............................................................................. BP-22
4 Non-Governmental Local Contacts .................................................................. BP-24
5 Reporting Requirements .................................................................................. BP-25
.. 6 Definitions.. ....................................................................................................... BP-2 5
7 MBENBE Forms ............................................................................................. BP-27
Form 1: “Good Faith” Effort List of Contractors Solicited ........................................................ BP-28
Form 2: “Good Faith” Effort Bids Received List ....................................................................... BP-29
Form 3: Contractor Self Certification ......................................................................................... BP-30
Form 4: Prime Contractor/Recipient Selected MBE/WBEs ........................................................ BP-3 1
Form 5: Sample Summary of Bids Received from Subcontractors ........................................... BP-32
Form 6: Positive Effort Certification .......................................................................................... BP-33
BP-20
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
-.- Section 1: APPROVAL TO AWARD (ATA) PROCESS
REQUIRED FOR STATE REVOLVING FUND LOANS
DIVISION OF FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE @FA)
The purpose of this document is to provide a summary of the MBE/WBE “good faith” effort for SRF Loan
contractors and recipients. Section 1 provides the contractor and recipient with a brief overview of the ATA
process. The MBE/WBE “good faith” effort is one element of the ATA process summarized below. The ATA
request package submitted to DFA for approval must contain all of the following:
1. Completed ATA form (original must be signed by the recipient’s authorized representative or designee).
2. A legal description of the site on which the project is to be constructed and an opinion signed by competent title
counsel describing the interest the applicant has in the site, including information as to any easements and
rights-of-way and certifying that the estate or interest is legal and valid.
Tabulation of all bids received and the engineer’s estimate.
Copy of the bid proposal chosen.
Evidence of advertising (submit a copy of newspaper advertisement for the project).
All MBE/WBE documentation, which includes Forms 1 through 6. Also, documentation that the local Small
Business Administration and Minority Business Development Agency centers were contacted at least five (5)
working days by the prime contractor prior to the need for referrals to MBE/WBE subcontractors and
documentation that invitations were sent to MBE/WBE subcontractors at least seven (7) working days prior to
bid opening.
A dedicated source of revenue (ordinance or resolution).
Disbursements of SRF funds may take up to 90 days. Some construction costs may be ineligible for SRF
funding. Provide a cash flow projection showing the source and expected time of receipt of funds needed to
meet project cash requirements.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
- Detailed directions for completing the ATA form are provided on the form. If you have any questions regarding the
ATA process, please contact Ken Gonzales of DFA at (916) 341-5683 or gonzalek@swrcb.ca.gov.
Section 2: PRIME CONTRACTOR &
RECIPIENT RESPONSIBILITIES
PARTICIPATION RESPONSIBILITIES FOR PRIMES
AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS
All recipients of federal funds from USEPA, as well as their prime contractors and
subcontractors, must make every effort to solicit bids from eligible MBE/WBEs. This
information must be documented and reported to DFA as described in this document.
The MBENBE responsibilities of the prime contractor are:
1.
2.
3.
Conduct a “good faith” effort to ensure maximum MBE/WBE participation in the project.
Complete or obtain from MBE/WBE subcontractors, all of the completed forms required in
these guidelines and submit them to the recipient.
Report actual MBENBE participation on a quarterly basis to the recipient.
The MBE/WBE responsibilities of the recipient are:
*- 1. Ensure that the prime contractor meets the responsibilities identified in these guidelines.
2. Submit all documentation identified in these guidelines to DFA and maintain all records in
the project files for later access or auditing.
BP-21
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
3. Provide quarterly reports on MBE/WBE procurements to DFA. -
Section 3: “Good Faith” Effort Process
Any public or private entity receiving federal funds must demonstrate that efforts were made to attract MBEMEs
on any SRF contracts. The process to attract MBEWEs is referred to as the “good faith” effort. This effort
requires the recipient, prime contractor and any subcontractors to take the steps listed below to assure that
MBE/WBEs are used whenever possible as sources of supplies, construction, equipment or services. Failure to take
the steps outlined below and submit Form 4, Prime Contractor/Recipient Selected MBEmEs, prior to bid opening,
shall cause the bid to be rejected as non-responsive. Use Forms 1 through 6 to document the process. If it is not
practical or possible to comply with one or more of the five steps, prepare an explanation and submit it with the
ATA package.
STEP 1: Divide the total requirements, when economically feasible, into small tasks or
quantities to permit maximum participation. Evidence submitted must illustrate that the
work was divided into small proprietary portions (e.g. paving, electrical, landscaping,
revegetation).
STEP 2: Establish deliverv schedules, when work requirements permit, that encourape
maximum MBE/WBE participation.
STEP 3: Use the services of the U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA) and the
Minority Business Development Agency (MBDA) of the U. S. Department of Commerce
JDOC) in soliciting qualified MBE/WBEs. Utilization of these resources is required at no
cost. These agencies offer several services, including Internet access to databases of
MBE/WBEs.
For additional assistance, the recipient or contractor could telephone the local offices 9f
both agencies in their area (SBA Minority Enterprise Development Offices and DOC
MBDA Regional Centers). The Internet web sites also include names, addresses, and
phone or fax numbers of local SBA and MBDA centers. There are contact phone numbers
listed in Step 5 that will assist you in reaching the two offices if the Internet is unavailable.
Do not write to these sources.
The prime contractor must provide documentation that the local SBNMBDA offices or
web sites were notified of the contracting opportunity (allow at least five working days for
a response). Documentation must not only include the efforts to contact the information
sources and list the contract opportunity, but also the solicitation and response to the bid
request.
STEP 4: Include qualified MBE/WBEs on solicitation lists and record the information.
Solicitation should be as broad as possible. The following web sites include a list of
available sources for expanding the search for eligible MBENBEs: http://www.sba.aov
and http://www.mbda.gov. If MBENBE sources are not located, explain why and
describe the efforts made. See Step 5 for more detailed information.
rc
For all contracts, the prime contractor must send invitations to at least three (or all, if less
than three) MBENBE vendors for each item of work referred by sources contacted. The
invitations must adequately specify the items for which bids are requested. The record of
“good faith” efforts must indicate a real desire for a positive response, such as a certified
mail receipt or a documented telephone conversation. (A regular letter or an
BP-22
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilelplate
unanswered telephone call is not an adequate “good faith” effort). A list of all sub-
bidders, including the bidders not selected, and bid amount for each item of work must be
submitted. A sample list is shown in Form 5, Sample Summary of Bids Received from
Subcontractors. If a low bid was not accepted, an explanation must be provided.
Name and Address
U.S. Small Business Administration
455 Market Street, Suite 600
San Francisco, CA 94105
STEP 5: Solicit available MBEs and WBEs whenever thev are potential sources. The
prime contractor must provide invitations to MBE/WBE sub-bidders at least seven
working days prior to the bid opening date.
Telephone and Web Site
(4 15) 744-6820 Extension 0
PRO-Net Database: http://www.sba.gov/’
Bid Notification: htttx//web.sba.aov/subnet/
Name and Address
California Department of Transportation
(CALTRANS) Business Enterprise Program’
I RE: Minority Enterprise Development Offices
Telephon
Mailing Addrer- nn
Sacramento, CA YVL IV-uulJ 1
U.S. Department of Commerce
Minority Business Development Agency
I (415) 744-3001 I Phoenix/ Opportunity Database:
1 ~ , . I
2 11 Main Street, Room 1280
San Francisco, CA 94105
I http:llwww.mbda.gov I RE: Business Development Centers
505 Van Ness Avenue http://www.cpuc.ca.gov/static/aboutcpuc/
San Francisco, CA 94102-3298 divisiop!executive+o ffice/wmbe
Le and Web Site 1
5s. rd BOX 942874
I 1820 Alhambra Blvd. I (9 16) 227-9599
Sacramento, CA 958 16 I www.dot.ca.govlhq/bep
I CA Public Utilities Commission (CPUC)’
PRO-Net is the SBA’s electronic search engine, containing business profiles for nearly 200,000
businesses. The SBA requests Internet contact only. A list of potential firms downloaded from PRO-Net
will verify that the bidder made the required contact with the SBA.
e- ’ Based on the federal Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) program, CALTRANS maintains a
database and provides directories of minority and woman-owned firms.
CPUC maintains a database of MBE/WBE-owned business enterprises and serves to inform the public.
BP-23
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
Section 4: Non-Governmental Local Contacts
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRIENOMAN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
(MBENBE) RESOURCES
The following organizations provide services to identifi potential MBE/WBEs. Some of the
organizations charge a fee or require membership fees to provide their services. Services
provided may include the entire good faith efiort process for recipients that need comprehensive
assistance.
Humboldt Builder's Exchange Inc.
2355 Myrtle Ave.
Eureka, CA 95501
Phone #: (707) 442-3708
www. humvx. com
FAX#: (707) 442-6051
California Dailv Bid A dvisor/Challenne News
I2 76 Lincoln Ave. #203
Sun Jose, CA 95125
Phone #: (408) 998-0241
or (800) 298-0240 rc FAX#: (408) 998-2534
California Procurement Training
and Assistance Center at West Vallev
I West Campbell Ave., Ste J70
Campbell CA 95008
Phone #: (408) 871-4390
FAX#: (408) 3 78-2034
Contractors Assistance Center
PO Box 7675
Redlands, CA 92375
Phone #: (800) 742-4124
FAX#: (800) 742-4125
Eldridae Bid Reporter, M/w/I) VBE Assistance
PO Box 699
West Sacramento, CA 95691
Phone #: (91 6) 444- 761 8
www. ebrbids.com
FAX #: (91 6) 444- 7731
Regis Communications Construction
Bid Source Interactive (CBSI)
PO Box 568
Burson, CA 95225-0568
Phone #: (209) 772-3670
www. Regis-usa. corn
FAX#: (800) 560-7266
1-800-962-41 62
Riverside Communitv College District
Procurement Assistance Center
2038 Iowa Ave.. Ste. IO0
Riverside, CA 92507
Phone #: (909) 788-2559
FAX#: (909) 788-2515
www. resources4u. com/pac
Small Business Exchange
703 Market St., Ste. IO00
Sun Francisco, CA 94103
Phone #: (415) 778-6250
www.sbeinc.com
FAX#: (415) 778-6255
.-
BP-24
Issue Date: November 7, 2003
State RevoIving Fund Loan Program CCR and BoilerpIate
Section 5: Reporting Requirements
All requests for services, supplies, equipment or construction solicited by the SWRCB, other governmental
agencies, non-profit agencies, or private businesses are subject to the MBE/WBE requirements. These
requirements apply to the prime contractor and all subcontractors. The only exceptions to this requirement are
contracts with governmental or non-profit agencies.
For the duration of the contract, all primary and subcontractors will be required to report progress made in fulfilling
the “good faith” effort in their quarterly reports. Failure to provide this information as stipulated in the contract
language will be cause for contract termination. DFA staff will provide recipients with the forms and instructions to
report their “good faith” efforts after the ATA.
Once a bidder is selected, the prime contractor should compile the information required by the “good faith” effort
process. All information supporting the “good faith” effort must be submitted within ten working days after
the bid opening. Recipient shall review the successful bidder’s records closely to be sure that, prior to bid opening,
all required “good faith” efforts were made. Failure of either the bidder or prime contractorhubcontractor to follow
the process and provide the necessary information to DFA could jeopardize the bidding process. The following
situations and circumstances require actions as indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
c
6.
If the apparent successful low bidder was rejected a complete explanation must be provided.
Each MBE/WBE fm utilized must complete and submit the Form 3, Contractor Self-certification with the bid.
If additional subcontracts become necessary after the award of the prime contract, provide Form 3 to DFA
within ten working days following the award of each new subcontract.
Any deviation from the information provided at the time of the bid shall not result in a reduction of MBEiWBE
participation without prior approval of
Failure of the apparent low bidder to perform the five “good faith” effort stepsprior to bid opening and
submittal of Form 4 with the bid, will result in its bid being declared non-responsive. The contract may then be
awarded to, the next low, responsive, responsible bidder that meets the requirements or the recipient may re-
advertise the project.
The apparent successful low bidder must submit documentation to the recipient within ten working days
following bid opening showing that, prior to the bid opening, all required “good faith” efforts were made.
Section 6: Definitions
A bona fide minority or women-owned business enterprise (MBENBE) is a:
(1) MBE or WBE that has submitted a “Minority or Women-Owned Business Enterprise
Contractor Self-Certification” Form 3, and
(2) A firm that has been accepted as a bona fide MBE or WBE by the recipient.
In addition, a bona fide MBENBE must be an independent business concern that is at least 5 1 %
owned, controlled, and operated by minority group members (see definition of minority group
member) or women. Ownership and control can be measured by:
0 Contract work performance responsibility.
0 Management responsibility.
At least 5 1 % share of profits and risk.
0 Other data (such as voting rights) that may clarify ownership or control.
Control means exercising the power to make policy decisions.
Operate means being actively involved in the day-to-day management of the business.
-
BP-25
Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
Determination of whether a business is at least 5 1 % owned by a woman or women shall be made
without regard to community property laws. An otherwise qualified WBE which is 5 1 % owned
by a married woman in a community property state will not be disqualified because her husband
has a 50% interest in her share. Similarly, a business that is 51% owned by a married man and
49% by an unmarried woman does not become a qualified WBE by virtue of the wife's 50%
interest in the husband's share of the business.
-
A joint venture is a business enterprise formed by a combination of firms under a joint venture
agreement. To qualify as a bona fide MBENBE, the minority-owned or women-owned and
controlled firms in the joint venture must:
o
0
Satisfy all requirements for bona fide MBENBE participation in their own rights.
Share a clearly defined percentage of the ownership, management responsibilities, risks,
and profits of the joint venture. Only this percentage of ownership will be credited
towards the MBE/WBE goal.
I A minority group member is a citizen of the United States and one of the following: I
Native American consists of American Indian, Eskimo, Aleut, and native Hawaiian. To qualify, the person
must meet one of the following criteria:
1.
2.
3. Characteristic Indian name.
4.
5.
Native Americans are at least one-fourth Indian descent
(as evidenced by registration with the Bureau of Indian Affairs).
Characteristic Indian appearance and features.
Recognition in the community as an Indian.
Membership in a tribe, band, or group of American Indians (recognized by the Federal Government), as
evidenced by a tribal enrollment number or similar indication.
African-American consists of individuals having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa.
Asian-Pacific American consists of individuals having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far
East, Southeast Asia, and the Indian subcontinent. This area includes, for example, China, Japan, Korea,
the Philippines, Vietnam, Samoa, Guam, U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific, Northern Marianas, Laos,
Cambodia, and Taiwan. The Indian subcontinent takes in the countries of India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri
Lanka, Nepal, Sikkim, and Bhutan.
Hispanic American consists of individuals with origins fiom Puerto Rico, Mexico, Cuba, or South or
Central America. Only those persons fiom Central and South American countries who are of Spanish
origin, descent, or culture should be included in this category. Persons from Brazil, Guyana, Surinam or
Trinidad, for example, would be classified according to their race and would not necessarily be included in
the Hispanic category. In addition, this category does not include persons from Portugal, who should be
classified according to race.
In cases where a firm is owned and controlled by a minority woman or women, the percentage
may be credited towards MBE participation or as WBE participation, or allocated, but may not
be credited fully to both.
Recipient - An agency (County, City, Special District, etc.) applying for a SFW loan to construct
a project.
7
BP-26 Issue Date: November 7,2003
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilevlate
Contractor - Refers to any recipient of funds who will participate in some phase of
construction. The contractor receiving funds directly from the recipient for construction is the
prime contractor. Contractors working for the prime contractor are subcontractors.
-
Form#
1
2
c
Description Completed By Submit To Forward To
Solicitation Prime Recipient DFA with ATA
Bids Received List Prime ReciDient DFA with ATA
Project Manager - If DFA staff is responsible for managing the project, the ProjectIContract
Manager is responsible for review during the planning, design and contract development phases.
3 (Att A)
4 (Att B)
Section 7: MBENBE Forms
Self-certification MBENBE Sub Prime Recipient, DFA w/ATA
Selected Subcontractors Prime (with bid) Recipient DFA with ATA
The following forms are provided to report project MBENBE information. They are available
in electronic form from Ken Gonzales at (916) 341-5683 or gonzalek@swrcb.ca.gov. If you
have any questions about completing these forms or when to turn them in, please contact Mr.
Gonzales.
5
6
.. All Forms, where applicable, must have original signature and date.
Sample Summary Prime Recipient DFA with ATA
Positive Effort Recipient DFA w/ATA
Certification
The following table provides information on who completes each form and where the forms are
to be sent:
BP-27
Issue Date: November 7,2003
T
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
Contractor Name Category
(MBE or
WE)
-
FORM 2
Task Description Bid Amount Selected Explanation for Not Selecting
(Check)
MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE/WBE)
“GOOD FAITH” EFFORT BIDS RECEIVED LIST
Issue Date: November 7,2003
BP-29
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilevlate
FORM 3 (Attachment A)
(MBE/WBE)
MINORITY- OR WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
CONTRACTOR SELF CERTIFICATION
Firm Name: Phone:
Address:
Principal Service or Product:
PLEASE INDICATE PERCENTAGE OF OWNERSHIP
OMBE % Ownership 0 % Ownership
I 1
0 Prime Contractor
0 Subcontractor 0 Broker
0 Supplier of Materiauservice
I
0 Sole Ownership 0 Corporation
0 Partnership 0 Joint Venture
I hereby certify that this firm is a Minority or Women Business Enterprise as defined in Public Contract Code, Section
101 15.1. In making this certification, I am aware of Sections 12650 et seq. of the Government Code, providing for
the imposition of treble damages for making false claims against the State and Section 101 15.10 of the Public
Contract Code, making it a crime to intentionally make an untrue statement in hs certificate.
Certified by: Title:
MBE/WBE Sub (ORIGINAL SIGNATURE AND DATE REQUIRED)
Name: Date:
Additional proof may be required upon written challenge of this certification by any person or agency. Falsification
of this certification by a firm selected to perform federally hnded work may result in a determination that the fm is
non-responsive and ineligible for fimre contracts.
This form must be submitted within 10 working days after the bid opening
date.
Issue Date: November 7,2003 BP- 30
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
”---
PROJECT LOCATION
FORM 4 (Attachment B)
PRIME CONTRACTOR/RECIPIENT
SELECTED MINORITY- AND WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (MBE/WBEs) I I
0 JOINT VENTURE
I CONTRACT RECIPIENTS NAME 1 CONTRACT NO. OR SPECIFICATION NO.
0 BROKER
AMOUNT OF CONTRACT $
PRIME CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
0 MBE 0 WBE NAME AND ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code, Federal Employer Tax ID #)
PHONE
PHONE
0 SUBCONTRACTOR 0 JOINT VENTURE
I AMOUNT OF CONTRACTS
~
0 SUPPLIEWSERVICE 0 BROKER
I MBENBE INFORMATION
AMOUNT OF CONTRACT $
I flNONE*
PHONE
I ~
I NAME AND ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code,) 0 MBE 0 WE I 0 SUBCONTRACTOR I OSWPLIEWSERVICE I
WORK TO BE PERFORMED
I 0 MBE 0 WBE
I 0 SUBCONTRACTOR I 0 JOINT VENTURE I 0 SUPPLIEWSERVICE 0 BROKER
NAME AND ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code)
I AMOUNT OF CONTRACT $ I PHONE
WORK TO BE PERFORMED
I I NAME AND ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code,) [I WBE
NAME AND ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code)
0 SUBCONTRACTOR 0 SUPPLIEWSERVICE
PHONE
~ ~
WORK TO BE PERFORMED I TOTAL MBE AMOUNT: $ TOTAL WBE AMOUNT: $
SIGNATURE OF PERSON COMPLETING FORM:
TITLE: PHONE: DATE:
*Negative reports are required. ORIGINAL SIGNATURE AND DATE REQUIRED
Failure to complete and submit this form with the bid will cause the bid to be rejected as
non-responsive.
Issue Date: November 7,2003 BP- 31
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
FORM 5
SAMPLE SUMMARY OF BIDS RECEIVED FROM SUBCONTRACTORS
*REM Sleep Co. selected over Square Fasteners, Inc. due to incomplete bid by Square Fasteners.
List type of jobs alphabetically, fi-om low to high in each category and selected low bidder. All other types of
bidders such as DBE, SWBE SMBE, and Non MBE/WBE should be shown in the "Non" column.
Form for information required to be submitted with the ATA package.
bsue Date: November 7,2003 BP- 32
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boileqdate
FORM 6
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISENOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBENVBE)
POSITIVE EFFORT CERTIFICATION BY APPLICANTlRECIPIENT
The apparent successful low bidder on Clean Water Program funded project number
C-06- is
(name of bidder)
Before the State Water Resources Control Board - Division of Financial Assistance can consider requests for an
Approval To Award (ATA) to any bidder the applicanthecipient must certify to the following:
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE)
The bidder has obtained % of MBE participation for this contract.
1.
2.
P
WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (WBE)
The bidder has obtained
Also submitted are Forms 3 and 4 which contain a complete list of those MBE and WBE fw
subcontracted with or with whom other types of agreements were made. The list includes the names of the
fm, address, phone number and dollar amount involved.
% of WBE participation for this contract.
The following affirmative steps as required by 40 CFR 35.3 150 (d) have been taken:
(1) The contractor divided total requirements when economically feasible, into small tasks or
quantities to permit maximum participation of minority and women’s businesses.
(2) The contractor established delivery schedules, where the requirements of the work permitted,
which encouraged participation by minority and women’s business.
(3)
(4)
The contractor included qualified minority and women’s businesses on solicitation lists.
The contractor assures that minority and women’s businesses were solicited, whenever they were
potential sources.
The contractor used the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration and the
Office of Minority Business Development Agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce. (5)
It must be understood that the applicanthecipient in its role as a public trustee assumes primary responsibility to
achieve an acceptable level of MBE/WBE utilization. This primary responsibility is a basic condition of the award
of any State Revolving Fund financial assistance. Where an applicatiodrecipient fails to meet its obligations under
these requirements the applicanthecipient may be declared nonresponsible and may have funding either annulled,
suspended or terminated.
In accepting these responsibilities, I hereby certify to the above.
Name of ApplicantIRecipient
Signature of Authorized Representative Date
Name and Title of Authorized Representative
This form must be submitted with the ATA package.
Issue Date: November 7,2003 BP- 33
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
11 - THE SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING FAIR PRACTICES ACT
Any person making a bid or offer to perform a contract shall, in his or her bid or offer, set forth the following:
1) The name and the location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or
render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor
licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a
portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an
amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or in the case of bids or offers for the
construction of streets or highways, including bridges in excess of one-half or 1 percent of the prime contractor's
total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.
2) The portion of work that will be done by each subcontractor under this act. The prime contractor shall list
only one subcontractor for each portion of work as is defined by the prime contractor in his or her bid or offer.
These requirements apply to the information required relating to subcontractors certified as minority or women
business enterprises. For purposes of this requirement, "subcontractor" and "prime contractor" shall have the same
meaning as those terms are defined in Section 4113 of the Public Contract Code.
12 - Executive Order 11246: 40 CFR 7.3 - EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (in relevant part)
'During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:
(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed,
color, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that
employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, creed, color, or national origin. Such action
shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or
recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for
training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this
nondiscrimination clause.
(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the
contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed,
color, or national origin.
(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer,
advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive
Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to
employees and applicants for employment.
(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of Sept. 24, 1965, and of the
rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September
24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit
access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of
investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
(6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any
of such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and
the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized
in Executive Order No. 11246 of Sept. 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as
provided in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of
Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
(7) The contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order
unless exempted by rule, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of
Executive Order No. 11246 of Sept. 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting
agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided,
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 gp. 34
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
however, That in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor
or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to
enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.
SEC. 203
(a) Each contractor having a contract containing the provisions prescribed in Section 202 shall file, and shall cause
each of his subcontractors to file, Compliance Reports with the contracting agency or the Secretary of Labor as may
be directed. Compliance Reports shall be filed within such times and shall contain such information as to the
practices, policies, programs, and employment policies, programs, and employment statistics of the contractor and
each subcontractor, and shall be in such form, as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe.
(b) Bidders or prospective contractors or subcontractors may be required to state whether they have participated in
any previous contract subject to the provisions of this Order, or any preceding similar Executive order, and in that
event to submit, on behalf of themselves and their proposed subcontractors, Compliance Reports prior to or as an
initial part of their bid or negotiation of a contract.
(c) Whenever the contractor or subcontractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or
understanding with a labor union or an agency referring workers or providing or supervising apprenticeship or
training for such workers, the Compliance Report shall include such information as to such labor union's or agency's
practices and policies affecting compliance as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe: Provided, That to the extent
such information is within the exclusive possession of a labor union or an agency referring workers or providing or
supervising apprenticeship or training and such labor union or agency shall refuse to furnish such information to the
contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the contracting agency as part of its Compliance Report and shall set
forth what efforts he has made to obtain such information.
(d) The contracting agency or the Secretary of Labor may direct that any bidder or prospective contractor or
subcontractor shall submit, as part of his Compliance Report, a statement in writing, signed by an authorized officer
or agent on behalf of any labor union or any agency referring workers or providing or supervising apprenticeship or
other training, with which the bidder or prospective contractor deals, with supporting information, to the effect that
the signer's practices and policies do not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, creed, or national origin, and
that the signer either will affirmatively cooperate in the implementation of the policy and provisions of this Order or
that it consents and agrees that recruitment, employment, and the terms and conditions of employment under the
proposed contract shall be in accordance with the purposes and provisions of the Order. In the event that the union,
or the agency shall refuse to execute such a statement, the Compliance Report shall so certify and set forth what
efforts have been made to secure such a statement and such additional factual material as the contracting agency or
the Secretary of Labor may require.
13 - 41 CFR 60-1.4 NONDISCRIMINATION CLAUSE
NONDISCRIMINATION CLAUSE
During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:
(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed,
and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or
national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or
transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation;
and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor,
state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion,
sex, or national origin.
(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer,
advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under section 202 of Executive
Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to
employees and applicants for employment.
(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the
rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 jjp_ 35
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24,
1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access
to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of
investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
(6) In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any
of such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and
the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized
in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked
as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of
Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
(7) the contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order
unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as may be directed by
the Secretary of Labor as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided,
however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor
or vendor as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to
protect the interests of the United States.
(b) Federally assisted construction contracts. (1) Except as otherwise provided, each administering agency shall
require the inclusion of the following language as a condition of any grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee
involving federally assisted construction which is not exempt from the requirements of the equal
opportunity clause:
The applicant hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract for construction
work, or modification thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41 CFR Chapter 60, which is
paid for in whole or in part with funds obtained from the Federal Government or borrowed on the credit of the
Federal Government pursuant to a grant, contract, loan insurance, or guarantee, or undertaken pursuant to any
Federal program involving such grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee, the following equal opportunity
clause:
During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:
(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed,
and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or
national origin, such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or
transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation;
and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this
nondiscrimination clause.
(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor,
state that all qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color, religion,
sex, or national origin.
(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or
workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in
conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.
(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the
rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24,
1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to
his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of
investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
(6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of
the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and
the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally assisted construction
contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such
other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24,
1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 36
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
(7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the
provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules,
regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of
September 24, 1965, so that
such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect
to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such
provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, That in the event a contractor becomes
involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the
administering agency the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the
interests of the United States.
The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above equal opportunity clause with respect to its own
employment practices when it participates in federally assisted construction work: Provided, that if the applicant so
participating is a State or local government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to any agency,
instrumentality or subdivision of such government which does not participate in work on or under the contract.
The applicant agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with the administering agency and the Secretary of
Labor in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules,
regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering agency and the
Secretary of Labor such information as they may require for the supervision of such compliance, and that it will
otherwise assist the administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary responsibility for securing
compliance.
The applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or who has not demonstrated
eligibility for, Government contracts and federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive order
and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon
contractors and subcontractors by the administering agency or the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D
of the Executive order. In addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with these undertakings,
the administering agency may take any or all of the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in
part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee); refrain from extending any further assistance to the applicant
under the program with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory assurance of future
compliance has been received from such applicant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate
legal proceedings.
(c) Subcontracts. Each nonexempt prime contractor or subcontractor shall include the equal opportunity clause in
each of its nonexempt subcontracts.
(d) Incorporation by reference. The equal opportunity clause may be incorporated by reference in all Government
contracts and subcontracts, including Government bills of lading, transportation requests, contracts for deposit of
Government funds, and contracts for issuing and paying U.S. savings bonds and notes, and such other contracts and
subcontracts as the Deputy Assistant Secretary may designate.
(e) Incorporation by operation of the order. By operation of the order, the equal opportunity clause shall be
considered to be a part of every contract and subcontract required by the order and the regulations in this part to
include such a clause whether or not it is physically incorporated in such contracts and whether or not the contract
between the agency and the contractor is written.
(f) Adaptation of language. Such necessary changes in language may be made in the equal opportunity clause as
shall be appropriate to identify properly the parties and their undertakings. [43 FR 49240, Oct. 20, 1978, as
amended at 62 FR 66971, Dec. 22, 1997]
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 37
FEB-10-2006 13=12 760 431 5769 P.02/02
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
1. During the performance of this contract, contractor and its subcontractors shall not unlawfully
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of sex, race, religion, color,
national origin, ancestry, physical disability (including HIV and AIDS), mental disability, medical
condition (cancer), marital status, age (over 40) or denial of family care leave. Contractors and
subcontractors shall insure that the evaluation and treatment of their employees and applicants for
employment are free of such discrimination and harassment. Contractors and subcontractors shall comply
with the provisions of the Fair Employment and Housing Act (Government Code Section 12900 (a-f) et
seq.) and the applicable regulations promulgated thereunder (California Administrative Code, Title 2,
Section 7285.0 et seq.). The applicable regulations of the Fair Employment and Housing Commission
implementing Government Code, Section 12900 (a-f), set forth in Chapter 5 of Division 4 of Title 2 or the
California Administrative Code are incorporated into this contract by reference and made a part hereof as if
set forth in full. Contractor and its subcontractor shall give written notice of their obligations under this
clause to labor organizations with which they have a collective bargaining or other agreement.
2. The contractor shall include the nondiscrimination and compliance provisions of this clause in al!
subcontracts to perform work under the contract.
THE UNDERSIGNED CERTIFIES THAT THE CONTRACTOR WILL COMPLY WITH THE ABOVEREQUIREMENTS.
CONTRACTOR ORSUBCONTRACTOR NAME:,
CERTIFIED BY:
NAME: Xlfr]urcr unw^inu TITLE:
SIGNATURE: 5 *>*** DATE: J -
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 gP- 38
TOTflL P.02
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
14 - 41 CFR 60-4.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS-AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS (in relevant part)
Notice of requirement for Affirmative Action to ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) by Executive Order
11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375.
1. The Offerer's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal
Employment Specifications" set forth herein.
2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the contractor's
aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows:
Time- Goals for minority participation Goals for female participation
tables for each trade for each trade
Contract Dates: 16.9% 6.9%
Contact the Division of Financial Assistance, Ken Gonzales at (916) 341-5683 for assistance with the minority goal
and tables (gonzalesk@swrcb.ca.gov). The Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs' web site for
compliance issues and preaward registry is at http://www.dol.gov/esa/welcome.
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally
assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located
outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually
performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved
and non-federally involved construction.
The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on
its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the
specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female
employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and
the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The
transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the
sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the
regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours
performed.
3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance
Programs (notify the applicable Regional Office found at www.dol.gov/esa) within 10 working days of award of any
construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this
solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer
identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and
completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed.
4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is (insert
description of the geographical areas where the contract is to be performed giving the state, county and city, if any).
§ 60-4.3 Equal opportunity clauses (in relevant part)
Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract
Specifications (Executive Order 11246)
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 39
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
1. As used in these specifications:
a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract resulted;
b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, United States Department of
Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority;
c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security number used on the Employer's Quarterly
Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941.
d. "Minority" includes:
(i) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin);
(ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American or other Spanish Culture
or origin, regardless of race);
(iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East,
Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and
(iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North
America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community
identification).
2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any
construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these
specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is
set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted.
3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S.
Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its affirmative action
obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for
those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate their participation
in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating
in an approved Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a
good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith
performance by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered
Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables.
4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7 a through p of
these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as
percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor should
reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered
Construction contractors performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a Federal or
federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical
area where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form,
and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office or from Federal
procurement contracting officers. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its
goals in each craft during the period specified.
5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the
Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's
obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto.
6. In order for the non-working training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such
apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor must
have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the
availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the
U.S. Department of Labor.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 40
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
1. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation
of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results
from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action steps at
least as extensive as the following:
a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all
facilities at which the Contractor's employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible, will assign
two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen,
superintendents, and other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the Contractor's obligation to
maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such
sites or in such facilities.
b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to
minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions have
employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the organizations' responses.
c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female
off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source or community
organization and of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the
union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed
by the Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefore, along with whatever additional
actions the Contractor may have taken.
d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which the Contractor has
a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the
Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the
Contractor's efforts to meet its obligations.
e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly
include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to
the Contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor.
The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b above.
f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and
requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any
policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report,
etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees
at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at
each location where construction work is performed.
g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these
specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other
employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such as
Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written
record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject
matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter.
h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media,
specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the
Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or anticipates
doing business.
i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to
schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations
serving the Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for
the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor shall
send written notification to organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and
tests to be used in the selection process.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 41
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where
reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site
and in other areas of a Contractor's work force.
k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3.
1. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel for
promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training,
etc., such opportunities.
m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other personnel practices, do not have
a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that
the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out.
n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are Non-Segregated except that separate or single-user toilet
and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes.
o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female
construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female contractor
associations and other business associations.
p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to and performance under the Contractor's
EEO policies and affirmative action obligations.
8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of their
affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union,
contractor-community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted
as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through p of these Specifications provided that the
contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the
employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected
in the Contractor's minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual
goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions
taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor's and failure of such a
group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor's noncompliance.
9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor,
however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups,
both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the Contractor may be in
violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example,
even though the Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in violation of the
Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized).
10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against any
person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government
contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246.
12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal
Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed
or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of
Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be
in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended.
13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative
action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to
achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply
with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director
shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 42
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that
the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required
by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee the name, address,
telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned,
social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in
status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed.
Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing
records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records.
15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish
different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area
residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block
Grant Program).
15 - ELIMINATION OF SEGREGATED FACILITIES
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE FEDERALLY-ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS
(a) A Certification of Non-Segregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967 Order (32 F.R. 7439,
May 19, 1967) on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the
award of a Federally-assisted construction contract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of
the Equal Opportunity Clause.
(b) Contractors receiving Federally-assisted construction contract awards exceeding $10,000 which,
are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause, will be required to provide for the forwarding
of the following notice to prospective subcontractors for supply and construction contracts where the subcontracts
exceed $10,000 and are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause.
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT
FOR CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES
(a) A Certification of Non-Segregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967 Order (32 F.R. 7439,
May 19, 1967) on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the
award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause.
(b) Contractors receiving subcontract awards exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the
provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause will be required to provide for the forwarding of this notice to
prospective subcontractors for supply and construction contracts where the subcontracts exceed $10,000 and are not
exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 gp. 43
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
16 - CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES
Environmental Protection Agency Region IX
75 Hawthorne Street
San Francisco, California 94105
CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES
(Applicable to federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not
exempt from the Equal Opportunity Clause.)
The federally assisted construction contractor certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his
employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to
perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The federally
assisted construction contractor certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any
segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services
at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The federally assisted construction
contractor agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity Clause in this contract. As
used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and wash
rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas,
transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact
segregated on the basis of race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. The
federally assisted construction contractor agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from
proposed subcontractors for specified time period) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed
subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt form the provisions of
the Equal Opportunity Clause, and that he will retain such certifications in his files.
Signature Date
Name and Title of Signer (Please Type)
Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 44
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
17 - DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION
DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION
CONTRACTOR/APPLICANT:
The contractor or applicant named above hereby certifies compliance with Government Code Section 8355 in
matters relating to providing a drug-free workplace. The above named contractor or applicant will:
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or
use of a controlled substance is prohibited and specifying actions to be taken against employees for violations,
as required by Government Code Section 8355(a).
2. Establish a Drug-Free Awareness Program as required by Government Code Section 8355(b), to inform
employees about all of the following:
(a) The dangers of drug abuse in the workplace,
(b) The person's or organization's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace,
(c) Any available counseling, rehabilitation and employee assistance programs, and
(d) Penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
3. Provide as required by Government Code Section 8355(c), that every employee who works on the proposed
contract or loan:
(a) Will receive a copy of the company's drug-free policy statement, and
(b) Will agree to abide by the terms of the company's statement as a condition of employment on the contract
or loan.
CERTIFICATION
I, the official named below, hereby swear that I am duly authorized legally to bind the contractor or loan recipient to
the above described certification. I am fully aware that this certification, executed on the date and in the county
below, is made under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California.
OFFICIAL'S NAME:
DATE EXECUTED: EXECUTED IN COUNTY OF:
CONTRACTOR/APPLICANT SIGNATURE:
TITLE:
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 45
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
18 - PART 32-GOVERNMENT WIDE DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (NONPROCUREMENT) AND
GOVERNMENT WIDE REQUIREMENTS FOR DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE (GRANTS)
Appendix A to Part 32-Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters-Primary
Covered Transactions
Instructions for Certification
1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective primary participant is providing the certification set out
below.
2. The inability of a person to provide the certification required below will not necessarily result in denial of
participation in this covered transaction. The prospective participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot
provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the
department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective
primary participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such person from participation in this
transaction.
3. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the
department or agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective primary
participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal
Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.
4. The prospective primary participant shall provide immediate written notice to the department or agency to which
this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective primary participant learns that its certification was erroneous
when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.
5. The terms covered transaction, debarred, suspended, ineligible, lower tier covered transaction, participant,
person, primary covered transaction, principal, proposal, and voluntarily excluded, as used in this clause, have the
meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of the rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You
may contact the department or agency to which this proposal is being submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of
those regulations.
6. The prospective primary participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered
transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is
proposed for debarment under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily
excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into
this transaction.
7. The prospective primary participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause
titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered
Transaction," provided by the department or agency entering into this covered transaction, without modification, in
all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions.
8. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier
covered transaction that it is not proposed for debarment under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended,
ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A
participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each
participant may, but is not required to, check the List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement and Non-
procurement Programs.
9. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to
render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not
required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.
10. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 6 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered
transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is proposed for debarment
under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 46
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may
terminate this transaction for cause or default.
Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility
Matters-Primary Covered Transactions
(1) The prospective primary participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:
(a) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded by
any Federal department or agency;
(b) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered
against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or
performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal
or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of
records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;
(c) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal,
State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (l)(b) of this certification; and
(d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions
(Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.
(2) Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such
prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
Appendix B to Part 32—Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary
Exclusion—Lower Tier Covered Transactions
Instructions for Certification
1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the certification set
out below.
2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this
transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered
an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government the department or
agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or
debarment.
3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal
is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when
submitted or had become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.
4. The terms covered transaction, debarred, suspended, ineligible, lower tier covered transaction, participant,
person, primary covered transaction, principal, proposal, and voluntarily excluded, as used in this clause, have the
meaning set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may
contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations.
5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered
transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is
proposed for debarment under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily
excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which
this transaction originated.
6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause
titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered
Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier
covered transactions.
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 47
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
1. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier
covered transaction that it is not proposed for debarment under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended,
ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A
participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each
participant may, but is not required to, check the List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement and
Nonprocurement Programs.
8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to
render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not
required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.
9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered
transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is proposed for debarment
under 48 CFR part 9, subpart 9.4, suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this
transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which
this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.
Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary
Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transactions
(1) The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals
is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from
participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency.
(2) Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification,
such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
19 - RESPONSIBILITY FOR REMOVAL, RELOCATION, OR PROTECTION OF EXISTING
UTILITIES; CONTRACTS AND PROVISIONS
GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 4215 (in relevant part)
In any contract to which a public agency as defined in Section 4401 is a party, the public agency shall assume the
responsibility, between the parties to the contract, for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main
or trunkline utility facilities located on the site of any construction project that is a subject of the contract, if such
utilities are not identified by the public agency in the plans and specifications made a part of the invitation for bids.
The contract documents shall include provisions to compensate the contractor for the costs of locating, repairing
damage not due to the failure of the contractor to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility
facilities not indicated in the plans and specifications with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project
necessarily idled during such work. The contract documents shall include provisions that the contractor shall not be
assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the project, when such delay was caused by the failure of the
public agency or the owner of the utility to provide for removal or relocation of such utility
facilities.
20 - SUBMITTING OF BIDS AND AGREEING TO ASSIGN
GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 4552 (in relevant part)
In submitting a bid to a public purchasing body, the bidder offers and agrees that if the bid is accepted, it will
assign to the purchasing body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4
of the Clayton Act (15 U.S. C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of
Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, materials, or services
by the bidder for sale to the purchasing body pursuant to the bid. Such assignment shall be made and become
effective at the time the purchasing body tenders final payment to the bidder. (1978)
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 BP- 48
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
21- NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 7106
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID
State of California
County of ss
_; being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is
of
the party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed
person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or
sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid,
and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a
sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly,
sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other
bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all
statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or
her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or
paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or
to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
By.
personally known to me OR proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s)
is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in
his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signatures(s) on the instrument the person(s), or entity
upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
Subscribed and sworn to before me on
(Notary Public)
Issue Date: November 7, 2003 gp. 49
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
23- LABOR CODE SECTION 6500
6500. (a) For those employments or places of employment that by their nature involve a substantial risk of
injury, the division shall require the issuance of a permit prior to the initiation of any practices, work, method,
operation, or process of employment. The permit requirement of this section is limited to employment or places of
employment that are any of the following:
(1) Construction of trenches or excavations that are five feet or deeper and into which a person is
required to descend.
(2) The construction of any building, structure, falsework, or scaffolding more than three stories high or
the equivalent height.
(3) The demolition of any building, structure, falsework, or scaffold more than three stories high or the
equivalent height.
(4) The underground use of diesel engines in work in mines and tunnels.
This subdivision does:not apply to motion picture, television, or theater stages or sets, including, but not
limited to, scenery, props, backdrops, flats, greenbeds, and grids. .
(b) On or after January 1,2000, this subdivision shall apply to motion picture, television, or theater
stages or sets, if there has occurred within any one prior calendar year in any combination at separate locations three
serious injuries, fatalities, or serious violations related to the construction or demolition of sets more than 36 feet in
height for the motion picture, television, and theatrical production industry.
An annual permit shall be required for employers who construct or dismantle motion picture, television, or
theater stages or sets that are more than three stories or the equivalent height. A single permit shall be required under
this subdivision for each employer, regardless of the number of locations where the stages or sets are located. Ah
employer with a currently valid annual permit issued under this subdivision shall not be required to provide notice to
the division prior to commencement of any work activity authorized by the permit. The division may adopt
procedures to permit employers to renew by mail the permits issued under this subdivision. For purposes of this
subdivision, "motion picture, television, or theater stages or sets" include, but are not limited to, scenery, props,
backdrops, flats, greeribeds, and grids. . . "
24- PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 7105
7105. (a) Construction contracts of public agencies shall not require the contractor to be responsible for the
cost of repairing or restoring damage to the work, which damage is determined to have been proximately caused by
an act of God, in excess of»5 percent of the contracted amount, provided, that the work damaged is built in
accordance with accepted and applicable building standards and the plans and specifications of the awarding
authority. However, contracts may include provisions for terminating the contract. The requirements of this section
shall not be mandatory as to'construction contracts financed by revenue bonds. This section shall not prohibit a
public agency from requiring that a contractor obtain insurance to indemnify the public agency for any damage to
the work caused by an act of God if the insurance premium is a separate bid item. If insurance is required, requests
for bids issued by public agencies shall set forth the amount of the work to be covered and the contract resulting
from the requests for bids shall require that the contractpr furnish evidence of satisfactory insurance coverage to the
public agency prior to execution of the contract. •
(b) For the purposes of this section:
(1) "Public agency" shall include the state, the Regents of the University of California, a city, county,
district, public authority, public agency, municipal utility, and any other political subdivision or public corporation
of the state. .
(2) "Acts of God" shall include only the following occurrences or conditions and effects: earthquakes in
excess of a magnitude of 3.5 on the Richter Scale and tidal waves. .
(c) Public agencies may make changes in construction contracts for public improvements in the course
of construction to bring the completed improvements into compliance with environmental requirements or standards
established by state and federal statutes entered into. The contractor shall be paid for the changes in accordance with
the-provisions of the contract governing payment for changes in the work or, if no provisions are set forth in the
contract, payment shall be as agreed to by the parties.
(d) (1) Where authority to contract is vested in any public agency, excluding the state, the authority shall
include the power, by mutual consent of the contracting parties, to terminate, amend, or modify any contract within
the scope of such authority. ••.'/'.
BP-50 '• •
State Revolving Fund Loan Program CCR and Boilerplate
(2) Paragraph (1) shall not apply to contracts entered into pursuant to any statute expressly requiring that
contracts be let or awarded on the basis of competitive bids. Contracts of public agencies, excluding the state,
required to be let or awarded on the basis of competitive bids pursuant to any statute may be terminated, amended,
or modified only if the termination, amendment, or modification is so provided in the contract or is authorized under
provision of law other than this subdivision. The compensation payable, if any, for amendments and modifications
shall be determined as provided in the contract. The compensation payable, if any, in the event the contract is so
terminated shall be determined as provided in the contract or applicable statutory provision providing for the
termination.
(3) Contracts of public agencies may include provisions for termination for environmental considerations
at the discretion of the public agencies.
25- PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 9203
9203. (a) Payment on any contract with a local agency for the creation, construction, alteration, repair, or
improvement of any public structure, building, road, or other improvement, of any kind which will exceed in cost a
total of five thousand dollars ($5,000), shall be made as the legislative body prescribes upon estimates approved by
the legislative body, but progress payments shall not be made in excess of 95 percent of the percentage of actual
work completed plus a like percentage of the value of material delivered on the ground or stored subject to, or under
the control of, the local agency, and unused. The local agency shall withhold not less than 5 percent of the contract
price until final completion and acceptance of the project However, at any time after 50 percent of the work has
been completed, if the legislative body finds that satisfactory progress is being made, it may make any of the
remaining progress payments in full for actual work completed.
(b) Notwithstanding the dollar limit specified in subdivision (a), a county water authority shall be subject
to a twenty-five thousand dollar ($25,000) limit for purposes of subdivision (a).
' BP-51